Glass ?A I $ % 
 Book ■ S f 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 *» fc 5 Q 
 
 OF THE, 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 ON A SIMPLE BUT COMPREHENSIVE PLAN, 
 
 ACCOMPANIED WITH SYNOPTIC TABLES. 
 
 BY A. SCOTT. 
 
 llonDon : 
 
 PllINTED FOR JOSEPH BOOKER, BOND-STREET; 
 
 G. WHITTAKER, AVE-MAR1A LANE ; AND 
 
 SIMPKIN AND MARSHALL, STATIONERS* HALL COURT. 
 
-^V* 
 
 M 
 
 London : Printed by J. B. NichoJs and Son, 
 25, Parliament-street. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 This work differs from the larger grammars at present 
 in use in this respect, that, while in those large grammars, 
 principles are partially, obscurely and circumlocutorily 
 stated, in many places and at great length, swelling the 
 volume, burthening the memory, and obstructing the pro- 
 gress, of knowledge, — in these smaller works the same prin- 
 ciples are, by a careful generalization, stated once, dis- 
 tinctly and impressively. 
 
 It differs from the smaller grammars at present in use 
 in this respect, that its " brevity " is not procured by 
 " omission" 
 
 While it is suited to the capacity of the child by its 
 extreme simplicity, and to the adult by the absence of sense- 
 less puerility, it omits no one grammatical fact or princi- 
 ple, and may each, in all its leading principles, be committed 
 to memory in a very short time, when the attempt to read, 
 write, and speak in the language, ought immediately to be 
 begun ; no Exercise being of equal value. 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 PART I. 
 ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 A HE Greeks have 
 
 24 letters, 
 
 whose figure, name, and 
 
 power are as follow. 
 
 
 
 Figure. 
 
 Name. 
 
 Power. 
 
 1. Afl6 
 
 oc,\<Qa, 
 
 alpha 
 
 a, as in far. 
 
 2. 3 £ £ 
 
 firiTix, 
 
 b&ta 
 
 b, or rather bv. 
 
 3. r y r 
 
 yocfj.[ji.x 
 
 gamma 
 
 g, hard. 
 
 4. A I 
 
 oiXru, 
 
 delta 
 
 d, or dth. 
 
 5. E £ 
 
 I \J/t\cv 
 
 epsilon 
 
 e, slender, as in met. 
 
 6. Zf{ 
 
 Z%lTOL 
 
 zeta 
 
 z, or rather dz. 
 
 7. H » 
 
 VTOt 
 
 eta 
 
 e, broad, as a in fate. 
 
 8. e&S 
 
 §nroc 
 
 thela 
 
 th. 
 
 9. I * 
 
 IsdTOC, - 
 
 iota 
 
 i, as in pin. 
 
 10. K * 
 
 KCCTVOC 
 
 cap pa 
 
 k. 
 
 H. A X 
 
 Xe&jiA^a 
 
 lambda 
 
 1. 
 
 12. M ju 
 
 fxy 
 
 niu 
 
 m. 
 
 13. N » 
 
 vv 
 
 nu 
 
 n. 
 
 i4. h r 
 
 fr 
 
 xi 
 
 x, ks, or gs, 
 
 15. O o 
 
 UkXPOV 
 
 omicron 
 
 6 short, or cio«<2. 
 
 16. II !T ttTi 
 
 Pi 
 
 P- 
 
 17. P ? p 
 
 p 
 
 rho 
 
 r. 
 
 18. 2 a- 5 
 
 (Try^aj 
 
 sigma 
 
 s. 
 
 19. Tt7 
 
 T«tJ 
 
 tau 
 
 t. 
 
 20. Y v 
 
 y 4/tXov 
 
 upsilon 
 
 u, or u slender. 
 
 21. <I> <P 
 
 <?>: 
 
 phi 
 
 ph. 
 
 22. X X 
 
 x~ 
 
 chi 
 
 kh. 
 
 23. * 4, 
 
 ¥ , 
 
 psi 
 
 ps, or bs 
 
 24. n u 
 
 u u.-.ya. 
 
 omega 
 
 o long, or open.* 
 
 Iii the beginning of a word not £. <y not /*, 9- not 9, r not ?, 
 B 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 MORE MINUTE RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 A. 
 A was doubtless pronounced, as it is by ail the people of 
 southern Europe at the present day; namely, like a mfar. 
 
 B. 
 
 The modern Greeks, pronounce {3 like a v with a slight 
 hissing through the teeth, or like bv ; and this was pro- 
 bably the pronunciation of the ancients. 
 
 Of this, the multitude of inscriptions and legends on 
 medals in which the Roman v is supplied by that letter, is 
 a strong proof; as 2 £ ^ ? for Severus. — It is true, indeed, 
 that we oftener find Zsov^og than 2e£»§osj and that they 
 
 Used also to write ovn^oc, ovocguv, ov^yiXioc, 6v-<nr<x.<7ux.vb<; ) &C 
 
 It is also true that they made use of T unpreceded by O to 
 
 should in strictness be used ; but that distinction is seldom ob- 
 served. Indeed, the different characters for the same sound are 
 in general used indiscriminately, except v and s. <r is used at the 
 beginning of words and syllables ; and at the end of syllables, if they 
 form no part of the composition, e. g. 0aXa<r-<ra, /u.e\i<r-<rci. s, on the 
 contrary, is used only at the end of words ; and, in later times, at 
 the end of syllables also, when they compose an entire word, with 
 which another is compounded, e. g. dvs/A&vw, usp'zpco, <7rposz7<Kov, as 
 in Latin, respublica is written, not refpublica. In old editions <r 
 always stands in the middle. Yet in a word where the last vowel 
 is cut off, a <r is used before the apostrophe, e. g. Ss- ut:ov<i\ v*™ 
 qrovToy tS-jtraro. 
 
 The old Greek alphabet consisted of 16 letters only, a j3 y 5 e » * 
 XfAiOTperv, which, according to tradition, were brought by 
 Cadmus from Phoenicia, and hence were called <yp*/j,/j.a.Tx Kocc^arV*, 
 <£omy.r)'/a, QoiviKia, or <£>qivmix<z. To these, Simonides of Ceos, and 
 Epicharmus the Sicilian, in the sixth and fifth centuries before 
 Christ, added 6 £ % and ^d^m, The lonians first adopted all 
 the 24 letters; and from them, the Samians ; from whom, they 
 were received by the Athenians ; but it was not till after the Pelo- 
 ponnesian war, under the archonship of Euclid {01. 94. 2. B. C. 
 403.) that they were used in public acts. Hence the 24 letters are 
 called also 'lav oca fypa/u.ju.ara, and the 16 ' Arr ixa <yptifAfAarac. Before 
 this period they used, instead of 9, <p, %, TH, FIH, KH (H being the 
 mark of aspiration or breathing,) for £ £A, for % KE, or X£, or T£, 
 for -\> B£, or 172, for *> and *>, £ or ee, as SeeXos- for Srjxor II, x. 466, 
 and o. The ^olians retained the ancient mode of writing. 
 
ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION. J 
 
 express this same V consonant, as CEYHPOC, Severus, 
 TECITAISANOS, Vespasianus (where another sort of sigma 
 is used). But we cannot on that account suppose that the 
 ov or v was pronounced like v. It merely formed that 
 faint labial sound which approaches to V, when slightly 
 articulated. 
 
 The Greeks, moreover, sometimes rendered by a jS the 
 Latin words that begin with a V, /3«A% for valere, because, 
 as they no longer used the digamma, they had nothing 
 that came nearer to it ; and, on the other hand, the Greek 
 B was changed in Latin into V, as jSc^w, vado. 
 
 The Dorians, it may further be observed, expressed the 
 digamma, or iEolic V by (3, and often interchanged <p 
 and /3. 
 
 The argument, in fine, which has been discovered in the 
 bleating of the sheep ; in Theocritus, is in favour of this 
 soft pronunciation. 
 
 That the B did not, however, , lose altogether its hard 
 sound, analogous to IT, is evident from the circumstance 
 that the Greeks used frequently to change these two let- 
 ters, one for the other ; and Plutarch takes notice that it 
 was customary for the inhabitants of Delphi to say, &xt& 
 for wTc'iv, (3>y^ov for Kr<t»h 3 &c. 
 
 r. 
 
 r had always the same hard pronunciation, as we give 
 to g only before a, o, and it. 
 
 When N, however, was changed into y before *, y, ^, 
 this 7 assumed a new sound, somewhat like that of the 
 nasal n; cLyfikoq being pronounced in the first syllable as an 
 in angle y and so in \yx&®> ungere, fo'ify&fxa., apparui, and 
 *YK°s f hasta. But then it did not so much supply the 
 place of a y, as of a new character, necessary to express 
 this sound, which is neither that of a y, nor of an v, but a 
 compound of both. 
 
 A. 
 
 It is probable that the ancients pronounced ^ like the 
 modern Greeks, with a slight hissing, or like dth, whence 
 it came, that £ of the present tense was changed into o- in 
 the future. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 E was doubtless pronounced like our e m met, — slen- 
 derer than the -n, and broader than the *. 
 
 z. 
 
 Z is equivalent to So-. Hence the Dorics by transposi- 
 tion took their o$, saying o-hvs for ^vc, c-Svyog for £ft>yo,-. 
 A; was accordingly used for this letter before its invention. 
 Hence the Latins also frequently changed this £ into D, 
 and sometimes into S, taking odor from o£Wv, massa from 
 uu?a, and patrisso from tzut^u, &c. 
 
 H. 
 
 K ought to have a middle sound betwixt s and a, or like 
 a mfate. 
 
 Hence Eustathius, who lived towards the close of the 
 twelfth century, says that /?>?, fir, is a sound made in imi- 
 tation of the bleating of sheep, and quotes to this purpose 
 the following verse of an ancient writer : 
 
 Is fatuus perinde ac ovis b&, be" dicens incedit. 
 
 It cannot be concluded, from the pronunciation of some 
 nations, as the Boeotians, who said u for *j, as appears from 
 some inscriptions, that r, had the sound of t, since the an- 
 cients would not have noticed the Boeotian pronunciation 
 of the r, or h as any thing particular, had they themselves 
 pronounced it so. 
 
 Moreover, Simonides, who invented the two long vowels 
 D and m, did it with no other intent than to make them 
 differ from the two short ones i and o. 
 
 0. 
 
 © was pronounced as it is at this day pronounced by the 
 modern Greeks, and as th is pronounced by ourselves. T 
 and the mark of aspiration were accordingly used for this 
 letter before its invention. 
 
 I. 
 
 I was pronounced slender like i in pin, 
 
ALPHABET AND PRONUNCIATION. 5 
 
 K. 
 
 K always had the sound of k. Hence they wrote Kixfym 
 for Cicero. 
 
 A. 
 
 A was pronounced like our /. 
 
 M. 
 
 M had the same sound as among us. 
 
 N. 
 
 Quintilian says that the m was frequently used at the 
 end of words in Latin, but never in Greek, and that the 
 Greeks then changed it into n, because the n had a more 
 agreeable sound, though it was rare in Latin to see words 
 ending with this letter. Hence it must be an error to pre- 
 tend that in Greek the n ought to be pronounced like an 
 m before 0, tt, or y. ; since at the end of words it would be 
 a barbarism to say tov (3lov, as if it were torn bion, rnv usgiSec, 
 as if tern merida, and the like. 
 
 H was pronounced ks or gs, taking the place of X among 
 us. Kc, Xc, and r? were ascordingly used for this letter 
 before its invention. 
 
 o. 
 
 O approached in sound to u, or was like the close o of 
 the Italians. 
 
 n. 
 
 n was pronounced like our p. 
 
 P. 
 
 P was pronounced like our r. 
 
 s. 
 
 The pronunciation of a- was firm and intire, as well be- 
 tween two vowels, as in any other place. Wherefore it is 
 to be pronounced in Xgwo-ws in the same manner as in <?*?, 
 tuce, 
 
 e3 
 
6 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE- 
 
 T. 
 
 T was pronounced like our t. 
 Y. 
 
 Y had two sounds : one common to the Greeks and Ro- 
 mans ; and another peculiar to the Greeks. 
 
 I . As to the former, which resembled our u in bull, Teren- 
 tianus says, that the Roman U was sometimes put instead 
 of this Greek Y, when, says he, it made a sound that was 
 common both to Greeks and Latins. Hence the fact observed 
 by Sanctius, who says, Admoneo litteram gracamY perpetub 
 verti apud Latinos in U, ut <pvw,fuo, \vv, luo, <pvyu,fuga, &c. 
 
 II. As to the second or peculiar sound, it was doubtless 
 it which induced Quintilian to say, that, in the word Ze- 
 phyris, for instance, there were two letters (the Z and the 
 Y, which he calls jucundissimas litieras) which the Romans 
 had not, but were obliged to borrow of the Greeks whenever 
 they wanted to make use of Greek words, because if they had 
 attempted to write them with Latin letters, this would have 
 produced a rough and barbarous sound, lib. 12. c. 10. This 
 c Y%|,iXov was pronounced like a French u ; for, according to 
 Capella, Terentianus, and Priscian, it had a middle sound 
 betwixt o'j and ivrx. 
 
 4>. 
 
 $ ought not to be pronounced like a simple/, but like 
 pf. jQuintilian accordingly remarks, that Cicero rallied a 
 Greek who used to pronounce Fundanius like Qundnnius, 
 viz. Pfhundanius. IT and the mark of aspiration were ac- 
 cordingly used for this letter before its invention. 
 
 X. 
 
 X was pronounced like kh. K and the mark of aspira- 
 tion were used for it before its invention. 
 
 f was pronounced like ps or bs. Hence 11$ or B? were 
 used for this letter before its invention. 
 
 Q. 
 
 : Qjj.iyoc was distinguished from outx^ov in the pronuncia- 
 tion : this last being pronounced on the extremity of the 
 
D1PHTH0KGS. 7 
 
 lips ; and the other in the hollow of the mouth, as being 
 of a fuller sound, n had, in short, the sound approaching 
 to a, which constitutes the open o of the Italians. 
 
 This is confirmed by our having at>Xa£ or «Aaf , sulcus ; 
 r^vixa. or rfijj.cc, according to the Dorics 5 whence it is 
 that the Latins haye also caudex or codex, caurus or corus, 
 &c. Hence also The Julians said rpoTo? for r?«Tos, exerci- 
 tus ; ovu for avw, supra. Which the Latins imitated in 
 borrowing domo from caw*, and saying Fabius for Fovius ; 
 Farreus for forreus, &c. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 A*. 
 
 The diphthong cu requires both these letters to be sound- 
 ed, and not a sound which would confound it with w. 
 
 The Romans, according to Quintilian, formerly pro- 
 nounced this diphtiiong by an «, and i, in the same manner 
 as the Greeks. The same is likewise attested by Scaurus, 
 an ancient grammarian, who says, that the Latins having 
 borrowed this diphthong of the Greeks, and having after- 
 wards changed it for ce, they still pronounced it in such a 
 manner, as to distinguish the two vowels. 
 
 The authority, moreover, of the poets, who divided a£ 
 into two syllables, as Virgil in these genitives auliii, pictai, 
 &c. is sufficient to prove, that the sound of those two let- 
 ters was distinguished in the diphthong. 
 
 E* was also pronounced by two vowels, and had a fuller 
 sound than Img, 
 
 Hermogenes, treating of the final cadence of periods, 
 says, that diphthongs and vowels are generally graceful at the 
 end of words ; though to this rule si was an exception : but 
 if they ended with a single t, as that vowel rather closes the 
 mouth than Jills it, the sentence then has nothing sonorous or 
 sublime. In which he shews, that though the sound of « 
 be less full than that of other diphthongs, it is still however 
 different from that of a single t, since he makes so particu- 
 lar a distinction between them. 
 
8 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 From 'tpifh&a, shuv, the Romans made, indeed, Iphi- 
 genla, icon. By the ancient Greeks, however, they were 
 pronounced separately, which mode is retained by poets 
 and Ionians ; as in op, 'ArpsiSxs. This practice is intel- 
 ligible, if we assume that a was pronounced like *£ sepa- 
 rately, yet in one syllable ; so that, according to the dif- 
 ferent dialects, sometimes e, sometimes i had the leading 
 sound. 
 
 Ay. 
 
 This diphthong was pronounced distinctly, like the pre- 
 ceding. 
 
 Ev. 
 
 This was doubtless also pronounced distinctly. 
 
 It is quite without reason that some attempt to pro- 
 nounce ay in Greek like af, and eu like ef as if i-^ixlv was 
 an/, and not an u ; or as if a diphthong could be formed 
 of a vowel and a consonant, instead of two vowels. Aris- 
 tophanes, indeed, to express the barking of a dog, made 
 him say a J a.5. But ef and af would be so harsh, that 
 there is no similar instance in Greek: e. g. v.afs, Orphefs, 
 pepaidevntai, for vxvg, 'OpQivc, Trrrai^a'vra;. 
 
 O*. 
 
 This diphthong was doubtless pronounced distinctly. 
 
 Oi might seem to have the same sound as ;, from the in- 
 terchange of Aot/xo> and Xiy.o; in Thucydides II. 54. But 
 this interchange appears to have arisen not so much from 
 the similar sound of o* and t, as from the remaining resem- 
 blance of the two words, and the corruption so easily in- 
 troduced by tradition. Had 01 been pronounced like t, the 
 two words which occur in Hesiod, Epy. 241. tot/*&» ojxov *at 
 /U/u,ov could not have been distinguished, at least so long as 
 the poems did not exist in writing, but only in reci- 
 tation. 
 
 Ov. 
 . This diphthong was also pronounced distinctly. 
 
( 9 ) 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 Of the letters seven are Vowels. 
 
 Two short : f, o. 
 
 Two long: n, u. 
 
 Three doubtful : a, ;, v. 
 
 The latter are called doubtful, because they are long in 
 some syllables and short in others. 
 
 A vowel is called pure, when it follows a vowel ; and 
 impure, when it follows a consonant. In the former case 
 it is called pure, because it forms a syllable of itself, with- 
 out being mixed with a consonant. 
 
 There are twelve Diphthongs : 
 
 Six proper: cct, av, u, sv, oj, ov, 
 
 Six improper „• a, *, «, w, vt, uv. 
 
 In the formation of the proper diphthongs, i and v are 
 placed after a., e, or o. Hence the former are called Sub' 
 junctive, and the latter Prepositive. 
 
 In the formation of the improper diphthongs, * and v are 
 placed after the same vowels made long, a, n, or u. The 
 *, then become silent, is subscribed, or placed under the 
 former vowel. For this reason ut is sometimes written y. 
 
 When two vowels, which generally coalesce into a diph- 
 thong, retain their separate sounds, two dots are placed 
 over the latter vowel, and form a diseresis, as «uV*o$. 
 
 Of Vowels and Diphthongs, some are changeable and 
 some unchangeable ; 
 
 The changeable Vowels are - - a, ?, o, 
 And the unchangeable - - - », *, v. 
 
 The changeable Diphthongs are - «u, av 3 
 And the unchangeable - - - n, tv, 
 
 ov. 
 
 There are seventeen Consonants, viz. 
 
 Nine Mutes - - - 0, y, d, 0, x, v, v, <p, x> 
 Seven Semi- Vowels - (, X, ju., >, f , £, >l, — and <r. 
 
10 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 The mutes are divided into 
 
 Three soft, it, ■*, r 
 
 Three middle, (3, y, 5 
 
 Three aspirate, <p, x-> ^' 
 
 Each soft mute has its corresponding middle and aspi- 
 rate, into each of which it is frequently changed 3 thus t: 
 has (3 for its middle, and <p for its aspirate. 
 
 When two mutes come together, they must be both 
 either soft, middle, or aspirate : thus rirvvreu, ItvQQw, not 
 tetvQtcci, ItvkQyiv. 
 
 £ may be called a solitary consonant, which, placed after 
 the mutes, assists in forming 
 Three double letters ; thus, 
 
 *s, fc, q*g, form 4, j 
 *?> yu x$> form I ; 
 
 rg, $$, Qc, form f. 
 
 The remaining four are liquids .- x, p, v, p. 
 
 {y before y, x, %, Xi 
 ju before /5, /*, v, $, \ 5 
 A, p, and cr, before A, p, &. 
 
 Thus lyypdtpco for IvypoiQco ; Ipfialvv for lv(3xtvu> &C. ; SO in 
 
 Latin, impedio for inpedio ; illudo for inludo, &c 3 and an- 
 ciently aggulus for angulus, &c. 
 
 
 ASPIRATIONS, ACCENTS, &c 
 
 There are two Breathings : the aspirate (), which the 
 Greeks use instead of the letter H, as Ux%v ; and the 
 soft ('), which denotes the absence of the aspirate ; as 
 clXXcc. 
 
 Y and p at the beginning of a word have always the aspi- 
 rate. If two p come together, the former has the soft, the 
 latter the aspirate : thus ?ppeov. 
 
 Anciently H was the aspirate in Greek, as it is in Latin : 
 thus HEKATON was written for kaTov. The parts of the 
 H were next taken to denote the breathings ; and the mark 
 of the soft was -| , of the aspirate, f-. This form was af- 
 terwards simplified into J and L ; and lastly it was rounded 
 into the present shape, ' and \ 
 
ASPIRATIONS, ACCENTS, &C. H 
 
 The iEolians, who avoided the aspirate, used another 
 sound, similar to a V or a W, to prevent the hiatus occa- 
 sioned by the meeting of vowels in different syllables : this 
 was called the digamma, because its figure resembled two 
 gammas, one over the other, as F or F. Thus they wrote 
 Fsa-wepx for eo-fflpa, wFcv for wok, Fioo* for i'^ov. Hence the 
 Latin vespera, ovum, video, &c. 
 
 The digamma was not pronounced so strong as we now 
 pronounce the V consonant, for which reason it produced 
 no position in verse. 
 
 Accent is the depression or elevation of the voice in 
 pronouncing a Syllable, and is either Acute ('), Circum- 
 flex 0, or Grave ( N ). , 
 
 The Acute accent raises the voice, and affects one or 
 more of the last three syllables of a word, if it has so 
 
 many ; as o-otyoc, Ko&pcc, clyyzhoc. 
 
 The Circumflex lengthens the sound, and affects either 
 the last syllable of a word, or the last but one ; as Trotw, 
 
 fiooirs. 
 
 The Grave depresses the voice, and affects the last 
 syllable only : as t»^»i. 
 
 Words marked with an Acute accent on the last syllable 
 are called Oxytona ; with a Circumflex, Circumflexa ; and 
 such as have no Accent, or a Grave on the last syllable, 
 are called Gravitona, or Barytona. 
 
 The Apostrophe ('), marked at the head of a letter in 
 the end of a word, denotes that the Vowels a, e, t, or o, 
 and sometimes the Dipthongs on or o*, are cut off, the next 
 word beginning with a Vowel j as vag \^o\ for w«p«. Ipo), 
 with me ; jSaXojw l-yw v for /SaXojuat lyu, I would rather. 
 
 When the Apostrophe leaves any of the smooth Conso- 
 nants 7T, jc, r, before a Vowel Aspirate, the smooth Conso- 
 nant is changed into one of the rough kind corresponding 
 with it, viz. 7T into <p, k into x> an d r into : lp i7T7r« for 
 Itt* tTTTTtf, on the Horse ; vu'^G' oXrv for vvkIcc oXnv, the whole 
 night. Both the words ought, in this case, to be pro- 
 nounced together as one. 
 
 Sometimes a Vowel is cut off in the beginning of a 
 
12 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 word ; as a Wf for Z aval, King. Both the word.? 
 ought then also to be pronounced as one. 
 
 Sometimes two words are joined in one ; as EysJfta* for 
 lyu oip.cu, I think. 
 
 When the following word begins with a Vowel, v is, for 
 the sake of better sound, usually added to the Third Person 
 of Verbs ending in e or <n, and to the Dative Plural of 
 Nouns in <ri ; as unm kvra for Htzs owtu, he said to him ; 
 iyu<Ti.i for E^aff"*a they have; TraViv for Tract, to all. 
 
 There are only four points : 
 
 The comma, like the Latin ( , ). 
 The note of interrogation ( ; ). 
 The colon, or point at top ( • ) . 
 The full stop, like the Latin ( . ). 
 
 PART II. 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 Article, Noun, Adnoun, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, 
 Preposition, Conjunction. 
 
 The Interjections are included by the Greeks in the Ad- 
 verbs. 
 
 The first four are declined with Gender, Number, and 
 Case.. 
 
 There are three genders : Masculine, Feminine, and 
 Neuter. 
 
 To these may, however, be added the other two, viz. 
 the Common and the Doubtful. 
 
 There are three Numbers : 
 
 The Singular which speaks of one. 
 The Dual, of two or a pair. 
 The Plural, of more than two. 
 
PAHTS OF SPEECH. 13 
 
 There are five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
 Accusative and Vocative. 
 
 The Nominative and Vocative are often the same in the 
 singular, and always in the dual and plural. 
 
 The Dative has always t, either final, or in a final diph- 
 thong. 
 
 The Genitive plural always ends in a>v. 
 
 The Dual has only two terminations: one for the Nomi- 
 native, Accusative and Vocative j the other for the Geni- 
 tive and Dative. 
 
 Neuters have the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative 
 alike ; and in the plural those cases end in a. In the dual 
 they are the same as the masculine. 
 
 € ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article 6, »>, to, this or the, serves to distinguish 
 the Genders of Nouns, &c. and is declined thus : 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. o, 
 
 n> 
 
 TO, 
 
 
 
 
 ol, 
 
 at. 
 
 TO,, 
 
 G. Ttf, 
 
 T>1?> 
 
 T«, 
 
 N. A. 
 
 tw, rex,, 
 
 TW, 
 
 TUV, 
 
 TWV, 
 
 TWJ, 
 
 D. Tffl, 
 
 ™, 
 
 TW, 
 
 
 
 
 to7?, 
 
 t«?j, 
 
 TO?J 
 
 A. TOV, 
 
 rnv, 
 
 TO. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 TOiV, TCUV, 
 
 To?y. 
 
 TsV, 
 
 T«£, 
 
 T66. 
 
 The article usually answers to the definite article the in 
 English. When no article is expressed in Greek, the En- 
 glish article indefinite a is signified. Thus avfywTz-o* means 
 a man, or ma in general ; and 6 av9p«7roc, the man. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 Declensions of Nouns are three, answering to the three 
 first Declensions in Latin. 
 
 The first ends in a and n feminine, and in «» and »s mas- 
 culine. 
 
14 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 The lirsttwo Declensions subscribe * in the Dative singular. 
 
 The second ends in oc generally masculine and sometimes 
 feminine, and ov neuter. 
 
 The third ends in cc, i, v neuter ; a feminine ; v, %, p, ?, 
 4. of all Genders, and increases in the Genitive. 
 
 To the Common Gender belong such Nouns as signify 
 both Sexes 5 as 6 k»\ y> oivfyuvos, a Man or Woman ; 6 %&a n 
 (j.ccprvp 3 vpog, a Witness. 
 
 Such Nouns as are found to be of different Genders in 
 different Authors are said to be of the Doubtful Gender j 
 as or »j x«0of, a, a Stone 5 5 or « tp&pvy^, yyyo?, the Throat. 
 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 X. 
 
 MouV-«, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 MoGV-a;, 
 
 G. 
 
 MoeV-^c, 
 
 N. A. V. Mou'cr-a, 
 
 G. 
 
 Movr-wv, 
 
 I>. 
 
 MoyV«*j, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 MoyV-aie, 
 
 A. 
 
 MoyV-av, 
 
 G. D. Mojcr-atv. 
 
 A. 
 
 MoyV-aj, 
 
 V. 
 
 "hlovu-a 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Movcr-oa. 
 
 
 I. Nouns in $«, 
 
 )a, pa, and a p^re, make the Genitive 
 
 in 
 
 a?, the Dative 
 
 in #, and the rest like 
 
 Movcrx : thus 
 
 N 
 
 QtXloi, G. ^iX/a?, 
 
 D. <piX;ot. 
 
 
 
 The termination in a, which makes «s in the Genitive, 
 is generally long. Hence words in « contracted, as 'A(?uv», 
 juv«, &c. make a?. For the same reason, eyXaxa makes 
 ey'Aaxa?. But 6wc«vQ«, whose final « is short, makes emdivQns. 
 
 From this Genitive in ac is derived the ancient Genitive 
 of the first Declension of Latin nouns, as Paterfamilias. 
 From the Dative in ca or a, is formed the Dative in <e. 
 The similarity between the Accusative in av and the Latin 
 am is obvious. 
 
 II. Nouns in n make the Accusative in w f the Vocative 
 in «, and the rest like Mowra : thus N. t*/*i? ( A. t*/a«», V. 
 
 III. Nouns in a? make the Genitive in ou, the Dative in 
 a, and the rest like MouVa : thus N. taplaq, G. Tocpiov, D. 
 rajuta. 
 
 Some nouns in ac make the Genitive in a as well as in 
 •oy \ as TlySayopaj, G. -oa and -a 5 ITarpaXoia^ G. -ov and -a 
 
 
NOUN. 15 
 
 Some keep « exclusively 5 as ©w/xar, G. ©w/xa; Bopfa, G. 
 Boppa ; Samya?, G. Saravcs ; 7?a.7V7T<x,q } G. Ta7T7ra. These 
 Genitives in a were the Doric form. 
 
 IV. Nouns in *$ make the Genitive in ov, the Accusa- 
 tive in *jv, the Vocative in n, and the rest like Movca : 
 thus N. TtXwvns, G. tsXuvov, A, reXuvnv, V. rsXuvv). 
 
 In order to form the V. the termination of the N. is 
 commonly shortened. Hence the following make the V. 
 in a : nouns in ?*>$ 3 — compounds in sru?, as xwwttvj? ■; — 
 nouns in rig derived from /*sTpw, nuXu, rpifioj, as, ytopitpnq ; 
 or denoting nations, as Tlifa-ng, Persian, V. Ilspc-a ; but 
 IT/po-ru, the name of a man, has Ilspc-n : ^ayvrj?, pivuixuric, 
 7rvpec,l%[jt.Y)<; also make a ; but Alrtrns, aivapsr^j, xa^PuAajwTETvij 
 make n. Nouns in o-t*$ make a and n. 
 
 The iEolians and Macedonians adopted the termination 
 a even in the N. of these nouns : thus ivirora for prsrems. 
 Hence the Latin N. Poeta, Athleta, &c. 
 
16 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK, LANGUAGE, 
 
 £ -I § § § 1 is « a 1 I i 
 
 '§< a ^3 
 
 l- b t« 
 
 
 ^ I 3-.: -•-;-• * 
 
 § 
 
 *s 
 
 « g s 
 
 
 a. 
 
 »8 " 8 "8 
 
 ^8 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "3 
 
 ea 
 
 
 < 
 
 H *- ej 
 
 h) 
 
 1 1 s -,'i-'i-|i a ii & til-it 
 
 8 t- P C 
 
 8 %*%■ 8 
 
 8 '§. 8 
 
 •8 2 
 
 - i 
 
 a w » ^ - 
 
 "■g ^ 8 » f- § 8' g g 8 '1 g g « 
 
 8- "•* b b b b b .bv§ b b b b b 
 
 ^ 
 
 
First 
 
 N. 
 
 NOUN. IJ 
 
 Synoptical view of the Terminations alone. 
 Term. Second Term. Third Term. Fourth Term. 
 Singular. 
 
 us 
 
 «? 
 
 G. 
 
 ag 
 
 Ub 
 
 
 D. 
 
 a, 
 
 y 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ay 
 
 '/?» 
 
 
 V. 
 
 cc 
 
 '1 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 G. D. 
 
 
 
 aty 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 at 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 wj» 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 fl5*'ff 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 a? 
 
 Singular 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. Aoy-oc, 
 
 
 
 N. X$y*8ty 
 
 G. Xoy-cv, 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 Aoy-w, 
 
 G. Aoy-wy, 
 
 D. \6y-u, 
 
 
 
 D. A&7" *-'> 
 
 A. \6y-ov, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Aoy-oty. 
 
 A. Aoy-ovj, 
 
 N. Aoy-f. 
 
 
 
 V. Aoy-ot. 
 
 The second Deel 
 
 fusion of L 
 
 atin nouns 1 
 
 s analogous to this 
 
 Synoptical or Comparative View of its two forms. 
 Singular. 
 
 TO |VA0V 
 
 rov <;vXov 
 
 TU3 %v'X(i) 
 TO fl>AoJ» 
 
 fvAoy 
 
 c 3 
 
 N. 
 
 o kyyikoc, 
 
 G. 
 
 rov ocyysXov 
 
 D. 
 
 7w ayytAw 
 
 A. 
 
 Toy ayyfAov 
 
 V. 
 
 «yyfAf 
 
18 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N. A. 
 
 t« ctyytXu 
 
 
 r» qvXu 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 to7v kyyiXow 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ro?y %vXon 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ol ocyysXoi 
 
 
 ra. %vXa. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 Twv ctyysX'jJv 
 
 
 Twv qvXwv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 to7$ ayysXotg 
 
 
 to 7? ^vXotg 
 
 
 A. 
 
 tov'c a-yyiXovg 
 
 
 ra. f uX» 
 
 
 V. 
 
 ctyytXoi 
 
 
 £vX». 
 
 
 
 Synoptical View of its Termination. 
 
 
 First 
 
 Second 
 
 
 Firs* 
 
 Secomi 
 
 Term. 
 
 Term. 
 
 
 Term. 
 
 Term, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. o> 
 
 ov 
 
 
 N. ** 
 
 a 
 
 G. 
 
 ov 
 
 N.A.w 
 
 G. wv 
 
 
 D. 
 
 a 
 
 G.D. o*y 
 
 D: 0*5 
 
 
 A. 
 
 oy 
 
 
 A. OVi 
 
 a 
 
 V. E 
 
 OY 
 
 
 V. « 
 
 a 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural, 
 
 N. 
 
 CTWTYig, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 aa>TYip-e$, 
 
 G. 
 
 <TU)Tr,p-oc x 
 
 N. A. V. <rwTvp-t, 
 
 G. 
 
 <rUTYip-WY, 
 
 D. 
 
 crcoT^-t, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 auTT.p-O'i, 
 
 A. 
 
 <rwrr,p~a., 
 
 G. D. crooTrio-oiv. 
 
 A. 
 
 (T&Trip-ac, 
 
 V. 
 
 crwTJp. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 <twt »)£-.«$. 
 
 The correspondence of the third Declension of Latin 
 nouns with the third of the Greek is obvious. 
 
 It has been conjectured that all nouns of this Declension 
 originally ended in c, and that the Genitive was formed by 
 the insertion of o before e, as it is still in oQig, 0^*05 $ f*vc, 
 
 uvog j ripug, Zpuog, &C. : thus were yvvxiKg, og j <*pa/?s, og ; 
 
 y.vx.Xw7rg, og ; /3»J^?, os; yuVs, 0?, &c. On this principle, 
 these terminations were, &*■*$£, 0?; nJpg, or, Ixs$«»t$, og, &c. 
 
sovx. 19 
 
 In support of this doctrine it must be observed, that the 
 effect of time on language is to abbreviate words, particu- 
 larly those which occur most frequently - 7 and hence Ipum 
 has been abbreviated into Ijuaj, ^pdy^arc into Trpciypa., irl^c 
 into 7rouV, &c. Sometimes one, it appears, sometimes the 
 other, of the two final consonants is dropped - } thus /x-ap- 
 Twps is softened sometimes into fxdpTvp, and sometimes into 
 fxoipTv? j SixQwc into $s\(p\v and h\®lc. 
 
 Hence though the consonant preceding the % final of the 
 Nominative has been dropped, it re-appears in the Voca- 
 tive, which is thus shortened, as tdxocvc, V. rdxav. 
 
 This analogy takes place in the Latin third Declension^ 
 of which the termination was in s, and formed the Geni- 
 tive by the insertion of i, as it is still in sus, suis ; plebs, 
 plebis; heroSy herois ; and in pacs, pads; regs, regis, &c. 
 Hence nocts has been abbreviated into nox, lads into lac, 
 supellectils into supellex, &e. On the same principle these 
 terminations were lapids, is ; dents, is; vers, is,- leons, is, 
 &c. It seems indeed as natural that or bis should be formed 
 from orbs, as urbis is from urbs. To complete the analogy, 
 arbors, honors, labors, are softened into arbor, and some- 
 times into arbos, &c. 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 I. Nouns in »?, ve, av?, ovc, whose Genitive ends in o* 
 pure, change rinto v, as fiorpvc, G. fiorpvoc, A. fiorpw. 
 
 Hence the Latin Accusative of the third Declension in n 
 and m. 
 
 Aaas also makes Xaav. Al?, Ato?, makes Ata. Xpov^ 
 makes xpoa. The Poets frequently use the regular termi- 
 nation in a. 
 
 II. Barytons in »« and ve, whose Genitive ends in 05 im- 
 pure, make both a, and v j as "pic, G. ep^oc, A. ep^a. and %p». 
 
 KXeIc, k\i7$oc, has both terminations. Avpoo-Qsv-nc makes 
 ix and riv. Xdpic, a Grace, has XapiTa. Xoiptc, favor, has 
 
 Xapiv. 
 
 Vocative. 
 The termination of the Vocative either, 1. shortens the 
 long vowel of the Nominative, as tf EKTwp, V/Exropj or, 2. 
 
20 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 «3rops ?, as juCV, V. fxv ; or 3. changes 5 into v, as rclXus, 
 V. TaAay. 
 
 Some Vocatives remain the same as their Nominatives : as, 
 
 I. Participles. 2. s G3Wj and novs 5 but OlSiirov and %«A- 
 xo7roy are sometimes found. 3. Oxyton nouns in 15 and i>c, 
 as l\nU, ^Xa/Auj. 4. Nouns in »iv, as wot/Wv. 5. Oxytons 
 in wv, as Z«p7ni^wv. 6. "Aa-trip, S»fy, n/»?p, &c. 
 
 But the Poets, in many of these, prefer the termination 
 shortened either in the quantity or in the number of letters. 
 Nouns in «?, evros, make the V. in ft and ev, as %»pG*$, V. 
 X*p'u" and xxfa' f uva*f makes yuv«>. "Av«| often makes &«. 
 
 Dative Plural 
 
 Is formed, I. From the Dative Singular by inserting o- 
 before t ; as ijwnjp, crumpi, a-urripcri ; yu-^, yvwl, yu\^*. But ^, 
 0, v, r, are dropped for the sake of softness, as Xupvolh, 
 Xxfjcnracri. Ovt* is changed into ovo-i, as tv'tttovtj, tuVtouc*. 
 
 II. Words ending in g after a diphthong add 1 to the No- 
 minative Singular ; as «/we)ij f twsTo-i. 
 
 Except KTilc-j xtso-1 ; opo[AVjc y , dpopicn ; viei/g, wiser* j oug, cJcr* j 
 
 5rou\, ttoo-Ij which are regular from wmit, Spopn, v\h, wt), 
 Tool. Tps7g makes rptui. 
 
 III. Nouns syncopated make the Dative in aw, as rrotrrip, 
 sraTspt, trarpi, 7raTpa.o~t. 
 
 This is done to avoid harshness. Thus in dv^pao-i, $ is 
 inserted because p never follows v. Tocarvip retains yctc-Tripo-i. 
 Xsip makes x^ from the poetic ^sp*. 
 
 These rules apply to adjectives and participles as well as 
 to substantives. 
 
 Examples of the Third Declension rejecting the Consonant 
 before <n 3 in the dative plural. 
 
 
 Termination a 
 
 i f. 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 N. to crufxa, 
 
 TO /AS?U, 
 
 to yew 
 
 G. tou crwjuot — 705 
 
 TOU {AsAi 70$ 
 
 Toy yov— — cctoj 
 
 D. TW <TU(JL0(.—— 74 
 
 A. to 0-07x54 
 V. <rw ( u« 
 
 Tea /jteAi— Tt 
 
 TO jUsAi 
 
 tw yov — cm 
 to yovv 
 yovu 
 
 
NOUN. 
 
 21 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. tw <rwju.a— re 
 
 TW /A£^.t — T£ 
 
 tw <yov— «Tf 
 
 G.D- To7y OrUjMK TOlf 
 
 T07v [X.t\l TOit 
 
 Plural. 
 
 <ro?v yoy— "CtTO*» 
 
 N. to. <ru>[A0t, — ra 
 G. Twy crw/xec — Twy 
 
 ruv [At\l — rwy 
 
 t« yoy— «t« 
 Twy yoy — arwy 
 
 D, to7$ a-ufxK — crt 
 
 ro7g ju-fXi — a? 
 
 to7§ yoy — a<7* 
 
 A. ra crw/Aa— t« 
 
 rx /xsAt — ra 
 
 rat> yoy- — sera 
 
 V. crwjua — t« 
 
 piXi — ra 
 
 yoy — «t« 
 
 N. 
 
 o priv, 
 
 G. 
 
 tou jtxny — of 
 
 D. 
 
 tw jw,»)y — < 
 
 A. 
 
 Toy jonjy— a 
 
 V. 
 
 fm'y 
 
 N. A. tw /ictjy— 
 
 G. 
 
 D. roTy p.*jv- 
 
 Termination v p $ (| 4) 
 Singular. 
 
 6 TTOifAW 
 TOU TTOijtX — £yoj 
 TW ttoi/a — Eyt 
 Toy Trot/* — £y« 
 woi/Atfy 
 
 Dual. 
 
 TW TTOijW, — £yi 
 
 7y To7y xoifj. — £yoi* 
 
 o Xsuv. 
 
 rov XEoy-=— TOf 
 tw Xbov — n 
 Toy XEoy— -T* 
 \tov 
 
 tw Xsoy— TE 
 ToTy Xt9v — roiy 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 ol prill — ej 
 
 ot iroip—-tng 
 
 ol Xscvreg 
 
 G. 
 
 TWy JJI.YIV U9 
 
 Twy 7ro*ju, — £ywy 
 
 Twy XsovTwy 
 
 D. 
 
 ToTj (juujWi) fxri-'g-i 
 
 to7j woifA, — sen 
 
 to7$ Xs— over* 
 
 A. 
 
 rovg ur,v — ug 
 
 rov y g •Troijx — Eya$ 
 
 tou v j Xe— oyTaf 
 
 V. 
 
 pr,v— ig 
 
 TTOijU £y££. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Xfovrsg. 
 
 N. 
 
 \X"P> f 
 
 1 yiyug, 
 
 o iraTg 
 
 G. 
 
 rng x H P°S 
 
 rov yly — ccyrog 
 
 TOU 7TGW $0£ 
 
 D. 
 
 rf X«P» 
 
 tw yiy — a»Ti 
 
 tw 9rai=— di 
 
 A. 
 
 rsjy %£7pa 
 
 Toy yly — ayTa 
 
 Toy wa7— -<$a 
 
 V. 
 
 X ?i/ P 
 
 y/yay 
 
 7TCU 
 
22 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 A. t« x< : ? ; 
 D. 7cc7v p£jpo?y 
 
 
 7w y/y — avTEj 
 ro7y y*y — ayT0*y 
 
 Plural. 
 
 TOi 
 
 TfXi 06 
 
 "y crxi — Sou 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 TiJy xupwv 
 
 
 ol y?y — avTfj 
 
 oi Trcc'idsg 
 TUV itcdi — duv 
 
 D 
 
 txTs x-pai 
 
 
 to 7$ yiy — «<ri 
 
 TOi 
 
 *S KCUTi 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 T»5 X^pa? 
 
 
 toi/j y/y — ay-raj 
 yiy — avTfj. 
 
 T9U V J 7TCC.7 — Set; 
 •ttou — ties. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 xopaf 
 
 tou >copa— %oj 
 
 T« XOpa-— Xi 
 
 TOV KOpOi X« 
 
 HOpOC.%. 
 
 N 
 G 
 
 . A. to) xopa— XE 
 . D. To?y xopa— -xoty 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 ol Kopa.—'Kig 
 tuv Kopa. — xwv 
 to7j xopa— ft 
 TOV j Kopec — xas 
 
 XOpOJ XEJ. 
 
 Example in which the s originating from n } is rejected. 
 (Syncope.) 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. KCCTYip N. ol Kocrsptg 
 
 G. tou nxrspoc, rtocrpoq G. Twy TraTspw? 
 
 D. TW KClTEpl, TTXTpi N. A. TW TTOTEpE D. to7> Traxpaai 
 
 A. Toy "TTcnipx. G. D. ToTy 7TaTtpoty A. touj 'za.iipa.q 
 
 V. swrep. V. Bssffipss, 
 
 Synoptical View of its Terminations. 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 a, |, 
 
 V, », 
 
 *, P, ( 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 o? 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 a, y 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 N. 
 
 A. 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Oi> 
 
 
NOUN. 23 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 «s 
 
 G. 
 
 U)7 
 
 D. 
 
 tan 
 
 A. 
 
 O.C 
 
 Tabic to assist in finding the form of the nominative, when 
 that of the genitive, or of another case is known. 
 
 In general the genitive in 
 
 Soc > comes from the nominative in 
 
 TOi. 
 
 he y 
 
 roc) 
 
 yoc "\ 
 
 X.70CJ 
 
 _m 
 
 x° 
 
 roc. 
 
 yyos yl 
 
 VOq> ^ 
 
 QocJ 
 
 no: i with the penultima long 
 
 TTcr\or»i 
 
 avro?J 
 
 } -•- {; 
 
 Especially : 
 
 . ccc, av, avc , e. g. vaoj, ypaoj, from vayr> yp 
 
 SVTOf 
 
 so? iWj, >ȣ, o? 7 v, y$- 
 
 spo? *)p 
 
 SW? 6, V, VS$ BVq 
 
 10! » h V, *5 
 
 tTo; * 
 
 tyo? '?>*-' 
 
 VOJ v 
 
 oyo? &>v 
 
 ovto? &•.>, ovq 
 
 oo? u, uc, ovq 
 
 opoj up, Of 
 
24 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 «? from the nominative in <,, Tpuos Tp£$, «Xo$ a.\> 
 
 WS *<> c ?j *»« 
 
 ?o<r . . .~ p 
 
 TjX>? 7, >? 
 
 . . , U> 
 
 " ,0? 1 . , . 
 
 "" \ 
 
 •KTO> J 
 
 Synoptical view of ike Terminations of all the Declensions, 
 
 Singular. 
 I. II. III. 
 
 N. *, n d 
 
 ft V? 
 
 05, oj» N. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 G d 
 
 >i? 
 
 ov 
 
 ov 
 
 
 OS 
 
 
 D. 
 
 a-r, 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 A. 
 
 av-vt 
 
 
 on 
 
 
 fit-* 
 
 
 V. 
 
 a-n 
 
 
 1, or N. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. 
 
 v.« 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 SUP 
 
 
 Plural, 
 
 
 Q4» 
 
 
 N. 
 
 a* 
 
 
 on, a N. 
 
 «<> 
 
 
 *N 
 
 G. 
 
 ' ft/y 
 
 
 ut 
 
 
 s;» 
 
 
 D 
 
 at; 
 
 
 ots 
 
 
 ai 
 
 
 A. 
 
 a 
 
 
 09$ 
 
 *f* 
 
 
 *N. 
 
 V 
 
 cu 
 
 
 0*, *N. 
 
 «s, 
 
 a 
 
 N. 
 
( 25 ) 
 
 CONTRACTION. 
 
 Two syllables, in which two or more vowels meet toge- 
 ther, are often contracted into one. 
 
 A contraction of two syllables into one, without a change 
 of letters, is called Synceresis ; as Tsr^i", reign. 
 
 If there is a change of vowels, it is called Crasis; as 
 TE*%£Off, rtixo'jc. 
 
 Contraction takes place in every Declension. 
 
 Contracts of the First Declension. 
 
 Ef* is contracted into w ; as yia,, yy, G. yictg 3 yy$, &c. 
 
 Pf«, and all other terminations, drop the former vowel ; 
 as l§s«, sfM) G. Epsaj, Ipaj, &C. c'ttXom, oVXri, G. aTrXoSij, 
 aTA?K> &C 
 
 Contracts of the Second Declension. 
 
 If the latter vowel is short, the contraction is in ov : if 
 long, the former vowel is dropped - } as voo?, vou?, G. voov, 
 
 vov, &C 
 
 The compounds of voo; and p'6o? are not contracted in the 
 neuter plural, or in the Genitive ; thus we say, euyoa, 
 
 vjyouv, not vjvx, ivvuv. 
 
 Zccos is contracted thus s Sing. N. a-oloc, cruiq, A. cra'ov, trS* . 
 PI. A. <rciov$ t aoixc, <rai? 3 ^«a, era. 
 
 Contracts of the Third Declension. 
 
 1. Nouns in v?, uoj, have only toco contractions, we; and 
 
 u*5 into IK : thus ftozpvc, PI. N. V. fiorpvBg, fiorpvc, A. fiorpvx;, 
 
 p07yVC. 
 
 Nouns in ou? also contract the same cases : as fkyc t 
 Pl.N.A.jSo£fandjSo*5,jSotiff. Nau? makes in the PI. A.vaa?, mmL- % 
 
 2. Nouns in is and i have *ftree contractions, tf into i. ies 
 and iac into i$ : thus, 
 
 N. o$*ff, 
 D. 0#U, o$i J 
 PI. N. V. 'o<puc f o<pic t 
 
 A. otylMS, O0lf. 
 
 Neuters in \ make the plural in i«, i. 
 d 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 This form in k, wfr, is properly Ionic. Nouns in »s aie 
 more commonly inilected in wc, D. si", e*. Dual. N. ee, 
 G. eo«. Pi. N. V. tic, « 5 . G. Eft.-/, D. £**. A. ws, e*/. But 
 the most usual form of the Genitives is the Attic, in ewj 
 
 and fwv. 
 
 3. Nouns in w and w? have £/iree contractions, oc; into 
 ou,', pi; into ol, and ou into Z : thus : 
 
 N. -«&&, 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 
 CCidOi, 
 
 The V. Singular ends in or. 
 
 These nouns are used only 
 in the Singular. 
 
 4. Nouns in tve, vg, and v, making in the Genitive so? 
 have four contractions, si into e?, ee into »?, ess and e«s into 
 
 ei;: thus, 
 
 N. (SxcnXivc, 
 
 D. fiaaikii, (3«.<ri\t7 j 
 Dual. N. A. V. @sc(Tt\se, pattnXti ; 
 Plural. N. V. /2*<7*Xesc, fiaa-iXsTs, 
 
 A. ficctTiXiccc, pu<?i\u<;. 
 
 Neuters in u make the N. A. and V. PI. in ia, n. 
 
 5. Nouns in r?c, e$, and oe, are contracted in euen/ case, 
 except the N. and V. Sing, and the D. PI. : thus, 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 
 N. A. V. T£i»!p-S£, n, 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 Tpifl'g-SEf, £i£ 
 T^J^^-EWV, fc'i 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 rpin'p-Ei", u , 
 
 G. D. Tgwp-ioiv, o7v. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 rpt/Ip-Eo-i, 
 
 V. 
 
 Tynjp-q?. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 T£t7i§-£Sf, £1? 
 
 Neuters in e$ and o,- make the N. A. and V. PI. in see, v. 
 
 Proper n?mes in KkUe are doubly contracted : thus 
 HpocKX-zn;, *k, A. 'HpajcX-EEOi-, iovc, -so:, ous, &C 
 
 Nouns and adjectives in ng pure contract the A. into «^as 
 well as into y : thus iv<pvr)$ 3 A. ivtyviu, sv$v*i and £t?£ua. 
 
 'Av>? v p, AnpTJip, and Suyarnp, are syncopated in all cases, 
 except the N. and V. Singular, and the D. PI. So also 
 dpw, apsvos, "a'pyoj j xvwv, y.vovoc, kwc%. To these may be 
 joined w,T» r p, ^*j't»p, and yacrrrfy ; but they are not synco- 
 pated in the A. Sing, in the G. or A. PI. to avoid the simi- 
 
NOUN. « W 
 
 larity with tfarpa, /xn'rpa, and y*or|>«, of the first Declen- 
 sion. 
 
 6. Neuters in «? pure and pa? are both syncopated and 
 contracted in every case, except the N. A. and V. Sing. 
 and the D. PI. thus, 
 
 N. xspa?, 
 
 G. KEpaTOJ, X-'pCiOJ, X.'^S, 
 D. KSptZ.71, *Sg«#y *^«« 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. Jta'pcm, xspaf, XEpa, 
 
 G. D. JtEpfifcTOiV, KZpdloiV, KEffV. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. A. V. asfarcc, xspaoi, Ktpot) 
 G. Kspoiruv, y.igxuv, ks^wv. 
 
 7, Some nouns are contracted in e^erz/ case : thus s«p, 
 £p, G^ £«poj, ripof, &C Xwccj, Xa?, G. Xaecoj, Aao?, &e. . 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 
 I. Some nouns have different genders in the singular 
 and in the plural. 
 
 Masculine in the Sing, and neuter in the PI. £;<£>p-o?,—a ; 
 
 sp£T|x-o?, -a 3 ^vy-os, -a ; n^p-os, a ; p,o^A-oj, -a ; vwt-oj, «• ; 
 puV-o?, a; ctTt-oj, a} <tt«9jw,-oj, -a; TapTap-oj, -ctj rpap£»?X»oj, -a. 
 This neuter comes from the obsolete Sing, in ov. 
 
 Masculine in the Sing, masculine and neuter in the Plu- 
 ral, ^£<r/A-o?, -o\ and a ; kvk\-o?, -01 and «; \vx x ->-°$t -0* and a. 
 
 Feminine in the Singular, feminine and neuter in the 
 Plural, *sXeu9-oj, -01 and a. 
 
 II. Some have different declensions. 
 
 Of these some have different terminations in the Nom. 
 as vllg, uwoj and vlog ; pd-KCLp, (Aoixoipg and (Aoixxpioi; y ScLxpv, 
 ^ixKpvov ; TrXavoi;, ttXccvi) y crrpixroi;, crrpoiricc ; ^Xoca'Trtp, irXxtrr^c, ; 
 c-ttcHvk;, critocncc j dsv^po?, ^Ev^poy ; asOXov, asGXioy j $"}?, Stv ; Sopv, 
 oopxq ; yovv and yova, &C So we find {JLYiXcc and /u>?/Wr#, 
 wpofiy.Toi; and 7rpo/3#cn, yepoyrois and yspoutfj, &c. 
 
 d2 
 
28 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Some admit different inflections from the same Nomina 
 live, as riyptg, -to? and -iSog ; S-fju-i^ -i$o? and -ic-tos 5 ©c£x-n?, 
 -oy and -jitoj ; *Ap-*i$, -ow, -so? and -utoj ; the compounds of 
 Kovg make in the Gen. nov and wo&o &c. 
 
 Some are declined from obsolete Nominatives ; as yvvj, 
 yvvouxog, from yv'jou%] ydXoc, yci\a.KTo$, from yccAaf j ri7rap, 
 w*«-ros j <?>ps«p> (PpzccTos ; t$wp, vScctos, &C. 
 
 Aigw; makes A*ovuv in the A. and Aiovv in the other cases. 
 The name of Jupiter is thus varied : 
 
 ZrJg, G. , D. , A.Z*uv, V. Zsv. 
 
 or Aefc or B&vV, 
 
 ZjiV, Znvoj, Z-/5V*, ZJjvce. 
 
 A*s, Aioc, A*i, A/a. 
 
 III. Some are undeclined, and are called Aptots; as, 
 Aw for Sufxct ; xoipcc, j the names of the letters ; foreign 
 
 names not susceptible of Greek inflections. 
 
 IV Some have one case only, and are called Monoptots ; 
 
 as, In the Sing. N. &£?. V. u> t&v. In the PI. N. xa-axXu- 
 
 9eg. G. lauv. V. u '7767701. 
 
 V. Some have but two cases, and are called Diptots ; as, 
 
 *'Ajut^w, a-fj-tyoTv 5 tyQoist;, $Qoiot<; 3 Xlj, Xlv. 
 
 VI. Others have only J/wee„ cases, and are called Trip- 
 tots 3 as, G. aXXrj'X-«y, D. ctAAflX-ois, ctiSy 01$, A. aXXrjX-ot>s, 
 
 a?, a. These have only the N. A. and V. jSpETaj, &/***> 
 
 AjVaj, o-eXxs, yooc, ovap, otyOvoq, 
 
 VII. Some have no Singular; as, the names of festivals; 
 some names of cities, &c. 
 
 VIII. Others have no Plural: as, tV AX?, yn, sXatov, wup, 
 and many others known by the sense. 
 
 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 
 
 Derivative Nouns are such as are derived from other 
 Nouns, and are either Patronimics, Gentiles, Possessives, 
 Diminutives, Amplificatives, or Denominatives. 
 
 I. Patronimics. 
 From the Father's name ihe Greeks form an appellative for 
 the descendants, generally according to the following rules : 
 
 . 
 
 
DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 29 
 
 XL To form the names of Men, the termination of the 
 G. of the Father's name is changed into ihs, Kpovou Kpow- 
 hg, 'Arpso? 'Arpst^?. From the names of the First Declen- 
 sion, or which have i in the penult, the change is into ulng, 
 
 as Bopiov Bopea^ic, 'HXtou 'HXiolhs. If the penult, is long* 
 the change is into i*^»js, as TeXa^Syo? TsA«|/.c«ma<W. 
 
 The Ionic form is wv, the iEolic £io;, as Kpovou, Kpovtwy, 
 Kpovi^io?. 
 
 2. To form the names of Women, the termination is 
 changed into &$, ig, *vn and aw, as ITpia/xou ITpiap?, \Acpi- 
 
 3. A vowel is sometimes added, as Ttn\Etcih$ for IlijXe/-- 
 &s? ; or dropped, as Nnp* for Nnps«»i. 
 
 H. National or Gentile Nouns, are the names of persons 
 derived from their native country ; as, 
 
 2va,^rnirv)c, a, a Spartan. Kpwro-a, ns, a woman of Crete. 
 
 AOuWof, a, an Athenian. KiAto-a-a, r?, ofCilicia. 
 
 'Pa)ju«?oj, «, a Roman. 'AQriveua, a?, — of Athens, 
 
 From S7rapra, 'AQ^vai, 'VwfjLn, Kp?fr»?, K*Ai|. 
 
 The Masculines end in t>jj or to?. Some also end in |, 
 «?, or u?; as 0paf, a Thraciari; "Apjca?, an Arcadian; 
 AiGvg, a Libyan; and some in wv, as MaxsJoJy, a Macedo- 
 nian. The Feminines end in a, o-<r«, or »«. 
 
 III. Fossessives are Adnouns derived from other Nouns 
 Proper, or Appellative; as, 
 
 'ExTopse'j, «, oy, of Hector. 'A^iXXEioj, <%, ov, of Achilles. 
 
 'Oupavtoj, a, ov, celestial. A»jXiaxo?, >?, ov, of Delos. 
 
 MaVtxoj, >j, ov, poetical. 'AyQ»ipo?, a, ©y, flowery. 
 
 'AyQpwTnyoj, n, ov, humane. AiQu>$v><;, eos, stony. 
 
 Derived from'Ejcrwp, ypavoj, fxS<rx, avQpwffos, 'Ap^AXsv?, AnXog, 
 ZvQot;, and xiQog, They end in ejo?, eoj, t>cof, tvo?, og, or w^*?? ; 
 and some in both nog and txoj; as (3ourfauo$ or fiourifaKos, royal. 
 
 IV. Diminutive Nouns are such as diminish or soften the 
 Signification of their Primitives, as, 
 
 Nsano-Kos, a 3 a young man. At'Qaf, «ko?, a small stone, 
 na»&Vxu, uj, a young girl, iVnov, #, a little woman. 
 d3 
 
30 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 'EXo^/jjjj, y, a young fawn. Kv^xvog, s, a small enp. 
 Kp»vJc, Qoc, a small fountain. nEAapy^£tK,£<K,ayoungstork. 
 Derived from i\a^oc, Kpnvw, naTe, xv\i<z, TrsAapyoc, Xi9cg, 
 yvvii. The Masculines for the most part end in f, ivr,$, 
 i-xKoc, i^vcg and t$ivc : hut the Feminines end variously ; 
 some in is or c-xn; others in ma, Km, x vr >> & c - as <P^»wa, a 
 little mistress or sweetheart, from p/An ; mQaKw, a small 
 tub, from %'Att ; iroxtxw* a little town or city, from iroXi?. 
 
 V. Amplificatives are such as increase the signification of 
 their Primitives, and generally imply contempt ; as, 
 
 XslXuvj uvoc, blubber-lipped. 'Ap«?cc, &', a grown lamb. 
 UuyovKxc,*;, havinga long beard. Aar<n<, *'&>s, a burning torch. 
 X?p/Lta^ioy, y, a big stone. ITAsTa|, ccKoq, very rich. 
 
 From p^iXae, vruyuv, ^^.a,c, ape, dale, and ttXSto^. They 
 end in &>v, ac, oy, oe, ij, or a£. 
 
 VI. Denominatives are Nouns derived from other Nouns, 
 either Substantives or Adjectives. Such as are Mascu- 
 line end in ag, ue p nc, oe, uSyg, or w : as, 
 
 Mtytrac, a.voc, a nobleman. Ka^wt/xoc, &?, fruitful. 
 
 Xxplnc, dito;, favourable. 'AkrAv&g, &?, true. 
 
 'Onttrtih s > a domestic. AiQft&je, eo?, stony. 
 
 E7r&r£«roc, a, diligent. 'EAoacJv, wvoc, an olive yard 
 
 From /Asyiroj, great 5 ;k«pk> favour ; oixof, an house; 
 c77ri?o» v , care, study 3 xccpro;, fruit 5 cUuSnc, truth ; ?u'6'oe, a 
 sione ; 'ixothov, oil. 
 
 Denominatives of the Feminine Gender are likewise formed, 
 some from Adjectives, and some from Substantives. 
 They end in na, ik, oia, apa, cava, era, vvn, rng, <ne, »c, 
 a, rpicu, or rpic ; as, 
 
 'Eva-B^Hd, as, piety. AiKaioevm, re, justice. 
 
 'Evlvx iX > a $> felicity. Kaxorric, r^log, malice. 
 
 'Ewoia, at, benevolence. TlapaxoChs, koc, a wife. 
 
 z,'J~lupa, a:, she that saveth. ©£«, «e, a goddess. 
 
 BspoiTrutva, v$, an handmaid. TLcinrpiu, ae, a poetess. 
 
 Bao-lxia-a-a, r,c } a queen. 'AvXv>Tp)g, 3oc, a music girl. 
 
 From EuraCriV, pious; &%%$$, happy; evvoo$, benevolent; 
 tr^7)7p, a deliverer; $epoivw A a servant; fiourfavs, a king; 
 
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 31 
 
 $UctH>$, just ; xxKog, evil 5 Trapaxoiln?, an husband ', 0Ea?, a 
 god \ koiyitvs, a poet j a.v\nTr><:, a piper. 
 
 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 The gender of the substantive is determined partly by 
 the signification, and partly by the termination. Fre- 
 quently the termination and the signification accord. 
 
 I. ThefollowingaredeterminedbytheirSiGNiFiCATioNS 1 
 Masculine. 
 
 1. All names of male persons or animals. 
 
 2. The names of the months, as 6 pfv, the month itself, 
 
 3. The names of rivers, except some, in which the ter- 
 mination prevails, e. g. n AnQ* t ( the river Lethe.' 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 1. All names of female persons or animals, e. g, n' 'Act- 
 Txcrix, yi Asovxiov, except diminutives, e. g. to x.opa,<nov, ' the 
 little girl.' 
 
 2. Names of trees, which mostly end in n and a. The 
 names, however, of trees in og are feminine, except 6 ip*-- 
 veo£, ' the wild fig-tree f t (ps\\6c, ' the cork-tree j' 6 Kspxcros, 
 ' the cherry-tree 3' Awto,-, * the lotus-tree,' 5 ^urjia-og. 
 
 Some of these are both masculine and feminine (generis 
 communis) 0, >i wdirvpos, ' the papyrus,' 6, *| xoTtyoj, ' the 
 wild olive-tree.' 
 
 3. The names of countries, islands, and towns, e. g. 
 
 w A'iyvTTTog, r, 'Lapot;, w 'Podoj, n Aa.ju,aa->to$, w Tpoi^Vv, *j Ti'pi/vj # 
 
 1. The following are excepted: 1st. names of towns in 
 
 ous, Es?uvovf, XxtXXous, 'EXeou?, ITfa-crtvouj, &C. ; 2nd. 
 names of towns in wv, 6 Mehwv, MapaO^v, except n c RxfivXuv j 
 (MapaQwv is masculine in Herod, feminine in Pind. Stjcuwv also 
 is masculine and feminine.) 3d. Those in »?, v^to?, 5 Mao-jj?. 
 4th. Names of towns which have only the plural, are mas- 
 culine when they end in oi, feminine when in a,i; neuter 
 when in a, t« AsvKrpx. 5th, Names of towns in a$, e. g. 
 'A^paya?, f the city of Agrigentum/ r> 'AKp. 6 Tapa?, 
 
3# GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 6 the city of Tarentum,' v Tapccg. Apyoj, Eof, is of the 
 neuter gender. 
 
 2. Many names of islands and cities are of both genders ; 
 as Zaxuv9oc, 'ETrlcccvpoc, 'Qpanro:, and UvXoq. The usual name 
 to "l\iov is in Homer r> "ixioc, except in the suspected pas- 
 sage 11. 6, 71. 
 
 3 Names of animals, which are of the common gender, 
 are frequently used in Greek in the feminine, when there is 
 no reference to the sex, but to the name of the animal ge- 
 nerally. When there is a determinate reference to the sex, 
 the proper gender is used -, frequently, however, not. 
 
 II. The following rules are observed in the termina- 
 tions : 
 
 Words in a, which have a vowel or f, $, 0, x, v, p, c-, be- 
 fore the termination, are feminine, and follow the first de- 
 clension, e. g. n TpaTrsJci, ' the table,' ri £t(pt)spa, * the parch- 
 ment,' i| apXXa, ' the contest,' n s^tJya, c the viper,' &c. 
 Those which have //. before their termination, are neuter, 
 and follow the third declension, e. g. to o-S^a, to A^a, ' the 
 will,' to Ar>/x/xa, ' the gain.' They are mostly derived from 
 verbs, and, indeed, from the first person, perf. pass, also 
 
 To ytx\x, yaXecKToc. 
 
 atg of these iraTg is common, $x7$ feminine, and c-tcus 
 neuter. They all follow the third declension. 
 
 av are all masculine, except that this is also the termina- 
 tion of the neuter of adjectives in «c. They follow the 
 third declension. 
 
 ap mostly neuter, to ^ap, ' the day,' to tl^p, ' the victuals/ 
 to Qptap, ' the well,' &c. But r> oi^ap, and i oap, f the 
 wife,' take their gender from their signification. 
 
 us 1. part masculine, which have the genitive in cc-noc, 
 
 e. g. o IjJiois, l/xoivToq, o avSpixs, av^piavTor. So also b Txpa;, 
 
 ayrce, ' the city of Tarentum,' and 'A*pxyac, < the city of 
 Agrigentum,' are masculine and feminine. 
 
 2. part feminine, which have the genitive in dSo;, e. g. 
 Yt Xa/^a?, ci^og, rt X'zXuac, ttcco-t^. <?vyac, vJo;, ' the fugi- 
 tive,' is of the common gender. 
 
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 33 
 
 3. neuter, only disyllables, which make urog in the geni- 
 tive, ro ynpccc, to y,pia,g, to Kipag. 
 
 ctvg in the genitive a6g, are feminine, v ypotvg, ypccog, wvc. 
 
 up concerning QQup, See hereafter. x e h ^feminine, but 
 the compounds am'p^ip, &c. masculine, 
 
 ug mostly feminine, except o arug, ktwoc, ' the comb.' In 
 adjectives ng is the masculine termination. 
 
 tvg genitive lug, are all masculine. 
 
 rjy genitive wog and wog are masculine, e. g. o Xipw, o 
 uv%w, o crTrXii'v, o iroipw, except « ££ip>fyj *i #p?i'y, * the intel- 
 lect, and o, »»' x>i'y, * the goose,' common. 
 
 ■n? are chiefly masculine, except *? yao~T>ip, ' the belly^/ 
 »i xn'p, ' the fate / and those which from their signification 
 are feminine, e. g. ij pmr\p, * Qvycimp. 'An'p, \ the mist/ and 
 f the air,' in masc. and femin. So also o, »' alQJp. mp for 
 x/ap, * the heart j ' np for sap, ' the spring/ o-T>jp for o-rtccp, 
 ' the tallow/ are neuter. 
 
 ng in the first declension masculine, e. g. o JUivax*?, o 
 ^fo-roVn?, &c. In the third declension also, mostly mascu- 
 line, except those in *j-r, nrog, as « EV0r?'c, and substantives 
 in 6t*k and vmg, which are feminine. In adjectives this is 
 the termination of the masculine and feminine. 
 
 * are all neutpr, e. g. o-<'v»9n, jasXi. 
 
 iv are mostly feminine, e g. r! p'i'v, »j w^/v, ■» owriv, n 6/v (or 
 &s )j ' the shore/ (0»'v, ' the heap/ is masculine and /emi- 
 nine), h\$U is masculine. 
 
 ig feminine, except o nig, ' the weovil / o X??, ' the lion / 
 I ItKfyic. Others, from their signification, are masculine 
 and feminine, e.g. 6, « o<J>t;, o, * Trpo^avrtc, o, *i opvt?. 
 
 f are 1, masculine, 6 Tn'vaf, 6 ^t»p|u.>if, o Vipa.%, b Odpoc^, 
 o <po7vt£, ' the palm-tree.' <2. feminine, as, ij'wJfJ, » /S2x«f., 
 
 ?! d»a(7-$x?, rj ^i£o'py|, *)' Qpiooc^, rj x.oi\v^, rj x.Xaf, ri xXtjixaf, « 
 x.u'Xif, ri Xapvaf , rj 7rn'x»if,' t? izr'-pv^, y tt~v%, *i a-vioocy^, »l $Xo£, rj 
 Xu'yl> rj cr/xiJif , rj aXwr-nf, rj Qlpjjuy,;, rj o-y'piyf , rj ^omf;, rj 9pt|, ri 
 Capayf, rj avTi/f, *i crn'if, rj Ka, t ux^, rj [xoia-r^, rj irpoi%. 3. 
 
 Others are common, a) names of men and animals, o, * 
 
 o&f, 5,, rj ©oaf. o, rj o^eX^al. 6, rj fxzlpu^ I, n $vX«£, a, * 
 
34 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 crKV\a.%. I, vt -rjph^. b) c, r, a.v\<x%. b, yi $rfe. o, * QupvyX- 
 
 0, v> XapvyZ. c, -n srupaf. o, * $%\<xy%. 
 
 ov are neuter, except the names of women, n A6?-*iov. n 
 
 ©p are neuter, as to aop. 
 
 05- are mostly masculine. The following are feminine. 
 
 1. the names of islands and cities, as well as rn-hrroq, * the 
 island.' 2. the names of trees, plants, flowers, ttxHpeft n" 
 #v?7os, >5 xuwapigsff-of, q ctpixoc, and \]/C6p.juoc, * the sand ;' 
 «c-5t/xtv9oj, ' the bathing-tub 3' ac-jSoXoj, * the soot ;' ugQgCk- 
 roi, ' asplialtus ;' MTpavtog, or arccpKoc, 'the way)' /3aAa»off, 
 
 * the acorn j ' j5«Vavor, * the touch-stone, the proof 5' yvdQcc, 
 1 the jaw-bone ;' yu^?, ' the gypsum ;' ^Xto?, * the writ- 
 ing tablet;' ^ojco?, ' the beam ;' Spocroc, ' the dew j' xapvc?, 
 'the baking oven:' Jt^sTo?, 'the pit;' xap^os-oj, * the 
 kneading-trough j' k&svQo:, ' the path j' KrlpJtoc, « the tail j' 
 <i/SwTog, •' the chest ;' koVpo?, * the manure ;' Xsxtdo;* ' the 
 yolk of an egg ;' Xwtt/Qos, ■ the oil-flask j* /a/Xtoj, * a red 
 colour;' iv£<rot 9 ' the disease;' »» o&>s, * the way, and it's 
 compounds;' wXm&s, ' the tile;' npx ooc -> — X ov s> ' tne w &- 
 ler-pot;' wuiXo*, 'the trough;' pa/S^o?, ' the staff;' <ropoj, 
 •the coffin;' o-ttoSoc, 'the ashes, dust;' vu\o<; y 'amber, 
 glass ;' yj\\oq, ' the chest ;' -bHQoe, * the pebble.' 
 
 The following are common: 1. denominations of per- 
 . sons, which may be either male or female, e. g. ayytXc;, 
 
 * the messenger,' male or female ; autplnoXoc, * the servant, 
 the maid-servant.' 2. Names of animals, e. g. 0, r> <y«pavoj, 
 0, 11 ZipxToq. Again, 6, r> aYpaxToj, ' the spindle ;' 6, 11 $a,p(2i- 
 ro<;, ' the lyre ;' 0, r 94po;, * the bush ;' 6, 1? 0eo$, ' the god, 
 the goddess ;' 6, A Xffioi* < the stone/ &c. The greater 
 number are adjectives of two terminations. 
 
 Substantives in 0;, which follow the third declension, 
 are all neuter. 
 
 ovc are masculine, except to ovc, which comes from ovocc. 
 0ovc is common, since it signifies * a bull' and ' a cow.' 
 
 v are neuter, ttZv, va.—v, yaw, dopv, ko-tv. 
 
 w are masculine. 
 
 v? are masculine, except to sryp, 0, * pcipTv?. 
 
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 35 
 
 v; are feminine, except o fiords, ' the bunch of grapes •* 
 6 GprvDi, ' the stool 5' 6 l-/Mc, ' the fish}' 6 fxvc 3 * the mouse 3' 
 viKvc, * the corpse j' 6 o-m^u^, s the ear of corn 3' 6 9njy#$, 
 ' the ell/ ' the arm 3' £s and <?vc are common. 
 
 •^ are masculine, except * Xalxa-^, ' the storm 3' 17 ^xfb 
 ' the rain ;' r, xh n ^> ' the water for washing 3' g o'vj/, ' the 
 voice 3' n xotXavpo^, ( the shepherd's crook,' 
 
 u are feminine, e. g. w wstOw, »? £#«. 
 
 «y are masculine. 1 . those which make cvto? in the genitive., 
 e. g. fpoixuv, opv.Ko-nos. 2. the greater part of those which 
 have wvoc in the genitive : except >j «x«y, ' the threshing- 
 floor;' u'yX^&iv, ' penny-royal 3' 4 fjai*m 3 'the poppy 3' [4 
 rp-ipav, ' the shy dove'] odw/, ' life,' is also feminine. So 
 also o, ri xvciuv, b, ri ocvXuiv. Those which have ovog in the 
 genitive are feminine, e. g. *? ^Xt^wv, ' the swallow 3* ex- 
 cept o axpuv, ' the anvil.' Many are common, as 0, »i nye- 
 <.,^v, * the guide, male or female 3' 6, *5 axacrpvvi, ' the cock/ 
 ' the hen ;' 6, 4 wn&m, ' the nightingale 3' 6, r, otzlum, ' the 
 god/ ■ the goddess j' 0, * mm. 
 
 The Attic termination uv for ov in the second declension 
 is of the neuter gender, e. g. to uv&ysm, toD — ytv. 
 
 wp are masculine, except >3 aXs'xTwp, ' the unmarried vir- 
 gin 3 1 »i awp, f the bride/ and the neuter ; to eXwp, f the 
 capture/ ' game/ ' spoil 3' to sX^wp or h'xawp, f the wish 3' 
 to y^»p, ' the water 3' to tU^x^, ' the object, aim.' 
 
 ws are, in the third declension, 1. w;, cog feminine, e. g. 
 »J atom's, »j wj, 2. w;, wroj and wo? masculine, e. g. spw?, 
 ' the love 5' y=Xw? 3 wtoc, ' the laughter f 6 <p«$, (pwr©?, 
 ' the man 3' xpwc, yju-c$:, ' the skin 3' xaXwc, u6g, ' the 
 rope 3' 0w?, Saioj, ' the jackall ;' c. £ ( uwc, woe, f the slave. ;' 
 rpwj, woe. Except to <p«5e, Qvtoc, ' the light.' 3. In the 
 second declension the Attic termination « s -, w is of the 
 masculine gender. 
 
 The following are feminine, * ya.kyc t y%\u, and yaXwc?, 
 and -' aXwj, aXw, and aXwor. %;?w,-, g-e?i. row xpsw?, is neuter. 
 
 The dialect varies also the gender of the substantives, e.g. 
 
 £»toj, is masculine in Attic, otherwise femin ine. 
 
 £x\oc, is feminine in Attic, in the others wasc. 
 
36 GRAMMAR OJF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 IpZs, which otherwise is fern, was used as masc. by the 
 Peloponnesians. 
 
 tiros, e the press/ f the mouse-trap/ is masc. ; but in the 
 sense of f burden,' c weight/ it is fern. 
 
 y.iuv, ' the column/ is masc. in the Attic dialect, . but 
 fern, in Ionic and Doric. 
 
 kopis, f the bug,' is masc. in the old authors $ in the 
 modern fern. 
 
 x»/u,o?, which otherwise is masc. was feminine in Doric. 
 
 o/xipai;, ' an unripe grape/ was /em. in Attic j otherwise 
 r«<zsc. 
 
 s-xot©?, also masculine in Attic; in other dialects neuter. 
 
 crro-'ju.voc, f a wine vessel,' used as /«». by the Attics, as 
 masc by the Peloponnesians. 
 
 T«pt^o?, ' salted meat/ was used as masc. by the Dorians, 
 lonians, and others ; by the Attics alone as neuter also. 
 
 vccXos, or viXoe, was also /em. in Attic ; in other dialects 
 only masc. 
 
 <pQslp, ' the louse/ was used as masculine by the Attics $ 
 by the others only as feminine. 
 
 The difference in the meaning of a word has also some- 
 limes an influence in varying the gender. 
 
 tvyocy ' the yoke / to £vy6v 3 c the balance.' 
 
 Q6ko$, ' the dirt ;' *j QoXof, ' the hot-house,' ' the covered 
 roof.' 
 
 o iWo?, f the horse/ v 'twos (the mare) cavalry. 
 
 xUtQog, ' broth made of pulse / f, *h«0os, f the yolk of 
 an egg.' 
 
 x/0oj, f the stone / n \lQos, ' the precious stone.' 
 
 vwrog, * the back of an animal / to vStov, € the back of 
 a man.' 
 
 1 o-Ti/'paf, ' the shaft of the javelin/ u* <r-u'pa£, * the storax/ 
 
 o x*paf, ' the palisade 5' n %ap«l? ' the stake to which 
 tne vine is fastened.' 
 
GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 67 
 
 In some substantives, which are not common, the femi- 
 nine gender is indicated by a peculiar termination, so that 
 either the termination k is annexed to the masculine, as 
 "Exxm, 'EXXnvlg, or the termi nation of the masculine is 
 changed. In the latter case the following are changed : 
 
 n: — into »y, e. g. Jfcrjrortis, ' the master;' ^owns, 'the 
 mistress;' ttoXjW, 'the citizen;' woXmy, 'the female ci- 
 tizen ;' &QT?jru\v;j * the seller of bread ;' ao-jwaiX*?, f the 
 female seller of bread.' — Into rptcs, KomYr.c, 'the poet, 
 Koivirpicc, xiQapnTTn'ffj y.$a.plcnpicc. This takes place in sub- 
 stantives which are formed from the third person perf. 
 pass, of verbs. — IntOrp*?, as aXrr*)ff, xXirplg, opp£*KrT*iff, op^ncrTfic, 
 avXwmc, xvXnrpn;. 
 
 The form ¥pt? was more frequently used by the Attics in 
 some words than rpix. 
 
 From Travis and 9^'g come the forms Ttivn&crot and S^o-c-a. 
 
 off — into «, when a vowel or a p precedes the termination, 
 e. g. Ixupoff, Ix.upa, in Attic. — Into », in the rest of the cases, 
 
 e. g. douXoc, dou'X»j. — Into iff, e. g. <rTpaT»iyoff, crrpxrnyU) xl^^ci- 
 Xutoc, ewj£ ( uaX'WTtff, xa-TT^Xoff, xxttyiXic, qvy.^.a.y^o:, qv^.x^iq, as 
 
 an adjective, rupawoff, rvpxwts, &c. — Into atv« only in some, 
 e. g. G=or, Mown, Xu'xoff, Xu'xatva. In the Alexandrian dialect 
 the form to-o-a was used \xY.owq, tfatxoti&d&'. 
 
 x% and x\ into x<7crx, e. g. xvx%, xvx<r<7X ; (Pa^j Qxcro-x j 
 yet from xoXosf, xoXax£ff, from Trpo^uXaf, Trpo$vXx>il<;. 
 
 euj into aa, e. g. iEpEf'c, ispjia, (3xctiXev$, fioLcrtXzKX. — Into tff 
 and io-o-a, fixXxvcv;, (3xXo>,viq, (3xg-}Xsvc, (BxcnXic, and @x?IXi<t<tx ; 
 
 the latter, however, rarely in Attic. So also fiyXxnicrx, 
 
 irx^owjax, AlQioTTia-o-x. They said also j» ypxu.pxTive. — 
 
 The Doric or Macedonic dialect had, besides, the form 
 
 (SajnXiyycs. 
 
 r,p into «p#, e. g. crurrip, <ru7?Lpx, oorr,p, dor-ipx. crr^xvrpiq 
 
 as an adjective, e. g. c-^avrpiff y>5, comes from a-r.^x-n-np, 
 
 if into io-cra, e.g. <E>oTvtf, QqUittx, K*Xif, KiXicrs-a. ' 
 
 y? into uo-cra, e. g. A'ifijc, Ai[3vcro-x. 
 
 up into ap«, e. g. Trav^a/xarwp, ftxv&xfj.cifiLpx. The ^m. of 
 ■ryXXnWwp is s-uXXrWpja. Yet probably the basis of them is 
 in the obsolete forms TTxyaxixxr^p and c-i/XX^Trfjj?. 
 
 E 
 
38 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 uv into envoc, \iuv, Xsouvoc, ^paxwy, ^paxatya, Aolxuv, Aaxaiya, 
 0fp«7rwy, 9spoe.7raiya, aXsjcTpuw'y, aAsxTpuaiya. 
 
 #fote. For QspaTaiya also occurs 0sp<x7ry?j. 
 
 wj— "into wi;, wfjiji, e. g. d)x»£, opals, *jp«$, »ipw»\-, and npu'tvn. 
 Or rfpsJvrj. Also vpu£<r<ru. — Into aj, e. g. Tpwj, Tpwaj. 
 
 Heterogewea. 
 
 Several substantives have, in the plural, a different gen- 
 der and termination from those in the singular. This is 
 called /x5Ta7rXa«r/xo5 yivovq, transformation of the gender, 
 and the word itself iryoywnq. This metaplasmus is founded 
 probably on different forms of the same substantive, of 
 which one remains in use in the singular, the other in the 
 plural. The following are of this nature : 
 
 o ho-fAQc, in plural, ra Ss<t[a<x, which was used chiefly in 
 the Attic dialect, the plural Sso-pol was the common Greek. 
 Yet we find hcrpovs also. 
 
 6 SlQpog, in the plural roc J/$pa. 
 
 o Q-o-poSi * the decree,' plur. t» Qs<r/xa. 
 
 r ksKsvQoc, f the way,' plur. t» xsX.'vda. 
 
 o xujcXoj, ' the circle,' plur. ra kv'kXoc, * the wheels ;' also 
 
 kvkXoi. 
 
 6 \vxioq, e the lamp, plur. t» Xir^v*. 
 
 o ovro?, ' corn,' plur. t« a-troc. 
 
 o crraQ^uoc, plur. Ta crocQ[jt.oc. 
 
 o Tctprapoi, plur. Ta Taprapa. 
 
 In these substantives the singular does not occur as 
 neuter. Again, the following, which are considered as 
 belonging to this class, are found neuter in the singular : 
 
 roc vara from to vuitqv, roc spET/xa from to Ipirpov, ra fyyol from 
 to £uyoy. 
 
 The following neuter in the plural are more rare : rk 
 
 Sfvuoi from o Spvpoc, to. SocktvXx from o ^0,-x.TvXog, roc rpxyn\\oc 
 fFOm o Tpap^oj, ru pvira, from o p'uVo?. 
 
 aisu 
 
( 39 ) 
 
 ADNOUN. 
 
 Adjectives are declined like substantives. 
 Declension of adjectives are three ; 
 
 The first of three terminations j 
 
 The second of two ; 
 
 The third of one. 
 
 OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 
 
 
 These end in 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 °?> 
 
 cc, 
 
 oy *. 
 
 «** 
 
 »> 
 
 ovf. 
 
 a?, 
 
 aaa, 
 
 ay. 
 
 uc, 
 
 atva, 
 
 ay. 
 
 »?> 
 
 «C7a, 
 
 w. 
 
 «?, 
 
 fcrcra, 
 
 *J. 
 
 «v, 
 
 uvoc, 
 
 fy. 
 
 ou$, 
 
 ovcrcc, 
 
 oy. 
 
 ovj, 
 
 evcccc, 
 
 owy. 
 
 ^?> 
 
 HOC, 
 
 v. 
 
 v?, 
 
 vacc, 
 
 w. 
 
 uv, 
 
 vera,. 
 
 m. 
 
 U1, 
 
 ovcrcc, 
 
 oy. 
 
 W1, 
 
 ov<rcc, 
 
 ovy. 
 
 »ff» 
 
 vera,, 
 
 uc. 
 
 WJ, 
 
 ViX, 
 
 05. 
 
 * Eor, ta, io», is contracted into oUf, 5, oSy, as apyvp-tos, ia, toy, 
 into apyvp-ovt, a, ovt. 
 
 -J- Oor, on, ooy, and tor, in, toy, are contracted into out, n, ovv ; as 
 awX-ocr, on, oov, into avX-ovs , r,, ouy ; xpvf-tos , tn, ioy, into 5£pv<r-evf, 
 n, ovy. 
 
 J ^ftXiro-tif, *w«, «v, is contracted into /niXiT-oyj, ovc<r«, o£y j 
 ri/u,rt ttf, t<r<rm t iy, into Ti/tt-nr, no***, ny. 
 E <2 
 
40 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Adjectives in oc pure and poj make the feminine in a; 
 other adjectives in oj make it in ». 
 
 Singular. 
 N. [/.scxp-oc, «, ov, 
 G. (AUKp-ov, a,;, ov, 
 D. pctKp-u), a, W, 
 A. [Jt.XKf-GV, a,v, cv, 
 
 V. jxeucf-lf o\, ov. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N'A-V. juaKp-w, a, a>, 
 
 G'D-jU5ixp-o7v,ary,orv ( 
 
 Plural. 
 
 'N. jU.5iX.p-0i, OH, a, 
 G. (JLCCXf-UV , 
 
 D. jw.axp-o?j, a7f, ©%, 
 A. ^a^p-ovj, aj, a, 
 V. juaxp-ol, a), a. 
 
 Adjectives in eoj and ooc, not preceded by p, make the 
 Feminine in ». 
 
 The Middle and New Attics use the termination oj for 
 masculine and feminine, particularly in compounds and 
 derivatives. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 x.cc\-oc, 
 
 »i\ 
 
 ov, 
 
 G. 
 
 KCCk-OV, 
 
 VSj 
 
 ov, 
 
 D. 
 
 JcaA-a?, 
 
 V> 
 
 ?*. 
 
 A. 
 
 kcc\-ov, 
 
 r,v, 
 
 ov, 
 
 V. 
 
 koX-e, 
 
 \ 
 
 6v, 
 
 > 
 
 In the Dual and Plural like 
 
 Four Adjectives, oiWoq, 7r>XmovToq, totovroq, toctovtoc. ; 
 and four pronouns, 05 relative, uvtos, and its compounds, 
 ovroc, Us7vog, make the neuter in 0. 
 
 Totourovj roo-ovrov, and raJrov, neuters, are sometimes 
 found. 
 
 Some Adjectives in 0; have both their masculine and 
 feminine in 5y", and their Neuter in oy ; as n c kot^w?, to 
 Koapiov, elegant. Also some in qq have their masculine 
 and feminine in uc, and the neuter in m : as r5 ivy we, 
 to tvyim, fruitful. ITpao?, meek, has n?<xua, in the feminine, 
 and TTfclov in the neuter. 
 
ADNOUN. 
 
 41 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. tt«j, Traerct, vctv, 
 
 G. Trayroj, Tratrnj, iravroq, 
 
 D. iravrl, itctert), iraw\, 
 
 A. TrciVTOC, Traa-av, 
 
 V. ra:, TTua-a, 
 
 vocv, 
 
 TTUV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. TretyTE, vdcrct, vcHvt?, 
 G. D. TrayToty, ita-caiv, itavtow. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. noivTtc, 
 
 G. 7TCCVT0JV, 
 
 D. 7ra<7t, 
 A. TravTajj 
 V. 'Trdvrsg, 
 
 Kacrou, vroivra, 
 
 TrOCITUlV, TTCCVTVVf 
 TTOLTOUq, TToVi, 
 
 Kcccrac, ira-vTa, 
 
 srewrai, Trayra. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. {xtX-ac, uiva,, av, 
 
 G. i*:\-<xvoc, atvric, ctvog, 
 
 D. /x-'X-ayi, a/y»i, ayt, 
 
 A. \xzX-avoi, aivav, ay, 
 
 V. [j.sX-civ, envoi, ay. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. (ji'.X-uve, ctlvx, avs, 
 G. D. fA'X-avoiv, atvonv, oivoiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. fx:?v-ayfr, aiya* 
 
 G. (AsX-oivci)") aivxv 
 
 D. /xsA-acrt, atvxic, a-rt, 
 
 A. fjLiX-oivoig, olivets, aya, 
 
 V, [xiX-oivsg, ccivon, avc,. 
 
 avet, 
 ctvvv, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 G. wx-ivroc., 
 
 i«r«?, tyro?, 
 
 fyrtj 
 \ 
 
 D. Tvrr-tvTi, tt<?ri, 
 A. TfTT-Eyra, wcray 
 V. tut-ek, fTcra, iy 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. vvx-ivrz, £«ra, rvrfj 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TfTT-iyTOiy, uo~ouv, jyTOtv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. nvx-iviie, ticrca, 
 G. Ti/7r-EyTfc>y. E;<r£y, 
 
 tyra, 
 
 D. tutt-eTcp*, ilcrxis, i~cn, 
 A. TU7r-£yTar, EiVac, tyra^ 
 V. TU7T-syTEj, E?<ra», £yra. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. yoifi-iic, icrcra, iv, 
 
 G. %api-syTOf, sVcrrjc, trroc, 
 
 D. %api-£yr», Ecrcrr?, Eyrtj 
 
 A. %apt-EyTa, ECiTav, fy, 
 
 V. %api-Ei OI'Ey, EC7(7a, Ey. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. ^api-Eyr?, Ecra-a, £?t?j 
 G.D. ^apt-Eyrotv, £!7craiy, evto*v. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ^api-EvTEf, ET^at, £yr«, 
 
 G. ^apt-EyTCt'y^ zcrauv, ivtuv, 
 
 D. xa.pt- H?i, icrjone, E;<n, 
 
 A. ^api-EyTa;, so-crao, evtk, 
 
 V. xctpi-nrte, laaon, ma. 
 
 e3 
 
42 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 
 
 TE?-*V, 
 
 eivx, 
 
 % 
 
 G. 
 
 TEp-EVO?, 
 
 UVY)C, 
 
 evoc 
 
 D. 
 
 TEfcWj 
 
 uvri, 
 
 rn, 
 
 A. 
 
 Itr-iVOC, 
 
 uvav, 
 
 W, 
 
 V. 
 
 TSC-EV, 
 
 SIVC&, 
 
 BV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. TS^SVe, UVCl, 
 
 G.D. rsp-zvoiv, eiva.iv, 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 np-iveq, 
 
 eilieu, 
 
 evcc, 
 
 G 
 
 rep-eyav, 
 
 uvwv, 
 
 evuv } 
 
 D. 
 
 rep-eat, 
 
 livaic, 
 
 iai, 
 
 A. 
 
 Tzp-ZVCCC, 
 
 UtCCCy 
 
 iVCC, 
 
 V. 
 
 v-p-me, 
 
 SiVXl, 
 
 tva. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. TrXax-cuf, ovaaoc, ovv, 
 G. TrXxy.-ovvroe, overawe } ovvroc, 
 D. ttXcc-z.-ovvti, ovaayi, ovvn, 
 A. ttXcck-ovvtcc, ovcraav, ovv, 
 V. 7rXax.-ov v 01' ov t ovaaa, ovv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. n%XK-ovvre,ova-o-& 9 (syvre, 
 G.D. TrXccy.-ov'vrotv, 0va7a.1v, 
 
 ovvroiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. TtXctK-ovvTB:, ovaaai, ovvra, 
 G. r JrXax-ovv-xv ) ovaaoiiv, ovvruv, 
 D. TrXoix-ovo-t, ovcro~ocic, ovai, 
 
 A. 7rX0!.X-0VVT<X,<;,QV0~O-XC } Ov'v-Ci, 
 
 V. TrXxy.-ovvTst;, ovaacci, ovvia. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 N. clove, oovacc, 
 
 Tov, 
 
 N. ll-k*, 
 
 E?a, 
 
 f, 
 
 G. olvroc, oovcrvic, 
 
 60VTOC, 
 
 G. 6%-Zoc, 
 
 Et&£, 
 
 EOi, 
 
 D. oovtl, ciovari, 
 
 doVTt, 
 
 D. o<£-i'C, s7, 
 
 eia., 
 
 &", £?, 
 
 A Sovtx, dovaav, 
 
 cov, 
 
 A. of-uv, 
 
 tictv, 
 
 ») 
 
 V. Sovc., dovaa, 
 
 Sov. 
 
 V. ll-v, 
 
 ua, 
 
 0. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 N.A.V. £oyr?, Sov'acc, 
 
 doyre, 
 
 N.A.V. if-k, 
 
 eia, 
 
 N 
 
 G,D. CIGVTOIV, dOVOSiiV, OQVT01V. 
 
 G.D. 0%-ZOiV, 
 
 eixiv, 
 
 ioiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. cloVTcC, dOVO-Cil, 
 
 dOVTOC, 
 
 N. Sgife, it St 
 
 iiC/A, 
 
 t<x, 
 
 G. oovruv, dovawv, 
 
 oovruv, 
 
 G. 0%-BUlV, 
 
 FiWVj 
 
 euv, 
 
 D, %ov<Ti, 6ovaa.ic } 
 
 tioven, 
 
 D. oI-eV;, 
 
 hock;, 
 
 ■ / 
 EOT, 
 
 A. \^ovrac y dovauc, 
 
 oov~cc } 
 
 A. 6%-iac, e7c f 
 
 tiotq, 
 
 JOS, 
 
 V. DoVriC., dOVCTJA, 
 
 6QV-CL. 
 
 V. ^ ^ 
 
 eTsuj 
 
 ivt. 
 
 * Tbe masculine form of Adjectives in l>s is applied to feminine 
 nouns, as r$vs avrju.r>. 
 
 f These Adjectives sometimes form the accusative singular in ta, 
 
 as ivpia, movTOv, 
 
 
Singular. 
 
 N 
 
 'tvyv-vs, 
 
 VO~CC r 
 
 IV, 
 
 G. 
 
 Qvyv-VYToc, 
 
 v<ms, 
 
 vvtoc 
 
 D 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 fyvyv-vvn, 
 Qvyv-vvTct, 
 £vyv-v$, 
 
 V(TCCV, 
 
 vtja., 
 
 VVTi } 
 \ 
 
 vv. 
 
 ADKOUN 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Ik-uv, 
 
 ova-a, 
 
 cv, 
 
 3 £j 
 
 G. 
 
 ZK-OVTO;, 
 
 own; j 
 
 OVTOC, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Ix-oyri, 
 
 ovari, 
 
 oyr*, 
 
 i 
 
 A. 
 
 SK-bVTX, 
 
 ovcrccv, 
 
 &y, 
 
 
 V. 
 
 VK-UV, 
 
 ovaocj 
 
 cv, 
 
 43 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. Qvyv-V'JTE, VO-OL, f'vT£, 
 G.D. Qvyv-VVTOLV, VtTCClVj VVTOIV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. \x-oyt£, ov<ra, OVTif 
 
 G. D. SK-QVTOiV, OVCOUV, QVTOiV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. Qvyv-vvrse, 
 G. fyvyv-viTw/, 
 D. ^vjyv-VTi, 
 A. Qvyv-vvrccc, 
 V. Qvyi-VVTic, 
 
 vacu, 
 
 VtTUSV, 
 
 VVTO,, 
 
 vvtuv, 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 Ix-ovtzc, 
 
 iK'OVTUV, 
 
 ova a. i, 
 ovexv, 
 
 ovrcc, 
 
 OV7UV, 
 
 v crate, 
 
 V<Ti, 
 
 D. 
 
 lx.-ova-i, 
 
 ovcrcac, 
 
 OVG-L, 
 
 V(TCi.<;, 
 
 VVtOl, 
 
 VV7CC. 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ZK-CVTCCC, 
 
 U-cv~?;, 
 
 OV(TOC; } 
 
 ovo-ixi, 
 
 OVTCCj 
 
 C-ncx.. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. Tiix-vy, una., toil, 
 
 G. Tiw-SyTOj, utrricy vvtoc 
 
 D. Tlp.-WITly UCTYI, UVTlf 
 
 A. Til*.- 
 
 Tip-UV 3 
 
 UXTCH.t, «V, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. TljJL-WVTS, UtTCX,, UVTS, 
 
 G.D. Tiu-o;yTO»y, uj-c&iv, uvioiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. Tip-USVTEC, U<TVAy WV70C, 
 
 G. rtfjt.-ujvruv, uhtuv, wvtwv, 
 
 D. Tt/x-Scr*, wcratf, wcTi, 
 
 A. Ti/x-£vTaj, wcraj, aJyTa, 
 
 V. Tip-unts, ucrccij UVTCC. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 'N. rvr-wv, 
 
 G. TV7T-0VVT0C, 
 
 D. ryr-ouvTi, 
 A. rt/TT-oCyTa, 
 V. TU7r-2y, 
 
 ovcroty ovv t 
 
 ovcrvsj ovnog, 
 
 ovcry, ovvn, 
 
 ovo-av, OVV, 
 
 ovitx.. OVV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. TV7T-OVVTZ, OIHTK, OUyTf, 
 G.T).TV7r-0V}>70l)> 3 0VQ-a,iy } QVVT0lV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. tvtt-ovvts*;, ovcrcti, 0VV7CC, 
 
 G. TVK-OVVTUV, OVGVV, OVVTUV, 
 D. TV7T-OVO-1, 0VO-(TA$ 9 OVO~l, 
 
 A. WTT-ovvrctq, ovcra^ ovvrct, 
 V. iv<r-ovnz$ t ov<7cu, ovvtoc. 
 
44 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. la-T-cag, 
 
 G. EOT- WTO f, 
 D. IcTT'UTi, 
 A. ECT-WTa, 
 V. lOT-Uq, 
 
 wo*a, 
 wo~n§, 
 
 waav, 
 vera, 
 
 US, 
 
 U1T0C, 
 
 uri, 
 OS. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. KTT-WTE, W?X, UTS, 
 G. D. EtTT-WTOiV, UCCHV, WTOtV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N 
 
 e<tt-wte£, 
 
 UHTO.I, 
 
 UTa, 
 
 G. 
 
 l<TT-VTVV f 
 
 UCUIV, 
 
 WTUV 
 
 D. 
 
 l&T-WO-l, 
 
 w&out;, 
 
 WiTi, 
 
 A. 
 
 ITT-UTOLq, 
 
 t 
 UO~ac, 
 
 UTa, 
 
 V. 
 
 ictt-utss, 
 
 uo~ai, 
 
 UTCt. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I\. TiTVy-Uq, VitX,, OC, 
 
 G. Tl7V$-OTOC, VlCCi;, 070$, 
 
 D. TSTvty-OTl, via, OTl, 
 
 A. TETVQ-OTU, V'lCCV, oq, 
 
 V. 7£TV<p~ug, via, o$. 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. TtTvQ-QTl, Via, OTl, 
 
 G. D. titvQ-otoiv, vlaiv, OTOlt 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N teti/^-otec, v7xi, oia, 
 
 G. TETVty-OTWV, VIUV, OTUV, 
 
 D. invty-oTi , vlaic, 6?i, 
 
 A. Tirvty-oracy viae, o~a, 
 
 V. TsrvQ-o-ec, v7ai, Ira. 
 
 OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 
 
 M. F. 
 
 These end in 
 N. M. F. N. 
 
 
 OS, 
 
 ov, 
 
 
 ovc 
 
 , 
 
 01) v } 
 
 
 ac, 
 
 av, 
 
 
 VS, 
 
 «y 
 
 
 w, 
 
 v, 
 
 
 M, 
 
 ov, 
 
 
 *<> 
 
 *S, 
 
 
 top, 
 
 n ? 
 
 
 *?* 
 
 '-> 
 
 
 *>$, 
 
 uv. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ivdo%-oc, ov, 
 
 h$6%ov, 
 
 Ivaoqov, 
 hdoZ-e, ov. 
 
 N. A. 
 G. D. 
 
 V. \vU\u>, 
 Ivdo^oiv 
 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 EVdof-Oi, 
 
 Iv^o^uv, 
 EVdofoij, 
 
 Ivdo^-ovg, 
 
 ivSo^-ot, 
 
- 
 
 ADXOUN. 
 
 45 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Tlur. 
 
 N. cts/v-aj, av, 
 G. cislyy.vro:, 
 D. atlvavn, 
 
 N A. V. BkHVXVTSf 
 
 G. D. ocEivayTOiv. 
 
 3M. eU£v-avTSf, ayTa, 
 G. a.-iva.yTWV, 
 D. aEiyas-t, 
 
 A. asly-avra, ccv, 
 
 
 A. aslv-uvTCtg, cu/tx, 
 
 V. af/yav. 
 
 
 V. ct.uv-a.VTte, ayra. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ClOO-YlV, IV, 
 ft V.c 
 
 1.1. app-yoi, 
 D. app'svi, 
 A. app-£ya, iv, 
 V. apps*. 
 
 N. A. V. afym, 
 
 G. D. CtfyiVOlV. 
 
 N. app-sy.s^ sya, 
 G. apptvuv, 
 D. appso-i, 
 A. vJ^-tvae, tvx, 
 
 V. Upf-EVSC, syce. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. a*»j0-»j x c, £c, 
 G, cc\ri9-£0c, ov<;, 
 D. aX>j9-£i'-Et", 
 A. aXrjS-Ea, rj, ej, 
 
 V. »?iii9/ ff . 
 
 N. A.V.aX»i9-/E, £, 
 
 G. D. aX»?9-EOiy, oi"y. 
 
 G. aX^S-EWV, «y, 
 D. aXnf=eff, 
 A. a.Ar)5-Eac,E7^5a,>7, 
 V. aXijQ-EE^ t7gja, *». 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Eyyapiro?, 
 
 E^ap-tra, iy 
 sy^api. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 •ove, 
 
 ouy, 
 
 
 ^iVodClC 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 d'nrocL, 
 
 
 
 8l7T- 
 
 oda, 
 
 ovv, 
 
 ovy, 
 
 Mtc- 
 
 OUf. 
 
 ov. 
 
 oi/y. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. E'J^apiTE 
 G. D. £VX<ZftTOlV. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 G. D. GlTTOOOiV. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 G. Ey^apirwy, 
 
 D. tvyj/^m, I 
 
 A. E^ap-tTK', iTOf, 
 V. iV^OCf-lTte, not,. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 oiTT-odic, oo a, 
 
 G. 
 
 curc^uiv, 
 
 D. 
 
 017T0G-1, 
 
 A. 
 
 diir-oootc, oda, 1 
 
 V. 
 
 diTT-OcitCj odsc. 
 
46 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAG-E. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. cccccKp-vg, v, 
 G. ccoccKpvoe, 
 D. adaxprn, 
 A. ccdax.p-vv, v, 
 V. adccKpv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. ccU*pvt, 
 
 G. D. a.dax.pvoiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. cc^ocKp-vic , v$, vcc, 
 G. adot.ti.pvuv, 
 D. ccSdxpvw, 
 A. ccdctx.p-vcc<;,vc,vcc, 
 V. ccdccKCt-vtc, vc, vcc. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. (TUlQp-UV, OV, 
 
 G. cruQpovoc, 
 D. crxtypovi, 
 A. crutyp-ovcc, ov, 
 V. o~u$poy. 
 
 Dual. 
 N.A.V. cu>$pon, 
 
 G. D. <TiL'$p6vOlY. 
 
 Plural- 
 
 N. crwtyp-ovie, ovx, 
 G. crutypovwv, 
 D. o-u(ppo(Ti, 
 A. <jU!$p-ova.c, ovcc, 
 V. crwtyp-ovtc, ovcc. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. ptyccX-nr-wp, op, 
 G. fJ.i<yct\riTopoc, 
 D. /JnyaX^Topi, 
 A. piycchrtT-opcc, op, 
 V. fxiyccXnTop. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. tvyc-u;, uv, 
 G. vytu, 
 D. ivyzw, 
 A. tvyswv, 
 V. tvyt-tnc, uiv. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. jxtyccXriTop?, 
 G. D. fxtyccXviTopow. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. (xtycc\YiT-opie,opcc, 
 G. piycikYiTopwv , 
 D. [j.sya\v)Top<n, 
 A. y.tycc\riT-opcc;,opcc t 
 V. piycckm-opic, open. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. tvyw, 
 G. D. ivyzuv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. tyyf-w, «, 
 G. tvytuv, 
 
 D. EVyFW^ 
 
 A. tvyj--wg A u, 
 V. ft/ys-w, w. 
 
 Like cutypuv, are declined Comparatives; but they synco- 
 pate and contract the A. Sing, and the N. A. V. Plur. thus : 
 
 S. A. IXH^'OVCC, occ, u. 
 
 PI. N. V. {xu^-ovtg, os?, ovg — ovcc, occ, u. 
 A. fJ.U?-OVCC$, occc, ovc — ovcc, occ, u. 
 
 OF ONE TERMINATION. 
 
 These are, the Cardinal Numbers from white to ikcctIy, 
 inclusive. 
 
ADN0UN. 
 
 47 
 
 Some of ihese are Masc. and Feni. only. Such are, 1. 
 those formed with a noun unaltered in the last syllable, as 
 
 evpiv ; fjLctxpot.vxriv, [Axxgox^p. 2. derived from Trotrnp and 
 (AWrvig, as aTOTW^, ofAopyTap. 3. in ne, moe, and uc, wroc., as 
 
 «$/*»}?, n/**9v^?, ayvw?. 4. ending in f and 4,, as a^af, 
 l*xw%, odylxi^. 5. in a?, a^o?, and tc, t^of, as QvyaLc, av«Xx*?. 
 In this ease neuter is expressed by another adjective ■: 
 thus for the neuter of ap7raf_, «{wr«xfixo» is used. 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Msy«? and TroXvq have only the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Masc. 
 and Neuter of the Singular, and borrow the other cases 
 from fj.Eya.x~oc, n, 01, and woXX-o's) w\ ov : thus, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. JTOA'YZ, ttoXA^ ITOA'Y, 
 G. ttoXX-ov rig, ov, 
 
 D. T?oXX-u r,, u, 
 
 A. itoayn, Ttoxxh, noA'r, 
 
 V. IIOA Y, 9roXXr\ ITOAY . 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. KoXX-u, a, «, 
 G. D. TroXX-ory, ah, oh. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. ttoAX-o*, a), a, 
 
 G. TToXXJUy, 
 
 D. TroXX-o'ig, ccTc, o7c, 
 
 A. TToXX-O'Jf, O-C, a, 
 
 V. to?.X-o1, ai, a. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. METAE, peyaXv, META, 
 G. ^syaA-ou, rjj, ou, 
 D. fj.iya.X-a, r, t it), 
 
 A. METAN,/*£yaX*iv,META, 
 V. METAj psyoLx*, META. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. jj.iya.X-u, a., u, 
 G. D. [j.$ya.X-oiv, cx.iv, otv. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. jusyaX-oi, cci, cc, 
 G. fj.sya.Xuiv, 
 
 D. fxiyocX-oig, ccic, ok, 
 
 A. jUsyaX-ow?, aj, a, 
 
 V. fj.sya.X-oi, on, cc. 
 
 To these may be added fj.%xccp, [xolxccipx. 
 
 The Poets decline the Masc. of ttoXvc like I'^vc 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 The Comparative is formed by the addition of r- r o;, and 
 the Superlative by the addition of Ta-ro?, to the Nomina- 
 tive ; aS fAOlXUp, fAOCKolp-TEfO$, [J.a,XX.p-TCCTOC.. 
 
48 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Adjectives in o$ drop g ; as ( uaxp-o?, 07-pog, o7a,rog. If the 
 penultima is short, o is changed into u ; as arotp-bc, uv$p*e. 3 
 b)Tcs,7Q$ . ^-Otherwise four short syllables would come toge- 
 ther. To avoid three, Homer sometimes lengthens a short 
 one. 
 
 Adjectives in ug drop t j as j$*P'*"«0 i<nrzfoc } so-tutoc. 
 
 Adjectives in ae 9 r^, and yg, add r.-fo? and raro? to the 
 neuter, as u-'xag, jj.zXcl)>-7spo:, rarog. Adjectives in m to the 
 Norn, Plur. Masc. as crvtywi, <ru($pK<r-r£$oc, rxrog. 
 
 Usttuv forms xtTrxiTipog ) ttTcuVj srtor^jof j pioog, /^crampo^, 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 
 In twv, *gtoj. 
 
 
 alo-^por, 
 
 aiVp/i'wy, 
 
 oticr^iirrog. 
 
 U%«*i 
 
 I^0;wv, 
 
 l%§KTTOq. 
 
 xaXo?, 
 
 KUXXluV, 
 
 KOcXXiO-TOCi 
 
 y.vdiog, 
 
 KV&lUVj 
 
 kvokttq$. 
 
 pecoiog, 
 
 H m > 
 
 pocrrog. 
 
 Tepvqff, 
 
 7c?7rnuv, 
 
 rsfavta-rog. 
 
 ^/Xo?, 
 
 QtXluVj 
 
 <pi7^7zog. 
 
 These are formed from the substantives *^So^ KcixXog, &e. 
 $*Xo? makes also (^X-te/jo?, t^toc. 
 
 Ba5u\"j fipot^Vg, fi?c&xyg, yXv/.vg, w$vg, va-xvg, t«^i\, &C 
 make tn, ^to;, as well as T?po;_, raTog. Ups<r(3vg and wscuV 
 sometimes form the superlative &ps<r(2>o-Toc 3 uxhtto;. Some 
 of those also change the last syllable into o-o-uv, as j3M$, 
 fixoo-uiv ; yXvxve, yXvcraay j ra^t;^ vacwv, &C. 
 
 In ICTT-cZOg, 10" 
 
 CCTOC. 
 
 XclXog, XuXio-npog, Xa.Xka-70.ro g. 
 
 Ixlyo:, oXiyio~Tspc, oXiyiO~70.7og. 
 
 jBXal, (3\ccKlo-7!£og. 
 
 ■^■vcivg, ^vjaio-ra,7cr J &C. 
 
 Some are formed by the Attics in ctnspoc, curarog ; some 
 by the Attics and Ionics in eote/joc, ETrarcj. 
 
ADNOUN. 
 
 49 
 
 ccyuQog, 
 
 f/XjAWUV, 
 
 a-psluy, 
 ft shriii} v, 
 ftsXrspog, 
 xpucrauv, 
 Kpcirluvj 
 
 KOCOpUV, 
 
 Xo'im, 
 
 QzfTSfOC, 
 
 ocpiarog. 
 r @sXti<tto$. 
 
 > Kpa,Tl<7TOS. 
 
 }XmTTog. 
 XuHTTOg. 
 
 prccrog, 
 pi<rrog, 
 
 pTKTTOt;. 
 
 'Aya.Qxroi.Tog is rarely found. 
 In the application of these different words to ayaSo?, that ad- 
 jective must be understood to signify not only good, but brave. 
 
 fxaxurepog, 
 
 J KOCKtliiy, 
 
 K.X£p"uv, 
 
 {^ocKporspoq, 
 y,oc<T<TUV, 
 fxeityvj 
 
 SpMpOTlpOS, 
 
 \ psiorspog, 
 "( (xsiuvj 
 I IXcco-ccov, 
 
 ncro-uv, 
 
 {ttXsuv, 
 •vXsim, 
 
 * KocKKTrog. 
 
 ■ yjUpurrog. 
 fxaxporocrog, 
 
 fMYIKHTTOg. 
 
 psyurTog. 
 
 yAKTTOq. 
 
 IXaXivros. 
 riKKTrog. 
 
 X.U.KOS, 
 
 ^axpog, 
 piyocg, 
 
 \XlKpOg, 
 
 voXvg, 
 
 Sometimes 
 X l h m > worse, 
 
 sirable, Xwlrspog; from itpdnpog, former, wporEpcrfrspos, &c. 
 
 From IXoi^a-rog is formed Ixax^^onpog ; from I'tr^aTo?, t^X*' 
 
 rmocToq; from kvSkttck;, ^v^icrrarog ', froUlTpu'TogyJirst, Kprnivroc, 
 
 Comparisons are also made from Nouns. 
 
 ctXyog, ocXyicov, ccXyicrrog. 
 ficccnXzij-s, Ttpos, rarog. 
 EToc7poc f IrocipoTXTog. 
 
 ®eog, ©icvrspog. 
 
 > nXsu 
 
 nXeicrTog. 
 
 a double comparison is found ; as from 
 is formed xuporspog ; from Xuim, more de- 
 
 Kzp^-og, 
 kXikt-w, 
 
 itrrog. 
 
 liTTOiTOg. 
 
 ttXeov kxrvig, vrXsoyEKriaTOirog. 
 •xXyxr-wg, tcrrarog. 
 
 fror-ng, icrccrog, 
 
 p'iy-og, iuv, icrrog. 
 
 vfipio-rrig, 
 $£p, 
 
 (pvpoTKTog. 
 
50 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 From a Pronoun : 
 atJro?, ipse, avtorarog, ipsissitnus. 
 
 
 From Adverbs : 
 
 
 avai-TSjjof, 
 
 rarog. 
 
 narui, 
 
 x.<XTui~ri;oc ) rarog. 
 
 aQap-repog. 
 
 
 7r6fpot), 
 
 wopp'w-Tepqc, rarog. 
 
 law -r spot, 
 \lu-ripog, 
 
 rarog. 
 rarog. 
 
 irpocru, 
 vpul, 
 
 n:pusia[-ripo: y rarog. 
 
 lyyv-ripog, 
 
 rarog. 
 
 OTVIGU), 
 
 om<ni'7Spos, TaTof. 
 
 lyy-lciiy, 
 
 Kjrog. 
 
 fyt, 
 
 V j/iOTOJ 
 
 a<Pap s 
 
 From Prepositions : 
 
 rp», frpo-rspo:, rarog, by syncope and contraction rpwroj. 
 
 VKip, ix'-p-repog, toito?, by syncope vivarog. 
 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 % 
 
 one. 
 
 IVVSVVKQVta, 
 
 evo t 
 
 two. 
 
 'tKarcv, 
 
 xpng, 
 
 three. 
 
 diaKocrioi, 
 
 rtcraap'.g, 
 
 four. 
 
 rpiaKoc-ioi, 
 
 vrkle, 
 
 five. 
 
 rsTO~apXKoaioi, 
 
 U, , 
 
 six. 
 
 TrwraKocrioij 
 
 E7TT(fc, 
 
 seven. 
 
 l^aKoa-iot, 
 
 OX-Tf, 
 
 eight. 
 
 'nrraKoo-iok, 
 
 Em'cX, 
 
 nine. 
 
 OKtaKOO-lOl, 
 
 *£xa, 
 
 ten. 
 
 \mayJjo~ioi, 
 
 EVdtKOi, 
 
 eleven. 
 
 XfhiOl, 
 
 dwlt^stj 
 
 twelve. 
 
 dtcr^iXjct, 
 
 e*xo3-*_, 
 
 twenty. 
 
 ificrxfaw. 
 
 TpKX,X.0V7«, 
 
 thirty. 
 
 terpaKio-^iXioi, 
 
 •tHcTirapax.ovTa-j 
 
 forty. 
 
 7T£VTaK4C7^iA*0t , 
 
 fr^TYtKovra, 
 
 fifty. 
 
 (MVpiQt, 
 
 t'.^y.o^ra, 
 
 sixty. 
 
 dio-pvpiOi, 
 
 \~> :.-a!-;<.0VTK, 
 
 seventy. 
 
 rpio-uvpiot, 
 
 dytotmwitt, 
 
 eighty. 
 
 
 ninety, 
 a hundred, 
 two hundred, 
 three hundred 
 four hundred, 
 five hundred. 
 six hundred, 
 seven hundred, 
 eight hundred, 
 nine hundred, 
 a thousand 
 two thousand, 
 three thousand, 
 four thousand. 
 , five thousand, 
 ten thousand, 
 twenty thousand. 
 30 thousand, &c. 
 
ADNOUN. 
 
 51 
 
 vo, rpU, and T£cr3-apf<y are declined thus, 
 
 
 One. Sing. 
 
 
 N. J* 
 
 plx, 
 
 V 3 
 
 G. Ivoc 
 
 {J.IO.C, 
 
 Ivor, 
 
 D. W/ 
 
 ftta, 
 
 H 
 
 A. sva, 
 
 play, 
 
 sy. 
 
 OVdtlc y OVdcfJLiX, 
 
 oi^ev ; and 
 
 /xrj^slf, ju.»df/. 
 
 ThllS ou^Etf, ovhfxidj ovcilv ; and juyj^Eif, pr^tpice, prtftv. 
 
 Ot'^E eIc, m^e ?y, are used emphatically. From h§ is formed 
 np-of, a, ov j and from ovhU and jou^e)?-, w^ETtpcs and 
 
 j^nJtTfpoj 
 
 TYco. Plur. 
 
 G. &*v, 
 D. <W*. 
 
 rit-o. Dual. 
 N. A. &o, or ^u«, 
 
 G. D. £i/o?y, 01* <5Wry, 
 
 Au'o is always used by the Attics ; it is an aptot in Homer 
 and Herodotus. u Au.$u is sometimes used in the same 
 manner. 
 
 Ave?v is generally used a3 Gen. cWy as Dat. From 2Vo Is 
 formed &uT£pof and $wtcs,to$. 
 
 Four. Plur. 
 
 N. TEcr<rap-£f, a, 
 
 G. T£<rcrapa;y, 
 
 D. TsWapcn, 
 
 A. T£crcr«p-ar, a, 
 
 The Cardinal Numbers are undeclinable from t(v% to 
 sxalov inclusive. 
 
 These, according to their notation by the Greek alpha- 
 bet, are as follow : 
 
 T 
 
 hree. Plur. 
 
 N. TpElV, 
 
 Tfia 
 
 G. 
 
 Tp*Jy, 
 
 D. 
 
 TfHx), 
 
 A. rp???, 
 
 TflOi 
 
 ttg, I, a, 1. 
 Jto'o, II, jS', 2. 
 TpsTj, III, </, 3. 
 Tstrtrafti, IIII, ^', 4. 
 mm, n, e, 5. 
 I|, ni, r', 6. 
 f7TT«, n ii, £*, 7. 
 
 KtT«\ n III, JJ, 8. 
 mia, n IIII, $', 9. 
 
 ^£jc«, A, <, 10. 
 Ev^xa, AI, *», 11. 
 ^^xa, All, ȣ', 12. 
 rpiaxaio^Exa, AIII, ty', 13. 
 TEO-o-apaxa/^Exa, AIIII, i^ 1 ', 14 
 TTEVTEttaj^cxa, AIT, ts, 15. 
 EKxat^Exa, AIT I, if', 16. 
 ETTaxai^Exa, AIT II, *£' , 17- 
 o'xTcuxa/^a, AIT III, »n', 18. 
 
m 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 hna.KKlhx.tz,, AIT IIH, &', 19. 
 SkKocri, AA, k. , 20. 
 uko(ti £*j, AAI, xa, 21. 
 TpiaxovTa, AAA, x', 30. 
 Tfo-o-apaHovTa, AAAA, ji/, 40. 
 7T=VTr'xovTa, ]a{, v '.> 50. 
 
 1%*K0VT0L, IfJ^' £'> 6*0. 
 
 i$oy.-nKonc6, FfAA, o, 70. 
 oySoviKovTK, Ja[AAA, or', SO. 
 Ivwvkovtcc, JijAAAA, % 90. 
 ExaTov, H, p', 100. 
 
 etitzxocri'Ok, oa, a,, HH, cr , 200. 
 Tpiccxoanoi, HHH, t , 300. 
 
 Tscrcrccpccxocnoi, HHHH, v, 400. 
 TTfVTaKocrtoi, ]3[, <£>', 500. 
 iZoLKocrioi, E[H, p^', 600. 
 cVraxocnoi, }5[HH, %|/ , 700. 
 
 GKTOX.OC7101, MHHH, W, 800. 
 
 ImoxoWtu, 13HHHH, 3, 900. 
 X^oh X, a, 1000. 
 h<rxfau»> XX, £, 2000. 
 
 KEVTGtX.lO'xfolOlj ]5[, £, 5000. 
 
 juu'pto*, M, ,1, 10,000. 
 Surpvpioi, MM, ,*, 20,000. 
 myTuxHrpvpioi, Jm[, v, 50,000. 
 
 OSKOt,K,l(T<[JWpK)l i ]m[]m[ p>100,000" 
 
 To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, 
 the Greeks used the letters of the alphabet. But as there 
 are only 24, they used r, called sViVjj/aov, for 6 j J, called 
 KQTcna,, for 90 ; and J), called o-av s-7, a tt covered with an 
 inverted §f* for 900. 
 
 A mark is placed over the letters to express the lower 
 numbers. Placed under them, it expresses thousands ; 
 thus e is 5, ,« is 5Q0O. 
 
 In the Capitals, 
 
 I, 1, is the mark of Unit 5 H,100,istheinitiaiofHexaTcv; 
 
 n, 5, is the initial of ITeWe ; X,1000, Xfotot ; 
 
 A, 10, Asxa ; M, 10,000, Mu'picu. 
 
 Each of these may be repeated four times, nil, 4 j AAA, 
 SO ; MM, 20,000, &c. IT inclosing a numerical letter 
 multiplies it by 5 3 thus, ]Zf, 50, &c. 
 
 From 10 to 20, the large numbers may be placed first or 
 last,$£K«, Sso'o, oriw^jca, 12. From 20, the larger number is 
 placed first, sUon &o, 22. From 30, the conjunction is 
 inserted, tqkxkovtoi k<x\ Svo, 32, &c. 
 
 ORDINAL. 
 
 ^■p&JTOf, 
 Tf»TO?, 
 
 first, 
 second, 
 
 third. 
 
 EJCTPfj 
 
 fourth. 
 
 fifth. 
 
 sixth, 
 
ADNOUN. 
 
 53 
 
 oyaoog, 
 
 SVVXTOC, 
 OUOSKOCTOC 
 
 seventh, 
 eighth. 
 
 ninth. 
 
 tenth. 
 
 eleventh. 
 
 twelfth. 
 
 thirteenth. 
 T£TcrapECDtai^H:<aro^fourteenth. 
 tiKorog, twentieth. 
 
 fixoj-oj TrpwTOf, ^ 1st. 
 
 HKOfOS dEUTfpOC, 2*2(1. 
 
 Tpiaxoro?, thirtieth. 
 
 rs(TcrxpKKoroc f fortieth. 
 
 Ib^OjUrjxorof, 
 
 Ikocto-o<;, 
 
 4HXKoaio<rc<;, 
 
 rptaJtoaio-oc, 
 
 d'icr^i^iof of, 
 fAVfiorog, 
 
 $tcrijt.v$io<rce, 
 Tp*o*juyptoro?> 
 
 fiftieth, 
 sixtieth, 
 seventieth, 
 eightieth, 
 ninetieth. 
 100th. 
 200th. 
 300tb. 
 1,000th. 
 2,000th. 
 10,000th. 
 20,000th. 
 30,000th, 
 &e. 
 
 Of the Ordinal numbers, all under 20, except second, 
 seventh, and eighth, end in to?. From thence upwards all 
 end in oo-to?. They use, however, 1st, %f*io<; and Trp&Tjpcj. 
 
 4. r=raprog and TsrpocTog. 7. s'i3^o/xoj and l^o^xrog. 8, 6<y- 
 ooo<; and oyooocTog.. 
 
 20th. eIxottqs. 21. eTs *al ilKocrr.og r plci y.x) ri:<oa-Tn, hjuxttcj 
 JEpMTG?, 
 
 The Greeks have used the letters of the alphabet in their 
 natural order, to express a consecutive series, or marks of 
 division. Thus the 24 books of the Iliad and Odyssey are 
 marked by the 24 letters. 
 
 SIGNIFICATION OF THE ADNOMINAL TERMI* 
 NATIONS. 
 
 Adjectives in — x7os 
 
 signify mostly the place from which any thing is, and to 
 which any thing belongs, e. g. nnyxloi, K-mvx'ioc, KpnmToc. 
 Similarly /3ou* ay^Xxin, ' a heifer from the herd;' Qvp^os, 
 ( external, without ;' KopvQx'tog, ' at the top, or head ;' 
 iflrioToXtjwaTo?, e in a letter, or contained in a letter]' but 
 WprjyzTo; is the same as ypwwcof* ' peacefully disposed.' 
 f3 
 
54 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Adjectives in — cl\io$ 
 
 express mostly a fullness, e. g. Gapp'aXeos, J»|uaXso's, rap- 
 jSaXeoj, ' full of courage,' ' fear.' In others as apyaXjo?, 
 ' hard, difficult/ this signification is not perceptible. 
 
 Adjectives in — avoj 
 signify mostly the possession of the quality which the pri- 
 mitive expresses, e. g. *evjtt&ay&j f^Tfctoto's, f bitter ;' p»ys- 
 ^a>os from pVyoc, ' shuddering.' 
 
 Adjectives in — etnif. 
 Vide ivog and uvo;. 
 
 Adjectives in — sto; 
 
 express commonly an origin or source, e. g. 6»i'pEio?, )$moe 9 
 (36ho<;, ivr-aof, &c. consisting of, or taken from ' geese,' r cat- 
 tle,' horses,' e.g. Jtpsces 0^'csjov, ' game,' 'venison / x&Vpo? tvir'tfs, 
 f horse-dung,' &c. So also adjectives derived from pro- 
 per names, 'O/JLTifHOC, EvflTTlhiOC. 
 
 Others express rather an agreement with, or resem- 
 blance to, e. g. av^pjToc, yvvatx.s7oc, ' becoming a man/ 
 ' a woman/ ' manly,' ' womanly or effeminate.' 
 
 Instead of — ttdr$ the lonians said r{ioc, as avGpasrmo?, <pom- 
 
 Adjectives in — toe contr. — ovc 
 
 express the material, e. g. x? v ? Eoe > — °V^ apyu'pso?, — °^ 
 Xtvsor, — oCj, f golden/ ' silver,' e linen.' Hence the 
 substantive xa^axin, —y I} Xiqvtbv, — », ' the panther's or 
 lion's hide.' 
 
 Xtoveo? means rather f snow-white / <pxoyw?, ' shining 
 like fire.' 
 
 Adjectives in — rpo? and — npoc 
 signify chiefly quality, e.g. ^oAepoc, rfv<p?p6c t o-Ktepoc, f crafty,' 
 ' luxurious,' ' steady.' Some express a propensity, 
 oivnpoc, ' given to wine / HCLpa-Typoc, ' laborious,' which 
 sense belongs to all adjectives which come from substan- 
 tives expiessing a suffering or affection. Others have an 
 
ADNOUN. 55 
 
 active signification, as voaspos or Koc-Yiyoe, oy\^oc, Ka^arnpo?, 
 vywfa, ' causing sickness, unhealthy,' ' of a district j' 
 ' causing disquiet, trouble.' 
 
 Adjectives in — ««s 
 signify fullness, as Sevtywic, ttWe;?, utoiaf, ' full of trees,' 
 f grass,* ' wood.' 
 
 Adjectives in — uXoj 
 signify a propensity to, and capability or fitness for, any 
 thing, e. g. cnyriXos, (TWTtnXoc, kirouTt{kQc y aia-^vvTviXog, vitvnXoq, 
 ' prone to silence, deceit, shame, sleep.' To this the idea 
 of fullness is nearly allied : hence v^nXo?, ' watery.' 
 
 Adjectives in — ixss 
 signify, 1. belonging to any thing, as o-uim&tikos, \vx^ki 
 c corporeal, spiritual;' <2. qualified for anything, «y*/* " 
 hkoc, SiSeunutXiKos, »h*q$j 3. coming from any thing, as ?ra- 
 TpiJco?, fioUoc, and @ohk6s', 4. becoming to any thing, 
 adapted to, or fit for anything, avfyixoj, QfaiKos, ' becoming 
 a man,' ' a friend.' 
 
 Adjectives in — i^og 
 express chiefly fitness, passive and active, e. g. iSuhpo:, 
 aot^t/Ao?, [j.oix i l AOI >3 ' eatable,' * adapted to song,' ' warlike.' 
 Others, however, express merely a quality, as ttsvQi- 
 fxoe, SoKipoe, xaXTitjuo?, ' mournful,' e celebrated,' l beau- 
 tiful.' 
 
 Adjectives in — ivog and — ei*m 
 
 signify, 1. a material of which any thing is made, e. g. 
 
 y vivos, xuXtxpivo:, ntxiv^vog, &c. e made of earth, of reeds, of 
 tiles 5' 2. a quality, which arises from the magnitude or 
 quantity of the thing expressed by the derivation, 7rs<W?, 
 o£fi 0?, o-kotwoc, ( even,' ( mountainous,' e dark ;' 3. these 
 serve to derive adjectives from adverbs or substantives 
 of time, e. g. p^Qscnvoj, 0?ptvo's, oTajptyoj. 
 
56 GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Adjectives in — u>s 
 express a quality chiefiy, as hnrspoe, vespertinus, i of or 
 belonging to evening j' QccXoicro-ioc, ' marine j* fewor, * be- 
 longing to the guest." If two adjectives are derived from 
 one substantive, one in oc, and the other in *o?, the latter 
 generally signifies a proneness, a tendency to any thing 
 which the first expresses generally as a quality, e.g. xaQctpcc, 
 e pure/ xa9ap*o;, ' loving purity.' 
 
 Adjectives in — osig 
 signify a fullness, e. g. ju>jt*o«?, ' full of prudent counsels, 
 
 Adjectives in — 6\*$ 
 express a quality, and are derived from verbs, as jw.au wAnc, 
 fern, pctivohli, oi<p6\r,c, fern, oltyoxiq, oTrytoXuj (also ottujw^tjs), 
 
 tycuvoXi;. 
 
 Adjectives in — u$ns 
 
 express sometimes, 1. a fullness, e. g. <zoiu$*q, «»6tytw3fefe 
 ffET^wJn? j 2. a resemblance, <x<p>ixa^, ' wasp-like,' QXoyuhc, 
 ' like fire/ avJ^^e, ' manly.' In this sense these adjectives 
 coincide with those in — o«5n'?, and probably are formed 
 from them, as aorsgottoVs ovpavo? signifies also ' the starry 
 heaven.' 
 
 Adjectives in — «x<k 
 signify a propensity, a tendency to any thing, e. g. autw- 
 t«*os, 4,fy^Aoc, ^silaXof, ' prone to sin/ • lying/ f penu- 
 riousness.' 
 
 Adjectives in — wo?, properly — ii'o?,. and — o?o? 
 signify an origin, e. g. irxt§m$ r t ^t^oc, srargwi'o?, f spring- 
 ing from the father or mother/ »»'«©$,. *Vof, ' belonging to 
 the morning.' 
 
( 57 ) 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 Pronouns are divided into 
 
 i. Personal. 
 
 » \ T 
 
 lytu, 1. 
 <?v, thou. 
 ©u, of him. 
 
 2. Possessive. 
 
 I/a-oj, «\, oy, my. 
 
 o*o ?, a-*? 1 , 0*0 y, thy. 
 o$, or i-ojj rt, ov, his. 
 vu'{tz$-o$, <x, ov } our, q/"w5 £w?o. 
 c(pwiTE|-oj, a, oy, your, o/ yott 
 
 yptTsp-oc, a, oy, our, 
 fy*5TEp-os, a, oy, your. 
 
 *H*"' > their. 
 
 c<f£Tsp-05, a, oy, J 
 
 3. Relative. 
 
 o$, »i, oy, who. 
 
 auT-o?, 77, o, he, she, it. 
 
 4. Interrogative. 
 tk, t/, who ? what ? 
 
 5. Demonstrative, 
 
 0^£, 7$f, TOdf, this. 
 
 IjceTv-o?, n, o, that. 
 
 01>T©£, aWT>}, TOUTO, 
 
 this. 
 
 6. Reciprocal, 
 
 Ifxccrov, of myself. 
 G-EavTotA, of thyself. 
 say-row, of himself. 
 
 7. Indefinite, 
 
 tk, r*, any. 
 $s7vk, some one. 
 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural 
 
 N. \yu, 
 
 
 
 N. »)^s*v, 
 
 G. Ijutou, or ju,au, 
 
 
 N.A. vwi', yw, 
 
 G. VtfJiUV, 
 
 D. E/x-oij or jw-ot, 
 
 
 G.D. vwi'y, y^y. 
 
 D. w/aTv, 
 
 A. EjUE, Or ]W.E. 
 
 
 
 A. u'juaj." 
 
53 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. «4, 
 
 G. <70V, 
 
 D. <ro), 
 Ik. <ri 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A. cr$w)>', <r$x, 
 G.D. c$i>i>, c®wy. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. £/ufiV, 
 
 G. ifJLVV, 
 D. i/x?y, 
 A. £/xet?. 
 
 N. 
 G. &u, 
 D.of, 
 
 a. r. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A. c-Qu), <r<p), 
 G.D. crtywiv, a<piv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 G. cr$wv, 
 D. <7<plcri, 
 A. cr<p«s. 
 
 From o-^s? is derived the Latin vos, as from ȣ; n<v. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 From the oblique cases of the personal pronoun lyu, <ri, 
 ov, and the nominative of the plural and dual vu-sTg, *f**& 
 <r<Ps?c, >&>(, ff<p««, ct-^e, the pronouns possessive are derived, 
 which correspond in their signification to the genitive of 
 the personal pronoun. They are declined exactly like ad- 
 jectives in o; of three terminations : 
 
 lfj.6c } *, ov, mine. 
 o~6c, y, 6y, thine. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. og, n, o, 
 
 Gt t r 
 
 . ov, r>c, ov., 
 
 Dt t r 
 
 • u, ?> £> 
 
 A. ov, r,i, o. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A. u, a, u, 
 G.D. oh, cch, oh. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. oi, at, a, 
 
 uv, 
 
 D. °hj> *ifj ° r >i> 
 A. ov<;, <xq, «. 
 
PRONOUN. 
 
 59 
 
 Ouv, with the signification of the Latin cnnque, is added 
 to compound Relatives, and takes the accent, as ostutow, 
 whosoever. 
 
 Avros, >}'_, o, was used for the third person ; yet it has the 
 proper signification of a pronoun, and of the English, ' he, 
 she, it,' only in the oblique cases : in the nominative it 
 signifies not simply 'he,' but 'he himself,' ipse. If the 
 article precedes 6 airog, Ji avri, to ©juto, it signifies c the 
 same. ' 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 Tk, n.T*, Gen. too;, &c. Here the accent is on the t, m 
 the dissyllabic cases, and in the nominative it is acute ('). 
 In the neuter the Poets say also tin for rl. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 "Oh is declined like the article, to which tho enclitic h 
 is annexed in all the cases only to give greater force. 
 At™? and Uuvo; are declined like oq, % t o. 
 Ovto,- prefixes r } like the article, thus : 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 INGULAR. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 OVTO,*, 
 
 
 ai/Tt]^ 
 
 tovto, 
 
 
 G. 
 
 toi'tov, 
 
 
 Tai/TIK, 
 
 XOVTOV, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 roura*, 
 
 
 Tai/T»i f 
 
 routti, 
 
 
 A. 
 
 TOVTOf, 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 toDto. 
 
 N 
 
 A. 
 
 TOUTCU, 
 
 
 1&VTCC, 
 
 toJtw, 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 rovroiy, 
 
 
 T<xurai», 
 
 roofon*. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE.. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. OVTOi, 
 
 avtut, 
 
 Ta'JTO, 
 
 G. 
 
 TCVTM, 
 
 
 D. T0VT01C, 
 
 ruvrccic, 
 
 rovroig 
 
 A. tovtovc, 
 
 TCLVTCIC, 
 
 rocvroc. 
 
 av is used in the words in which there is neither o nor v. 
 To the Demonstratives \ long, accented, is added j as 
 ovtoo-I, hicce ; even if ye is affixed, as rovroyL 
 
 RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 From the Personal Pronouns and avroc are compounded 
 
 <TSO.UT 
 SOUIT-OV 
 
 ■ov y > 
 
 r,c, ov, 
 
 Of these the last alone has a plural. 
 
 G. lotvr-uvy D. o7$, otic,, o7<;, A. oC'c, a?, a. 
 
 For osavTov we often find, by Crasis, o-xvrov ; and for 
 laurouj otvTov. The latter is used by the Attics in the three 
 Persons. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. Ti?, Ti, 
 G. TiVOC, 
 
 D. Tin, 
 
 A. TiVCC, Tl. 
 
 c: and rU are often joined together j as or*?, who or 
 whosoever. 
 
 N. A. Tiv y c, 
 G. D. ri'joh. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. TiVE£, rtva, 
 G. TiVOJVj 
 
 D. Tt<74, 
 
 A. rtvac, T*»a. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. otic, %ric, on. 
 
 Dr r r 
 
 . WTiVi, »?TiV*. WTiV*. 
 
 (> t r r 
 
 j. imvo?, >irtvo?, awoj. 
 
 A. ovma, nvrivx, on, &C. 
 
 In the neuter o is often separated from rt, with or with- 
 out a comma, to be distinguished from the conjunction or*. 
 
VERB. 61 
 
 o, 11, to 5e~v«, some one, is declined thus : 
 N. Jetva, among the Poets hU- 
 
 G. dstva, or oilvocroq, Or dEivo?. 
 
 D. hxvoc i or Seivocn, or toi. 
 A. &tV«. 
 
 VERB. 
 
 VOICES 
 
 Verbs have three Voices : Active, Passive, and Middle. 
 
 The Middle Voice is so called because it has a middle 
 signification between the Active and the Passive. It im- 
 plies neither action nor passion alone, but an action re- 
 flected on the agent himself. It signifies what we do, 1. 
 to ourselves ; 2. for ourselves. 
 
 I. Thus <po/Ss« Active signifies 1 frighten another person j 
 $o@eo(iou Passive, I am frightened by another ; but (pofHopcu 
 Middle, I frighten myself, I am afraid, or I fear. In this 
 sense the Middle combines the Active and the Passive, / 
 frighten and am frightened, &c. Forms having an analogy 
 to this exist in several languages. 
 
 II. When the Middle verb is followed by an accusative, 
 it implies that the action exerted on that object is intended 
 for the benefit or pleasure of the agent. Thus TloX^oi 
 irot*<T<xi signifies to attack by war ; vonitreurQeu to make war- 
 in self-defence. The latter is in more frequent use, perhaps 
 because all states profess to make war only in defence ti 
 their rights or liberties. — To this class may be referre; 
 what we procure to be done to or for us by another. Thu 
 a father is said ^afac-Oai his son, when he has sent him t: 
 a master to be educated. 
 
6-2 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE'. 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 Since in determining an action two things are to be re- 
 garded, first the time in which it takes place, and secondly 
 its relation to the intention and object of the person ; 
 hence each verb is capable of two principal variations in its 
 form, of which one, the Tense, serves to determine the 
 time, and the other, the Mood, expresses the subordinate 
 relations of it. 
 
 I. The time in which an action can take place is either 
 present, past, or future. There are thus in Greek, as in 
 every language, three principal tenses, the Present, the 
 Praeteiite, and the Future. Of the Present there is only 
 one simple form in Greek j but for the Preeterite there are 
 more than in any other language. An action, for instance, 
 is either, with relation to itself, entirely passed, or, as rela- 
 tive, passed with respect to another time expressed or un- 
 derstood. The aorist serves to designate the time entirely 
 passed ; the imperfect, the praeter perfect, and the plus 
 perfect, the relative time. The imperfect represents a 
 past action as continuing during another past action and 
 accompanying it ; the perfect and plus perfect desig- 
 nate a perfect action, but continuing to another time 5 
 the perfect to the present ; the plus perfect to a time past. 
 — The future time is understood under three modifications, 
 either with respect merely to its future beginning (Fut. 
 1. 2. Act. and Fut. Med.), or as future and complete (Fut. 
 1. 2. Pass.) or as future and finished, with respect to an 
 action to take place hereafter (Fut. 3. Pass). 
 
 II. An action is considered with reference to the subject 
 of the speaker, 1. as subsisting by itself, determined by no 
 relation (infinitive) ; 2. as a general quality and condition 
 of an object or person (participle) j 3. as a determinate 
 proposition ; and in this Tespecr, a ) as actual (indicative), 
 
 b) as potential and intentional (optative and conjunctive), 
 
 c) as necessary, at least subjective for the speaker (impera- 
 tive) . 
 
 The following is a view of the Tenses and Moods : 
 1. Present. 
 
VERB. 63 
 
 {a) absolutely past. Aorist. 
 b ) r e.aUve, yP ast. l;^/^- 
 
 s a ) With regard to the beffinnig. 
 
 I Fut. 1.2. A. M. 
 
 9 v J b ) With regard to the completion. 
 
 3. Mature. < Fut L % Pass ^ 
 
 I c) With regard to the continued succession . 
 
 v Fut. 3. Pass. 
 
 Subsisting: 1. Infin. 
 Inherent in: 2. Participle. 
 
 f a ) actual, Indicat. 
 
 j |8. Conjunct. 
 
 L c ) necessary, lmperat. 
 
 FIVE MOODS. 
 
 Indicative, Imperative, Optative, Subjunctive, Infinitive. 
 
 It may appear strange that the Imperative should refer 
 to a past, and not to a future time. — To solve the diffi- 
 culty, some have called the First and Second Aorists the 
 First and Second Futures. By the Present, the Future also 
 is implied. And the Perfect enjoins a thing to be done 
 prior to a specified time $ as, I order you to have done this 
 before I return. 
 
 As a general rule respecting this mood, it may be ob- 
 served that the third persons of the Imperative have an u 
 in every tense of every voice. 
 
 The second Aorist of this mood appears to be the root 
 of the verb j thus iws of rvftm or rwrtto, Aa/3? of Tia/^Scivw, 
 $\$ of TiQniAL, &c. The first use of language being to ex- 
 press a want, the Imperative was, perhaps, naturally the 
 first object of speech. 
 
 NINE TENSES. 
 
 Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, First and Second 
 Aorist, First and Second Future, and in the Passive Paulo- 
 post-Future. 
 The Present Tense speaks of a Thing, now doing or 
 
 being ; as, riu, I honour, or am now honouring. 
 
64 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Imperfect speaks of a Thing, which was doing or 
 being at some time past ; as, hiov, I was honouring. 
 
 The Perfect speaks of a thing done, and continuing till 
 the present j as, rkma, I have honoured, and still do 
 honour. 
 
 The Pluperfect refers to some time past, and speaks of 
 something done and continuing till that time ; as, vredxut? 
 I had honoured. 
 
 The Aorists designate time entirely past, and may there- 
 fore be called Historical tenses. — The Aorists or Indefinite 
 Tenses have frequently the force or signification of the 
 Perfect or Imperfect j as, sWa, I have honoured 5 etvwoyj 
 I struck. Often of the Pluperfect ; as, ItteI toAAo. rfxsre, 
 when he had heard many things. Sometimes of the Fu- 
 ture j as, t! Soksi BJtswV, on a jLt»J eA0*j, what think ye, that 
 he will not come. And sometimes of the Present 5 as, inl 
 rS Mao-sag xaQt^pa? tKolQurav, they sit on Moses's seat. 
 
 The Future speaks of a thing to be done, or to be here- 
 after ; as, rio-u, I shall or will honour. 
 
 The Second Future seems to be an Old Attic form of 
 the. First, and has consequently the same sense. 
 
 The Paulo-post-Future expresses that which is on the 
 point of being done; as, Tnlo-opai, I shall be presently 
 honoured. 
 
 In the English expression of the Tenses, much precision 
 is not to be expected. Their use and signification depend 
 on the Conjunctions and Particles, to which they are 
 joined. The Optative, for instance, is seldom used in the 
 Potential sense without av. 
 
 NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 
 
 Three Numbers : Singula?*, Dual, and Plurai. 
 
 Dual. — The Imperfect, Pluperfect, the two Aorists In- 
 dicative, and all the Optative, form the Dual in ov, w. 
 
 Where the First Person Plural ends in /mev, there is no 
 First Person Dual ; and where the Third Person Plural 
 ends in en, or tw, the Third Person Dual is the same with 
 the Second. 
 
VERB. 60 
 
 Dual and Plural. — In the Present, Perfect, and Future 
 Indicative, and all the Subjunctive, the Third Person Plu- 
 ral ends in <ri or t«* : and the Second and Third Dual are 
 the same. 
 
 Plural. — The natural, and probably the original form of 
 the 3d Person Plural is ovn, from which the Latin is 
 formed. The penultima of this Person is generally long, 
 except in the Imperfect and 2d Aorist Indicative Active 5 
 two tenses, which have such an affinity, that some gram- 
 marians believe that the 2d Aorist, when it differs in form 
 from the Imperfect, is the Imperfect of an obsolete verb 
 of a kindred form, as stvkov from rvnu, sVayov from roiyv, &c. 
 
 KINDS OF VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are of two kinds : 1. in Q : 2. in MI. 
 
 The latter, however, differ from the former only in the 
 present, and some in the construction of the Aorist and 
 Perfect. 
 
 Verbs in u are either such as have a consonant before o, 
 or such as have a vowel, a, s, before u. — The former 
 are called verba barytona, barytone verbs j because they 
 have the accent (acute) on the penultima, and the last 
 syllable necessarily has the grave accent, not expressed in 
 writing (0 t3a,?v\ tovos). — The second are called verba pur a, 
 or contracta, because u is contracted by the Attics into 
 one syllable with the vowel preceding ; or circumflexa (tte- 
 pio-TrwiAsva,), because, after contraction, the w receives a 
 circumflex, QiXsu, $i\Z. These, however, are not at all 
 different from the first, since it is merely required to con- 
 tract them in the present and imperfect. 
 
 VERBS in n. 
 There are Four Conjugations of Verbs in w, distinguished 
 by the termination of the First Future j 
 
 The First Conjugation in \u t as twVtw, *cv\w* 
 The Second in f«, as xiyu, \{%o. 
 g3 
 
66 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Third in <ru, as rla } rlo-u. 
 
 The Fourth in a liquid before w, as -^axx«, ^cl\u. 
 
 For those who give the preference to the distinction of 
 Conjugations by the characteristic, or the letter preceding 
 u, the principles of that system are here added. 
 
 For the sake of analogy and simplification, it may be 
 observed that the Mute consonants are divided, with re- 
 ference to the organs of speech, into 
 
 Labials, pronounced by the lips, ir, (3, (p ; 
 Palatals, by the palate, k, y, % 5 
 Dentals, by the teeth, r, $, 0. 
 
 The characteristic letters 
 
 Of the First Conjugation are the Labials, with <xt ; 
 
 Of the Second, the Palatals, with kt and a-o- (tt by the 
 
 Attics) ; 
 Of the Third, the Dentals, with f or a vowel j 
 Of the Fourth, the Liquids, X, y., v, p. 
 
 The Characteristic then is the Letter, which precedes 
 the Termination ; as, t in riu, to honour ; k in is-Xe'xw, to 
 fold 3 and x in rsfn-u, to delight ; but it is chiefly to be 
 considered in three Tenses, viz. the Present, First Future, 
 and Perfect of the Indicative, which are called the primary 
 or principal Tenses, because from them all the rest are 
 fomed. 
 
 Charact.Let. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 
 Pr. IF. Per. Pres. 
 
 1 Fut. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 
 ft- . 4* P TEp7TW, 
 
 Tfp-^W, 
 
 TE IsptylX, 
 
 to delight. 
 
 /3 — XEibW, 
 
 "ku\,w, 
 
 XsXEtfpo, 
 
 to pour out. 
 
 <P — ypcttyw, 
 
 "ypa-vJ/W, 
 
 ysfpoiQa,, 
 
 to write. 
 
 7r7 — TV7TTU, 
 
 Tf'4/W, 
 
 relvQx, 
 
 to strike. 
 
 
 Second Conji 
 
 jgation. 
 
 
 y- % X wXexw, 
 
 to-Xe^o;, 
 
 wsVXE^a, 
 
 to fold. 
 
 y — — Xtyw, 
 
 Xe|w, 
 
 Xs'Xsxa, 
 
 to say. 
 
 x vfx®* 
 
 Tps|w, 
 
 TppE^a, 
 
 to run. 
 
 iil — TiJtlw, 
 
 TE^W, 
 
 te'7ex«, 
 
 tobring forth 
 
 g-g- — — opuacrw, ■ 
 
 T/W, OfZjfw, 
 
 wpy^aj, 
 
 to dig. 
 
ive Voice. 
 
 To/ace p. 67. 
 
 
 Conjunctive. 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 jtrike, 
 
 trike' 
 
 : (2) 
 
 TuVrw'(that)Imaystrike' 
 
 -U, -fig, -71 
 
 -nTov, -r,TOV 
 
 -W/XEV, ->5TE, -WOl (v) 
 
 TWTEiV 
 
 TVTTTtOV, -OVO-tt,, -OV 
 
 (Gen. -ovrog, 
 -ova-rig, 
 -ovrog 
 &C.) 
 
 
 TSTVQlt) 
 
 as the present. 
 
 TSTVtytVOLt 
 
 TBTvQug, -vToc, -6g 
 (G. -orog, -viccg, 
 -orog, &C.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! > 
 
 -w, -vis, -ri 
 
 -YITOV, -riTOV 
 -UfJLSV, -V)TE, -WO"* (v) 
 
 TV-^OCt 
 
 4/av 
 (G. -avTog, 
 -do-rig, &C.) 
 
 
 as the present. 
 
 TV7TUV 
 
 TV<7rm f -ovcroc, -ov 
 
 (G. TVKQVTQg, &C.) 
 
 nt. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 TV-^SiV 
 
 Tv'-^vv, -ovo-a, -ov 
 
 
 wanting. 
 
 TVTTsTv 
 
 TWJtm, -ovcra, -ovv 
 (G. -ovvrog, &C.) 
 
VERB. 
 
 67 
 
 Charac.Let. 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 
 Pr.lF.Per. Pres. 
 
 1 Fut. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 
 T <T K OLVVTCt), 
 
 G&VUlXW, 
 
 riyvxa, 
 
 to perfect. 
 
 — O.0U), 
 
 OK7W, 
 
 yixo, 
 
 to sing. 
 
 V — ^XyiOSci}, 
 
 «37A*j'cr«, 
 
 < cr?7rA*))ca, 
 
 to fill. 
 
 ac — — — vzXacrcroj 
 
 'KrAacrw, 
 
 'VJiTrXocKot, 
 
 to form. 
 
 f — — ^pafw, 
 
 <£pa<rw, 
 
 nzztypoMCt, 
 
 to say. 
 
 t - — — r/w, 
 
 TiViUj 
 
 rslmoc, 
 
 to honour. 
 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 
 AA A. Jt rsAAw, 
 
 S-sAw, 
 
 sraXKoij 
 
 to send. 
 
 p, //. — y?/xw, 
 
 yfjU^ 
 
 V£VE[AY1K01, 
 
 to give. 
 
 y y — (Pccivui) 
 
 <Payw, 
 
 KTsQc&yKix,, 
 
 to shew. 
 
 p p — <T7m'p«, 
 
 cr7rfpo5, 
 
 B<T7T<X.pK<X f 
 
 to sow. 
 
 jUV /x TljXVOJ, 
 
 TS^W, 
 
 TilsiXYlKOC,- 
 
 to cut. 
 
 When ttI, x.7, AA, or ^ come before u in the Present, 
 the first Consonant is the Characteristic. Some Verbs 
 also in c-o-w, which the Attics change into riu, form the 
 First Future by rejecting one of the Consonants j as, 
 TrAasrcrw, nXclo-u, niirXocKoe, ; and some Verbs in f« have f« in 
 the First Future ; as, otyuZw, o^wfw ; and some have both 
 crw and |w ; as, aprafw, «p9Ta<x&;, or apTrafw. 
 
 The Derivative Tenses always retain the Characteristic 
 of the Primary or Principal Tenses, from which they are 
 derived. Wherefore by the Characteristic and Termina- 
 tion, all the Tenses are easily known, and distinguished 
 from one another. 
 
 The Characteristic Letter of each Tense in the Indica- 
 tive continues through all the Tenses of like denomination 
 in the other Moods, Active, Passive, and Middle. 
 
 TuVto). 
 
 Pres. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 1st Fut. <rv\w. 
 2d Aor. hvnwv. 
 
 Perf. 7!tv$oc. 
 

 
 Synoptical 
 
 View of the Active 
 
 ^bicc. 
 
 
 To/mxp.67. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Conjunctive. 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Presen 
 
 Sing. tuV™, ' I strike' 
 
 Dual. -ITOV, -ITOV 
 Plur. -OIJ.il, -STE, -OIW1 (,) 
 
 Sing, men, * strike' 
 
 tvittitm, ' let him (her, 
 it) strike.' 
 
 Dual. tuVtstov, * strike ye 
 (both)' 
 TvwTi'™», ' they (both; 
 may or must strike 
 
 Plur. rihmr'c, ' strike ye 
 ™rTiV„o-«v, (1) ' they 
 may,must,shallstrike' 
 
 Tifwrwfu, ' I might strike 
 were I to strike 
 
 (2) 
 
 tuVtw' (that) Imaystrike' 
 
 -»/"»> -»T£j -BO-I (v) 
 
 T.W., 
 
 tuVtwv, -ovo-a, -ov 
 
 (Gen. -okto;, 
 &c.) 
 
 Imperf 
 
 Sing. tTWTo», • I did strike 
 -OK, -«, .,(„) 
 
 DUal. -JTOV, -ETtJV 
 
 Plur. -o/*»,"H- e> -0.(3) 
 
 Perf. 1 
 
 Sing.TETw^a, 'I havestmck 
 
 Dual. -OLTOVj -CCTOV 
 
 Plur. -« m -«* h -£„ (,) 
 
 as the present. 
 
 as the present. 
 
 as the present. 
 
 
 Ttrutpyt, -ti7a, -05 
 -o'to;' &C.)' 
 
 Plusql 
 
 Sing. IrnvQat 
 
 -.» -s. ; , -» (4) 
 Dt;al. -»tov, -si™ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Perf. 2 
 
 TsVmra as the perf. 1. in all the moods. 
 
 
 
 
 
 PlusqS. 
 
 •tituVsiv as in the plusquam perf. 1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Aor. 1. 
 
 Sing. ".rv^a. 
 
 Dual. -aTOVj -aTHV 
 Plur. -XpW, -«TS, -O.V 
 
 Sing, tu'+o. 
 
 Dual. -CCTOV, -a,TW 
 
 Plur. -an, -eSrwran 
 
 -ajfisv, -aiTs, -esisv (6) 
 
 -«, -ps, -p 
 
 TV^. 
 
 T U > 5j «'+««, «'- 
 
 (G. -MT.S, 
 
 -»W, &C.) 
 
 Aor. 2. 
 
 Sing. eWo» 
 
 as the imperfectum. 
 
 as the present. 
 
 as the present. 
 
 as the present. 
 
 rwffi, 
 
 (G.lWlWS,&C.) 
 
 Fut. ]. 
 
 Sing. tv'+b as the present. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Tu'^oifu as the present. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 «>» 
 
 tv-^uv, -ova-cc, -ov 
 
 Fut. 2. 
 
 Sing. tuto 
 
 Dual.' -sr™, - t r™ 
 Plur. -™>», -ffn, o»V. (») 
 
 wanting. 
 
 TWOIJU ^ 
 
 wanting. 
 
 TUlTi.V 
 
 (G. -ouvto?, &C.) 
 
J- rivre, 
 
 -oifxi, 
 
 -V, 
 
 '"*»> 
 
 -uv. 
 
 > TSTV<P-t, 
 
 -OlfM, 
 
 -u, 
 
 'ivon, 
 
 -Wff. 
 
 Tt;'\j/GV, 
 
 -<Xip.l 3 
 
 -u, 
 
 ~ca } 
 
 -a?. 
 
 rvvr-'s, 
 
 -OlfM, 
 
 -u, 
 
 -E?V, 
 
 -wv. 
 
 
 ~0t}M 9 
 
 
 -m, 
 
 - wv. 
 
 
 -o~p, 
 
 
 -6*>> 
 
 -wv. 
 
 6S GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Moods and Tenses. 
 Indie. Imper. Opt. Subj. Inf. Part. 
 
 Present rvicrta, 
 
 Imperf. hvitrov, 
 
 Perfect. rsrvQoc., 
 
 Pluperf. IrervQeiv, 
 
 1st Aor. hv\a, 
 
 2d Aor. srvKov, 
 
 ISt Flit. TV-^-U, 
 2d Fut. TU9T-S, 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present, I strike. 
 
 S. TUTTTCfl, Tl/Waft TUffTSi, 
 
 D. TUTTTETOy, TVTTTETOy, 
 
 P. TVTTTOjjLIV, TV TTTZTEf TVTTOVCt.. 
 
 Imperfect, I was striking. 
 
 S. ZTV7TT0V, 'irWTSS, ETV5FTE,. 
 
 D. IruBTsroy,. iTVTrrET^y,, 
 
 P. ETUTTTO/Jtsy,. ETt/TTTETE, ETUSTTOy. 
 
 Perfect, 7 /*ai?e struck. 
 
 S. tetvQx, rsrvQcx-s, rtTvtpz, 
 
 D. TET^^arov, TETH^aroy, 
 
 P. 7stv$u[azv, TSTv$a,T£, mutyeca-t. 
 
 Pluperfect, I /jarf struck, 
 
 S. iTSTU^sjy, ItetJ^ej^ Iteti/^ej, 
 
 D. IrETy^EiToy, ItsrvtyuTYiv, 
 
 P. ETErf'^EI^-fy, ETETU^EiTE, lTETl)^EtC-«y, 
 
 First Aorist, I struck. 
 
 D. Itv-^octqv, \rv-^a,TYjv, 
 
 P. ETU^ajUEVp ETU^TE, STV-J^OiV. 
 
VERB. 
 
 69 
 
 Second Aorist, I struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 stvtov, 
 
 twins, 
 
 STVTTt, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Iti/ttstov, 
 
 ETUTTETflV 
 
 P., 
 
 ITV TTOfASV, 
 
 ZTV 7T£T J, 
 
 BTWOV. 
 
 First Future, h shall strike. 
 
 S. Tli\|/W, Tv\u<;, TImJ/EJ, 
 
 D. Tl/\J/ETOV, TImJ/STOV, 
 
 P. rv^opiv, Tu'-^m, Tv-tytoim.. 
 
 Second Future, 1 shall strike,, 
 
 s. 
 
 ti/ttw, 
 
 r virus, 
 
 TWit, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 tvttzTtov, 
 
 ti»9teTtov 
 
 P. 
 
 rv7rov(ji.tv, 
 
 rvnuTS, 
 
 Ty7T0VCTi, 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 S. 
 
 D, 
 P. 
 
 Present, strike. 
 
 TV7TTST0Vf 
 TUTTT ETE, 
 
 TVTTTETW, 
 
 TV7T7S7UV, 
 
 TUTTTSTUCUV, 
 
 Perfect, have struck. 
 
 TtTvQsTQV, 
 
 mvQttE, 
 
 TiTvQsTU, 
 
 First Aorist, strike. 
 
 TV\|/GiTOV, 
 
 ZV-^OLTE, 
 
 TV-^ClTMj 
 
 7V-\>a.Tuaa,v , 
 
 s. 
 
 D» 
 
 P. 
 
 Second Aorist, strike. 
 
 tvtte, 
 
 
 TU7TETW, 
 
 tvttetov, 
 
 
 TU7rST<WV, 
 
 TV7TETE, 
 
 V 
 
 Tf7r§T&Jcray 
 
70 grammar of the greek language. 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 
 Present, J may be striking. 
 
 S. 7U7T7< 
 
 rOkjXlj TVTTTOIC, Tl/TTOt, 
 
 D. TUTTTOiTpy, TVTTToizY.V, 
 
 P. T-JlVTOi^lV, tVTTOm, TV7TT01SV. 
 
 Perfect, I may have been striking. 
 
 S. TETvQoifUj reni<pMG 3 Ttrvfyo:, 
 
 D. TSTvQoirov, tztvQoItw , 
 
 P. TErv$oijj!.£v, rervfpbtrs, tbtvQouv. 
 
 First Aorist, I may have struck *. 
 S. Tu'^ai/Aij rv-^ous, rv-l<M, 
 
 P. TU-^ai/XEV, Tv\|/aiTE, Tu\]«U£f. 
 
 Second Aorist, 7 waz/ have struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 TvVoijUi, 
 
 TuVoif, 
 
 TV5T0*, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 Tl/ 7T0tT0y, 
 
 rVKOlTYiV, 
 
 P. 
 
 TUTOJUfy, 
 
 TUTTOtTf, 
 
 TV1TQIEV. 
 
 
 First Future, I may hereafter strike. 
 
 S. TV-^OlfJU, rJ\J/OiC, T'J\J/Oi, 
 
 D. Tt/\pOiTOV, TU-^iT*?^ 
 
 P. rj-^otjusy, TU-kJ/OtTf, Ty%J/Oify. 
 
 Second Future, I maz/ hereafter strike. 
 
 S. TVffo7jJ.t, 
 
 D. 
 
 P. Ti/To?/usy, 
 
 * The /Eolic form of this Tense is frequently used, particularly 
 by the Attics, in the second and third person singular, and in the 
 third plural. 
 
 S. Tv-^eia, Ti5>J/£/ay, tu-vJ/eje, 
 
 D. TvvJ/s/aTov, Tv^ttar-nVf 
 
 P. Tv-^tla/y.iv, rv^uarty rv-^siav. 
 
 rwzoic, 
 
 TVTTOl, 
 
 TU7ro?Toy, 
 
 tvtvoTtw, 
 
 tvttoTts, 
 
 TV7ro7sv. 
 
VERB. 71 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present, / should strike. 
 
 S. tvTTuij TyVrrf, tvVtvj, 
 
 J). TvwnroVj tvktyitov, 
 
 P. Tu'Trrajusv, rvKTviTs, rvicTwari. 
 
 Perfect, 7 should have been striking. 
 
 S. rnvQit)) tetJ(£*k, tetvQvi; 
 
 D. tetvQyitov, rsrvtymov, 
 
 P. TE.TV$U)(JI.SV, TETV^tJTE, r£TV$U<Tl. 
 
 First Aorist, I should have struck. 
 
 S. TU^W, TUvJ/*!?, Tl/sJ/*?, 
 
 P. TtAJ'WjlXEV, tJ\J^TE, Tl/'4/WO-t. 
 
 Second Aorist, I should have struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 TuVoj, 
 
 rijirys, 
 
 TVITYj, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 TVKVITOV;, 
 
 rvnnrov 
 
 P. 
 
 rvircopsv, 
 
 tuVjjte, 
 
 TVTTCtXn. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present, rvvtreit, to strike. 
 Perfect, rervQevou, to have been striking. 
 First Aorist, rv&U, to have struck. 
 Second Aorist, Tuffsiv, to have struck. 
 First Future, ru'-^av, to be going to strike. 
 Second Future, rvnsTv, to be going to strike. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present, striking. 
 
 rvirrovcroiy tutttov, 
 
 TUTTTOVTO?, TUTTTOtiVw?, TVKTQVTOq, &.C. 
 
72 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Perfect, who has been string. 
 
 G. TiTVtpQTOq, TZTvQviOd;, T£TU@6T0J. 
 
 First Aorist, Having struck. 
 
 Second Aorist, having struck. 
 
 N. tustwV, Tvirowra., tutovj 
 
 G. wzovTOc, TVirovarnq, tuttovtoj. 
 
 First Future, going to strike. 
 
 N. rv^m r rv-l'OVtTu, rv-^ov, 
 
 G. fv-^ovro;, TV^OVtTVC, 7V-l>0V~05. 
 
 Second Future, going to strike. 
 
 N. tukuiv, rwovtroc, TU7ro0v, 
 
 G. Ti>7rouvro;, Tvxovans, TU7royvrof, 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Moods and Tenses. 
 Indie. Imper. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part. 
 
 Pres. TvvTou.a.1, 1 , 
 
 -o;^v?v, -a/xa;, -E<ryat, -opivoc. 
 
 Perfect, tiiv^va, \ , . -jujuevo?,-^ju,evos, 'QQm, -u.fj.vjo;, 
 
 Imperf. ETUTrrc/xsy, 
 Perfect, rkvuuou] 1 , . 
 Pluperf.?TET'j/x/x?iv, J T ' 
 
 lSt AOr. ETV!?>G»?V, Tl/$9»lTi, -E**)V, -W, 
 
 2d Aor. irvvw, T\nr-v\Qi } 
 
 IstFut. Tv(p9ria--o[j.oa } 'Oipviv, -EcrSat, -o/aewCj 
 
 2d Fut. TUTnjV-o/xat, -oi/jLYiv, -EcrQa,i, -o/u,e»o,-j 
 
 P.p.Fut.TETu-^-o/xat, -ot'/zjjy, -fa-Sat, -o//.syo;. 
 
 •»vai, 
 
To face p. 72. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Perfect, 
 
 ctive. 
 
 Sing. tu'ttI 
 
 -0{U.O? at ) ft -VTUl 
 Plur. -o/xEp^h -uvroti 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 TV7rTE<TVCCl 
 
 Sing. Itvti 
 
 Dual. -6^ 
 Plur. -6pi 
 
 Plus- 
 quam 
 perf. 
 
 Aor. 1 
 Aor. 2 
 
 Fut. 1. 
 Fut. 2. 
 Fut. 3. 
 
 -VjujueSov, ? 
 
 Sing, -jua ""« 
 Dual.-jt*E<J r -« 
 Plur. -us «« 
 
 ETETfjLtjLfHyj 
 U|UjUE0OV, 
 
 Sing. -J 
 Dual.-^E 
 PJur. -jue 
 
 rvirviv 
 
 Sing. -»jy»fc -j 
 
 Dual. ? T0V > -fro* 
 
 Plur. -jiJ 7 ^ -®o-t 
 
 y7T>5O-0/xd n g' 
 
 TVTTTO^Eyoj, -£V»7_, 
 
 TETU(Z)9«i 
 
 T£TV[A,[A,£yo$, -n, -OV 
 
 rvVVr,vcci 
 
 TV7TY)V0U 
 
 TV 
 
 fe S -iv. 
 
 rvQ&no-so-Qui 
 
 TVirr.crso-Qou 
 
 TETU-vJ, 
 
 1 , 
 
 omvoq 
 
 OV. 
 

 
 Synoptical View of the Passive 
 
 Voice. 
 
 
 To/actp. 72. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Conjunctive. 
 
 Infinitive, 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Presen 
 
 Sing. TuVvo/xat, ' I am struck.' 
 
 -opai, (-mi) ->,, -eteu 
 
 Dual.-OjLtEGoV, -EO-8&V, -EtrSoV 
 
 Plur. -ipdu, -eet9e, -rarai 
 
 Sing. («,) ..„ -eVS^ 
 Dual. - !0 -9o», -,V6«» 
 Plur.-i.r8,, -iVk™, 
 
 Sing, sip,,, -„„, -„„„ 
 Dual. -oijisSov, -oitrScre, -o!o-8n» 
 Plur. -oi>s9a, -ow8i, - 01 »to 
 
 Sing, -o>i*a(, (-tiai) », -«rai 
 
 Dual.-u f »i8o» ) -„r8oi, -n<r9ov 
 Plur. -Sfn8«, -»<78e, -o»r«. 
 
 **"*" 
 
 T ":r°" ■■'""• 
 
 Imperf 
 
 Sing. hvmojjLnv, 'I was struck.' 
 
 Dual. -op9o», -Krflov, -eo-9o» 
 Plur. -0>i8a, -«r8t, -euro 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 TETt/jU/Xat, -Uj/Ki, •lUTTOJi 
 -t/fxp.E0OS, -U$0£, -VjJ.[XEVOt tlvi 
 
 Sing, -ju«(, -o-«(, -Tat 
 
 Dual. -/xEeovHC-^M-M-rM 
 
 Plur. -^-^(-^e) -, T «i 
 
 tiVu+o, Tiru'lpSs 
 te'ti/$9e, TETu'tpQwcrav) 
 
 Sing. -<™. -8» (-rf u ) 
 
 -8ov (-rfov) -9»» 
 
 (-E7M 
 
 . -8s (-o-8e) -9o<ra> 
 
 (-treatra,) 
 
 Sri,, il'w, ,h 
 TETUjU^Eyw, -a, -w 
 
 TETU^/XEyw, -a, -U 
 
 r£Tu'?9ai 
 
 
 Plus- 
 quara 
 pert. 
 
 £T5TVjLtp.t]y J -U^O, -U7TTO 
 
 -Vfifj,s9ov f -i^Soy, -uV0»jv 
 -vpfAtQu, -vfflt, rsTV(j,fj.zvoi v><rav 
 5ing. -priv -co, -to 
 Dual.-^E0ovflov,(-fffloy)-So»f-<rfiiv) 
 
 Plur. -^e9«, -9f (-fffl e )-»To 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Aor. 1. 
 Aor. 2. 
 
 Dual. -wtovj -»]V*ii' 
 Plur. .„,«», :„„, -w«» 
 
 r«„fc 
 
 Sing, -nn («9s) -b'™ 
 
 -jite -))TW(7aV 
 
 Sing, -itm, -<n-„ -t'n 
 Dual. -lirnov, -siflTfly 
 
 Sing. -2, -fc, -j 
 Dual -jiov, -Jr., 
 Plur. -2^, -,-t., -Set, 
 
 rfi«. 
 
 T»?fc.'s ) -s;t,-Er<r«, 
 
 Flit 1. 
 
 Fut. 2. 
 Fut. 3. 
 
 -'U7rw-0|LtK( >as the present. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 ™nwoi/Mv > as the present. 
 titvMw J 
 
 wanting. 
 
 rUpSnWfcu 
 Tun-»!(rf<r9«( 
 
 
VERB. 73 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present, J am struck. 
 
 S. TV'rrofxaif rvirrri, tvvctitou , 
 
 D. TV7?TQfj.tQov, TV7TTio-9ov, tvktvtQoi, 
 
 P. TUTTTo'jixsOa^ rvTTTtarQt, rwxtovreu. 
 
 Imperfect, I was in the situation, or custom, of being struck. 
 
 S. IrvvTOfjinv, itvtttov, Irvifteto, 
 
 D. IrvTtro^oi, Itvtttio-Qov, tTVirrso-Qivr, 
 
 P. IrvTcrSfji.iQa.j etuVts<t0e, ItvVtovto. 
 
 Perfect, I toe 6een struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 rETVfJ.IJ.17A, 
 
 TiTV^Ctl, 
 
 TiTVXTVA, 
 
 D. 
 
 TSTVfJ.fJ.i9oi, 
 
 TiTV<p9oV, 
 
 TBTvQQov, 
 
 P. 
 
 TZTVfJ.fJ.iQa,, 
 
 TiTVtpQt, 
 
 TiTVfJfJ.i))Qi ilui 
 
 Pluperfect, I had been struck. 
 
 S. iTiTVfJLfxnV, IreTV-^O, ITiTVTTO, 
 
 D. lTiTVfJ.fJ.lQot, lTZTV<pQoi>, ItITvQk/VV, 
 
 P. iTiTVfj.fj.i9a,, tTiTvtyQe, TiTV fj.fxiva riaccr. 
 
 First Aorist, I was struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 ltv<P$n>, 
 
 ETU00JJ?, 
 
 IrvQQri, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 tTvtyQriTov, 
 
 iTvtpQyirr.y, 
 
 P. 
 
 ETl^Stt/AEJ'j 
 
 ItvQQkTS, 
 
 irvQQriO-av. 
 
 
 Second Aorist, Z was j 
 
 truck. 
 
 S. 
 
 ETtiTrnv, 
 
 ETVTnjf, 
 
 tTvxn, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ETtTrnToy, 
 
 \TV7tr\TV\V , 
 
 P. 
 
 ETOTT^E?, 
 
 ETWUTfj 
 
 IrvTrr^oiv. 
 
 First Future, I shall be struck. 
 
 S. rv$Qr,g-ofjiMi , TU$0n'or»i, TV$Qr,(r?Ta.i, 
 
 D. Tf^9»)crojuis0ov, Tu!p9ti<7£cr9o)/, TU^SwwQo*, 
 
 P. Ti/£0?i<rop.£9a, Tn^0T)<rEo*0E, rv<t&ri<rovT<z.i* 
 H 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Second Future, I shall be struck. 
 
 S. TVTTY.c-ofAyA, rwrrio-rf, ivtcyktctui, 
 
 J). TU7r>icrOjU.=9ov, TUTTJiiTjcrSoy, TUTrnVso-Sov, 
 
 P. Ti/7T>jc70jU;£a, rwrKreo-Qs, TWrr.G-OVTCCl. 
 
 Pauio-post-Future, I am on the point of being struck. 
 
 S. TirV-lsOfAOCl, TETU'4/*?., T£Tt/\J/STai, 
 
 D. T£Tu4-0/XsSoV, TSTU^EcOoy, T£tJ\J,SO-9ov, 
 
 P. 717V-\>6^0C, mV-^ZO-QE, 7Z7V-^0V70U. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present, be struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 riiffTov, rwttEvQu, 
 
 TUTTTecrSf, TurriVSwcra) 
 
 
 Perfect, have been struck. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 
 
 First Aorist, be struck. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 7V$Q*lTOV, 7v(pr]^7U!V } 
 
 
 Second Aorist, be struck. 
 
 S. 
 
 7V7rr,9i, 7VRY[7U, 
 
 D. 
 
 7V7VYi70)l, 7V7TYI7Uy 3 
 
 P. 
 
 Ti/TrrTj, 7W7rw7uara.9. 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 Present, I may be struck. 
 
 h. TfTTTOi^VJV, T'J7TTOiO, 7V7T70k70, 
 
 D. TUTTWjUeSoV, Tl/TTTOIO-Goi', TUTZTOiC'Gttl', 
 
 P. TUTTOi/XfQa, Tl/TTTOiO-S?, tJtTTOIVTO. 
 
 * For Tv(p9r,9i, two successive syllables of which would begin 
 with an aspirate. 
 
VERB. 75 
 
 Perfect, / may have been struck, 
 
 S. rnvjj.iJi.zvoi; «*jv, eV*jj, uri, 
 
 D. TEry/u-juEvw, E*7rroy, tlwTnv, 
 
 P. TfTfjot/xEyot tinfxtv, tlnrt, iirio-xv*. 
 
 First Aorist, J may toe feeera struck. 
 
 S, TU$9ei»jy, Tf <?50E**3?. tu^9e*»j, 
 
 D. Ty^EiJJTOy, TV^9£i»V»jy, 
 
 P. TU^9Ei»1/AEy, Ty<?>9s*>5TE, 1V^lir\(T0(.V. 
 
 Second Aorist, 1 may have been struck. 
 
 S. rvirslnv, ww tins, rvvsin, 
 
 D. TVWEirjToy, TyTTEHfngv, 
 
 TWiirilAiV, TUTTEiJlTE, TVTTtlviffOlV . 
 
 P 
 
 First Future, J may Z>e struck hereafter. 
 
 S. TU^QnGrOijOlHV, ?V§Qri<TOkO, TU^9*jVoiTO, 
 
 D. TW?>S>9cro*|w.E9ov, Ty$9»jVo*0-0oy, rvtpQrxroia-Qriv, 
 
 P. TvfyQricroifji.sQct, *ry<£>9jia-ot<70s, TV$Qri<j-oiVTO. 
 
 Second Future, J may 6e sfrwcA; hereafter. 
 
 S. twicno-olpw, TfTzwoio, TUTTviVotTG, 
 
 D. TU9r>j<roi/xE9oy, TuW<rcuo-0oy, Ty7r»<roicr9r]y, 
 
 P. TyT*ic7o*/aE9«, rvToia-oL^s, rwno'oivro. 
 
 Paulo-post-Future, i may &e on the point of being struck. 
 
 S. TtTV-^oi^riv, TETy'4.o;o, TETy^oiro, 
 
 D. TETy\J/o<jUE9oy, T£Ty'4/Oi<r9oy, TETy4/©i<79>?y, 
 
 P. TETy-vJ'ofyl^a, TETy^OKrSf, TEry-^o'yTo. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present, I should be struck. 
 S. ryVrw/xat, tuVt»?, TyVr»iTa*, 
 
 D. TyTrTw/usSoy, Ty'wT»jo"9oy, TvitrrKrQov f 
 
 P. ruTeTUjxsQix, , tvxtvktQe, rvwruvrcu. 
 
 * The more common form is the Attic contraction dr.ov, iljww 5 
 tJ^tfy, sir*, eIex, 
 
76 GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Perfect, 7 might have been struck. 
 
 S. TETU/X/AHVO; J, jjC, y, 
 
 First Aorist, I should have been struck. 
 
 S. tvQQu, rvQQyc, rv(p9v, 
 
 IX rutpQr)Toy, Ti»#9>?Toy, 
 
 P. Tt^a/xEy, TU@0iire, ti/$§o;g-*. 
 
 Second Aorist, I should have been struck. 
 
 S. TW7TV, TU5T*Tj, TU7TT7, 
 
 IX TU7rr5Toy, Tfcnrroy, 
 
 P. T^7ro;jLl£V, TU7T»iTf, IVTruTl. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present, rvvrs<rQeu, to be struck. 
 
 Perfect, tetvQQou, to have been struck. 
 
 First Aorist, rupQ^yat, <o /wee been struck. 
 
 Second Aorist, rviniveu, £o feave feerc struck. 
 
 First Future, Tu$9n'ow6a*, to 6e goin^ to be struck. 
 
 Second Future, TUTmVso-Oai, £o 6e going to be struck. 
 
 P. p. Future, tnvfaaQcu, to be on the point of being struck. 
 
 Participles. 
 Present, being struck. 
 
 N. zvz'rofjLivo;, tuttto^svyi, TV^ro/AMOv, 
 
 G. TV7TT0y.ZV0V, TV^tjOfJ^tlfSj TUTTTOjLtiyoy, &C 
 
 Perfect, having been struck. 
 
 N. T£t&/Xjt*lv6j, TSTV^fXiVV, TlTVfJ.[J.SVOy, 
 
 G. T^VjXjX'.VOV, TETUp.jU.syT}?, TSTt^|U.EyOl/. 
 
 First Aorist, having been struck. 
 G. Ty^flsVrof, rvQQsicrw, TU^GfVroc. 
 
Synoptical View of the Middle Voice. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Conjunctive. 
 
 .nnnitive 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Aor. 1. 
 
 Sillg. -ttlXJIV, (-GU70, ~Uo) -U, -«T0 
 
 Dual, a^.flo., .«o-9ov, -ao-9«» 
 Hlur. ci>9«, -at*, -a»To 
 
 Sing. -ai, -acf9u 
 
 Dual. -Kffflov, -ao-9i»» 
 Plur. -«o-6e, -i.a§uvm 
 
 Sing. -a.Vw, -aio, -*.to 
 Dual. -aifiAm.-auim, -«.V9w 
 
 Sing. -up»i, (-tio-ai, -noti) -b, -iiTai 
 Dual. -upiOw, -ikt9o», -ti<r9>jv 
 
 Ti/'+BffSai 
 
 ™^i»s ( 
 
 Aor. 2. 
 
 it proceeds exactly like the 
 imperf. pass. 
 
 ™°\-™, 4) 
 
 as in the present of the passive. 
 
 r^ 
 
 — 
 
 Fut. 1, 
 
 — &c. like the pres- pass. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 as the opt. pres. pass. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 T u+ W e«. 
 
 Tu4«/<iro(i 
 
 Fut. 2. 
 
 Sing. -„*>,, -?( t r) -et™ 
 
 Dlial.-ov>s8t,», -tVo-6o», -ritrSov 
 Plur. -oujutfla, -£7(t9£, -oyirai 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Dual, -oijitfcw, -37<r9o», -o7cr9o» 
 
 Plur. -of^ ( 9«, -oiVSs, -„r»™ 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Timfe**! 
 
 ** 
 
grammar op the greek language. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 First Aorist, 1 struck myself, 
 
 S. Irv-^ocfxnv, iTt/\|/W, Irv-^aro, 
 
 D. Itu4/o.ju.e9ov, ETU\l/«cr9ov, \rv\'xa^r l i , 
 
 P. iTv\a.^a, i £Ti/^acr0E, , Irv^avro, 
 
 Second Future, I shall strike myself. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 rvxuo-Qov, 
 
 
 P. 
 
 TVTOVfJ.iQc&j 
 
 TVTretcrQt, 
 
 TVTTOVYTCtl 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 First Aorist, strike thyself. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 rv'^at, 
 
 TUvJ/acrOw, 
 
 TU\^a<70OV, 
 
 Ti/^a-a-Oajy, 
 
 Tu'\J/acr9e, 
 
 Ty4/ac"Swc7 , ay 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 First Aorist, I may /iaue struck myself. 
 
 s. 
 
 Tu4-at|XT1V, 
 
 ry'^aio, 
 
 TU^atTO, 
 
 D. 
 
 Tu4.aijusQov, 
 
 Tu4/aia"9ov, 
 
 TU^a/uSriv 
 
 P. 
 
 Tf-^«('lX£9fi6, 
 
 TU\J,ata-9e, 
 
 tv^ouvto. 
 
 AUGMENT. 
 
 The Augment serves to prevent ambiguity : else the 
 Imperfect rwrtjs would be confounded with the Imperative, 
 and the First Aorist tv-\,o,<; with the Participle. 
 
 i 
 
 Of the Nine Tenses, 
 
 Three receive an Augment, continued through all the 
 Moods : — the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo-post-Future. 
 
VERA— AUGMENT. 79 
 
 Three receive an Augment in the Indicative only : — the 
 Imperfect, and the Two Aorists*. 
 
 Three receive no Augment : the Present, and the Two 
 Futures. 
 
 There are Two Augments ; the Syllabic, when the verb 
 begins with a Consonant j and the Temporal, when the verb 
 begins with a Vowel. 
 
 The Syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the 
 word ; the Temporal, because it increases the time or 
 quantity of the syllable. 
 
 The Syllabic Augment is s prefixed to the Imperfect and 
 the Aorists, as etutttov, irv-^x, 'irvirbi. 
 
 When it is continued, the initial Consonant of the Verb 
 is repeated, as lira^a. — This repetition of the initial conso- 
 sonant in the continued Augment is called Reduplication^. 
 
 If the Verb begins with a Vowel, the Temporal Aug- 
 ment is continued. 
 
 If the initial Consonant is an Aspirate, it must be 
 changed into the corresponding soft one, as §vu, tsQvxm ; 
 because an Aspirate Consonant beginning two successive 
 syllables, as $s9uxa, would produce a harshness, which 
 the Greeks generally avoid. 
 
 The Temporal Augment changes 
 
 a into n, as otyu, riyov. 
 
 £ into n, as \\kI?w, nXnttyv. 
 
 V into i, as i^avm, ixctvov. 
 
 o into a, as lira.fy, uttoc^ov. 
 
 v into -J, as v(3plty, Ufigityv. 
 
 cu into t\, as ou^u, rgov 
 
 ecv into *iv, as aufavw, nv^avov. 
 
 tv into *ju, as st/'x&juca, Yiv^6fj.^v. 
 
 o* into co, as oIkI^u, Zufyv. 
 
 * "Eirw continues the Augment of the Aorists, uv» and uvov. 
 The latter is more usual. 
 
 f When the Verb begins with a double letter, with a joined to 
 . Mute, or with 7», no Reduplication takes place, but the Syllabic 
 Augment is continued. Such also is the case with a Verb begin- 
 ning with p, when p is doubled in the Augment; except in poetry, 
 where p is sometimes single. So also faatrrai, ypvyoptu, S»a<yXv£», 
 $\£id. KccQapl^u, xTe/vw, npo<nrxTTa\ivu, irnpou, vrloeu, ttrs'iw, VTvoca. 
 Krao/xai makes ix-m^ou and xum^ai, 
 
80 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 s is in some verbs changed into a, as I'^w, J^oy. So 
 also: 
 
 E(X«, 
 
 t\i<r<ru, 
 
 ETTO/Utat, 
 
 Ipf'w, 
 
 egw, 
 
 iXku. 
 
 IpydZpfjt.oMj 
 
 EO-Ttf'xW, 
 
 Ifcj 
 
 sXXEW, 
 
 Epsw, 
 
 EO-TitXW,. 
 
 IQify, 
 
 iXxt/w, 
 
 Ep^W, 
 
 bc u > 
 
 thus, 
 
 E7TW, 
 
 Ipwv'^w, 
 
 E». 
 
 so is changed into ew, as lopTolfy, lupTctfyv. 
 
 Verbs compounded with Prepositions take the Augment 
 between the Preposition and the Verb, as npo<rfix\\w, Trpoc- 
 
 sfioiXKov. 
 
 Some Compound Verbs, which retain the same mean- 
 ing as those from which they are compounded, are con- 
 considered as Simple, and take the Augment in the be- 
 ginning. 
 
 Some take an Augment both before and after the Pre- 
 position, as avEp^o/xai, n'yEt^o^y 5 avopOo'w, wvwpQoov. 
 
 Some take it either before or after, as xmQivSoj, holQwSov 
 
 Or KOt&Yivoov j TrpoSu^oUjuat, ECrpoSu/xoi/'jU^y or wpovQv y.ovpv)y j &C. 
 
 Verbs compounded with tv and Svs, if they are suscep- 
 tible of the temporal Augment, take it in the same man- 
 ner with those compounded of Prepositions, as wopKtv, 
 
 tVvpKSOV. 
 
 A Preposition in composition before a Vowel loses the 
 final Vowel, as kniyu from oWo and e^w. 
 
 If, after this elision, the Preposition comes before an 
 Aspirate, it changes its soft into an Aspirate, as ktyoupiu 
 from aero and cclpsu. 
 
 'Ex in composition becomes \\ before a Vowel, as {xQcpv, 
 
 'Ey and ervv 3 which change the v before a Consonant,, re- 
 sume it before a Vowel, as l^psm, hi^mr. 
 
 2t/\ sometimes drops the v, as o-i>£W«. 
 
 £ is doubled after a Vowel, as ha,$m. 
 
 Many Verbs have no Augment 5 namely, those begin- 
 ning with Vowels or Diphthongs not mentioned in the 
 rule j many beginning in oi, particularly those compound- 
 ed with oia.%, olos, oZkos, oho? and o"uvo$; also those in «w, 
 
 odd), a,Y>ol£p[AOCl, CCY)Qs<T<7U, EpJIxnVEVW, E^piCXW. But 6?0EW, UYtOfACtt, 
 
 take the Syllabic Augment, as sWa, eW0»iv. 
 
 i 
 
VERB — FORMATION OF TENSES. 81 
 
 These have no Syllabic Augment in the dialogue of 
 Tragedy j x.oc,Qe£p[x<x,i, kkQsvSu, xa0 ripen, crmvha* 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES 
 
 Of the Active Voice, 
 
 Present P.— Present M. 
 
 r c C Imperfect P. 
 Imperfect | Im j; erfectM 
 
 f Pluperfect. 
 
 \ Perfect/ perfp /SX^Fta 
 \ I llAor.P.- 
 
 8i 1 Future^ ^ \l Aor.P.-lFut.P. 
 
 / 1 Aor. 1 Aor. M. 
 
 Fut. M. 
 '2 Aor. P.— 2 Fut. P. 
 
 fi Aor. F — 
 . J 2 Aor. M. 
 ?lst S 2 Fut. 
 
 IPerf, M.~ 
 
 2Aorist. .^FutM. 
 
 Plup. M. 
 
 The Imperfect 
 
 is formed from the Present, by prefixing the Augment* 
 and changing u into ov, as tuVtw, stutttov. 
 
 The First Future. 
 
 This Tense is really formed by the insertion of a- before 
 
 a>, as Xzlfiw, XtiPvw or Xu-^u ; XsI'ttv, Xiiitcsa or Xu\w } Xtyu, 
 Xsycru) or xi\u ; tIu, ri<ru. To soften the pronunciation, a 
 Consonant is frequently dropped ; as a£w, arw ; tyotfju, 
 tydo-u, &c. For the same reason the <r is omitted after a 
 Liquid j but it was formerly retained, and vepw made v?/x<r«. 
 We still find xsXo-a* from kbXo, reXerov from teXw, opo-w from 
 op, particularly in the Doric dialect*. 
 
 * This analogy extends, in some measure, to the Latin. The 
 Perfect of the Third Conjugation is formed from the Present by 
 
82 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Or the First Future may be considered as being formed 
 from the Present, by changing the last syllable, in the 
 First Conjugation into nJ/w, as tw'wb, tu\J,m$ in the Second 
 into f w, as Xiyw, Xe'| w ; in the Third into <rw, as rfo 9 rlo-u ; 
 in the Fourth, by circumflexing the last syllable, and 
 shortening the penultima, as 4/aXXw, -^aXw. 
 
 Some Verbs of the Second and Third Conjugation 
 make f w and <ru : ap:ra£w, /3»£o;, fiftfp, &c. The former is 
 the Doric form. 
 
 Some Verbs take y before f j xXa£w, /tXayf w, from xXayyw 5 
 ?rXa£w, TrXayfw, &e. 
 
 Verbs in aw, w, and ow, change a and e into »i, and 
 
 into w, as Ti^uaw, rifxtiaru j (fiXsw, <PiX"n<ru j ^Xow, $nXwo"W. 
 The following are excepted j 
 
 1. Verbs in aw preceded by s or * ; Verbs in Xaw and paw, 
 pure 5 with dityuu, dpaw, xXaw, ju,aw, vaw, TTETaw, CTraw, $Xaw. 
 
 2. These in ew : — cUew, a^isw, apxEw, ew, £e'w, xew, ycaiw,. 
 
 vukw, fsw, oXe'w, c-rops'w, teXe'w, rpew 5 and Verbs, which form 
 others in yuw, wjut and cnc&>. 
 
 Some make e<tw and »icrw :— a^EO/xai, atysw, axso/xai, c&Xew, 
 »X$ew, a^so/xca, /S^ew, kyiosu, xo7rsw, xopsw, xotew, jua^EOjua*,. 
 
 O^EW, TToOeW, 9T0VEW, CTTfpEW, <PofSU f <£>pOVEW, %Wf E W . AsW makeS ^'(TW, 
 
 SzSekci. KaXsw makes xaXEcr*;, JtsxaX^xa, by Syncope xsxXwa. 
 The following make the First Future in euo-w : Sew, ttXe'w, 
 smw, vew, pfw, %ew. Ka/w and kXocIu) make aucw. 
 
 3. Verbs Primitive in ow ; apow, /Sow, ivew, o/xow, oyow ; 
 and Verbs, which form others in ww and o-xw. 
 
 Four Verbs change the Soft of the first syllable into an 
 Aspirate breathing : e%w, e|w 5 t^'%w, $pef« ; TpE^w, 3ps^w ; 
 
 TU<£w, SJ-vJ/W. 
 
 The Present of these Verbs should begin with an Aspi- 
 rate, thus e^w, Sps'^w, Sps^w, $J$» -, but as the Greeks sel- 
 
 changing into si, as scribo, scrih.si ; dico, dicsi or dixi ; Jigo, figsi 
 or fixi; demo, demsi; carpo, carpsi, &c. To avoid harshness a 
 letter is frequently left out, as parco, parti ; ludo, lusi, &c. The s 
 too is frequently omitted ; and sometimes in that case it is re- 
 sumed in the Supine, as scando, scandi t scansum ; verto, verti, 
 versum, &c. 
 
VERB — FORMATION OF TENSES. 
 
 83 
 
 dom suffer two aspirated syllables to come together, the 
 first is changed into a soft. That reason ceases to operate 
 in the Future, which ends in |w, and therefore resumes 
 the Aspirate in the first syllable. This is proved by the 
 Perfect, which in the Active is rerpe^», and not rsflpe^a, 
 but in the Passive TsQpa^px*. For the same reason %i| 
 makes Tpt^os m the G. — But no change is produced by the 
 pass, termination Qr>v, except in eteG^v, Itu'Shv; or by 6s, 
 hv 5 or if a consonant intervenes, as $eV0e, $«$9h'$. 
 
 The First Aorist 
 
 is formed from the First Future, by prefixing the Aug- 
 ment, and changing u into a, as tv\u, 'kv\et. 
 
 A doubtful Vowel in the penultima of the First Aorist 
 of the Fourth Conjugation is made long, at is changed 
 into v, and e into a, as xpivw, ExpZva 5 -^<u\u, 'i^Xot 5 fxsvu, 
 
 ZfJLElVO,. 
 
 If the penult, of the Pres. has at, that of the 1st Aor. in 
 the common Dialect has a, in the Attic, rj; as crn^Uu, 
 crnfACcvw, Icrvf/.ccvx, Attic Ivypwct. 
 
 E?7ra and tjveyxa are formed from the Present; w«, 
 E0>ixa, E<Wa from the Perfect. 
 
 o.xeo>, 
 
 aXsi/w, 
 
 •op the c of the Future : 
 
 
 *)JCEi«, 
 
 XEW, 
 
 EXSiO, 
 
 •nkeva,, 
 
 CTEl/w, 
 
 e (revet 
 
 I'jtrja, 
 
 ^B*J 
 
 E^fa. 
 
 The Perfect 
 is formed from the First Future, by prefixing the Conti- 
 nued Augment, and changing, in the 
 1st Conjugation, -^w into d?ot, as tv^u, rirvtyot ; 
 in the 2nd, |w into x«, as Xs'|;w, >h.ex* ; 
 in the 3d, o-w into xa, as t*Vw, riVix^ j 
 in the 4th, £ into xa, as 4,a\5, E^aXxa. 
 
 Verbs in /xw are formed from ju-ew, as ve'/aw, vsvspjxa, from 
 
 SE/LCSW, VEjUtVj'cTW. 
 
 Dissyllables in Xw, vw, pw change the e of the First Future 
 
 into a, as <rreXw 3 EcrraXxa. 
 
 Dissyllables in eivw, vm, and y*w drop the v, as xthw, ixraxa. 
 
84 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Pluperfect 
 
 is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing j to the Redupli- 
 cation, and changing a into siv, as rtrvQa., hzfutysiv. 
 
 The Pluperf. often drops the initial i in all voices, espe- 
 cially in the later Attic writers. 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Present, by prefixing the Augment, 
 changing u into ov, and shortening the penultima, as tu't- 
 ?u, Ztvttov. 
 
 The Penultima is shortened : 
 1. In Vowels, by the change of 
 
 * 
 
 ") 
 
 rXvfiw, 
 
 iXctfiov j 
 
 u 
 
 >into a, as< 
 
 I T$wyu), 
 
 srpayoy ' } 
 
 ay 
 
 J 
 
 \.7Ta,Vlt)j 
 
 S7TCC0V ' f 
 
 et 
 
 into *, as 
 
 Xd'TTV, 
 
 iXiXoi ; 
 
 EV 
 
 into u, as 
 
 Qzvyw, 
 
 ttyvyoi. 
 
 the 
 
 nx*Ww, to strike the body, makes tntoyov -, to strike 
 mind, sVXayoy. 
 
 In Dissyllables, however, which take the Temporal 
 Augment, the penultima necessarily remains long, as ay*, 
 tjyoy. So also where the penultima is long by position, as 
 -&ntX7ra», \^oc\7rov j [x<x>f7rru , £jj.apvTov. But in many of these 
 a transposition takes place to preserve the analogy : thus 
 vepflw makes in poetry sVp«0ov, &'pxw, etyaxov, &c. A resolu- 
 tion and a reduplication produce the same effect : thus 
 %oov is made 'iotSov ; nyov, wyctyov, &c. 
 
 In Dissyllables of the Fourth Conjugation, s and a are 
 changed into a, as $epu, E$apov; (rwupu, IWapoy*. — This also 
 takes place in some words beginning with a Mute and a 
 Liquid, as 7rAsxa>, ETrXajcov , jcXsVtw, skXolttov; SO o-rpE^w, scrrpa- 
 <po» 3 but /3xsV« and pxEy w are regular. 
 
 In Polysyllables of the Fourth Conjugation, » is changed 
 
 into £, as ayuaUf nyspov. 
 
 Tt'/Avw makes tra/xoi and *ti/ao». 
 
VERB — FORMATION OF TENSES. 85 
 
 2. In Consonants, by the omission of r, and of the last 
 of two liquids, as, tuWo;, etuttov ; \J/a/\A&>, 'i-^aXov. 
 
 Some Mutes are changed into others of the same order ; 
 thus, 
 
 
 
 '/3Xa.7nra', 
 
 s(3Xoi(3ov t 
 
 t into /5, 
 
 aS< KOCXVTTTU), 
 
 tKolXvfiov 
 
 
 V. XpUTTTW, 
 
 sxpv(3ov, 
 
 
 
 rityov, 
 
 
 J (BoiTCTU, 
 
 sftoctpov, 
 
 
 J SoCICTd}, 
 
 irutpov, 
 
 it into Q, 
 
 aS-^ piXTTTW, 
 
 £ppotCpo», 
 
 
 
 <rxa7rTw, 
 
 'iotoityov, 
 
 
 
 pi7TTW, 
 
 sppttyov, 
 
 
 
 ^dguVtw, 
 
 E$gV$OV. 
 
 X into y, 
 
 as • 
 
 L \vx^i 
 
 E<T[Jt.V<yOV , 
 
 E^/Uyoy. 
 
 Verbs in fw and cro-w of the Second Conjugation form the 
 Second Aorist in yov ; as vpolcro-oj, Trpaf &, IVpayov 5 some of 
 the Third form it in Sov, (ppafw, tyolo-u, E$pa$ov. 
 
 Verbs in au and ew change ecu and e&> into ov, as uvkoIu, 
 
 sfj.vx.ov ; ivpsa), st/pov. 
 
 The following have no Second Aorist : Polysyllables in 
 f« and crcrw ; Verbs in aw and ew after a Vowel 5 Verbs in 
 ow ; Polysyllables in awa, uy«, avw, suw, ovw, vu„ viv, ancj 
 many others. "Hkoov from axou'0 is poetical. 
 
 The Second Future 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping the Aug- 
 ment, and .changing ov into u circumflexed, as Wvirov, rvnu. 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 The Present 
 
 is formed from the Present Active, by changing u into 
 ojw«{, as rvTcr-u), rvirr-ofjiou. 
 
 The formation of the second person Sing, was originally 
 in io-ai, thus TV7CTOJJ.IXI, Eo-at, ETca. The Ionians dropped the 
 <r, and made it riimrsou. The Attics shortened it mtorvwru, 
 whteh the common language of Greece changed into rviervi. 
 
 1 
 
86 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Attic contraction had the advantage of distinguishing 
 the Indicative from the Subjunctive Mood 5 it was univer- 
 sally adopted in (3ovXu, oUi, o-\>u. 
 
 The same observation applies to other tenses. Thus in 
 the Imperfect eti/Vtectp became ItuVteo, and was afterwards 
 contracted into Itu'tttou. So rwicrbiao became Ti/Vroio ; 
 Itv'-^ckto, Itv^oco and Irv-^u. 
 
 Some verbs retain the original form, thus Qdyopai makes 
 <p«,ytxr<u. Thus also is formed the Passive of Verbs in p, 
 'i<T70i'iA<xi } 'Iptcc-ccu } riQi-fxai, riQs-crcu, &C. 
 
 The Imperfect 
 is formed from the Imperfect Active, by changing v into 
 
 (J.YIV, aS ETUTTTO-V, ItI/TTTO-jUTIV. 
 
 The Perfect 
 
 is formed from the Perfect Active, by changing, in the 1st 
 Conj. (pa. into ^at, as reiv-tya,, TETtz-jUjuca ; but Perfects in 
 Qa impure change it into juat, as TiTep-Qa, rerep-{ji.ou. 
 in the 2d, %a into yfj.a.1, as XeXi-xa, XiXe-yy.ai ; 
 in the 3d, x.a into c^oa, as irityoi-Ka., •7retya.-triJi.ca ; 
 in the 4th, x.a, into juca, as 'e\a,X-x.a,, e^aX-pat. 
 
 Verbs of the Third Conjugation in u pure, if the penul- 
 tima of the Perfect is long, change *« into ^oa, as vsfpixvmu, 
 •x-eQlXn-pu-i. — Except the following, which retain <r, nxovu, 
 
 S"pai/o>, xeXevu, KXeltti, jcpot/w, ira.iw, Krala, creiti}. 
 
 Some, whose penultima is short, change x.a. into y.ca, 
 
 apoti), sAaw, oew, &vw, Xvu, TTTaw. 
 
 The Perfect of most Verbs in atw, atvw, auw, ?*&>, ei/w, qw, 
 ovu, u, originally ended in jao», which was afterwards 
 changed into a- pea. Hence we find KiXevpoa and xixewpoa, 
 
 ywroc; and yvwo-Tos, &c. 
 
 Some Verbs shorten the long syllable of the Perfect Ac- 
 tive 1 as ¥e$ukoi, SeSopui. — On the same principle ev is 
 changed into v 5 thus xe^eux«, xe'x vcr l J - ai an( ^ ^x v H Ml '•> *** 
 
 tytvX a > '7re<Pvy[A,aA 5 crea-EVKCCf <Tecrv\i,ai ; TETEVp^a, rervyfxoa. 
 
 Dissyllables, whose first syllable has t^e, change e into a, 
 as TpiVw, rsrpE^a, TErpaja/xaj j but they resume it in the First 
 Aorist ETpE<pQtfv. 
 
 
VERB — FORMATION OF TENSES. 
 
 S7 
 
 Synoptical View of the formation of the Perf. Pass, in all 
 its Persons. 
 
 I. S. TETUjUjUai, 
 
 TETt^a*., 
 
 TEryrrat, 
 
 (forr£Ti;<P/xca, 
 
 TETV^crai, 
 
 tetv^tqw) 
 
 D. TETVfJLfJLEQoV, 
 
 TSTU^OoV, 
 
 TETU^Soy, 
 
 P. TETVl*[AlQoCj 
 
 tetu^Qe, 
 
 T£Ty ( a|U£yoi Eicr*. 
 
 II. S. Xthsyy-ou, 
 
 XE^sfai, 
 
 XeXeY.TO.1, 
 
 (for XsXBx^h 
 
 XEAE^crai, 
 
 XiXixjui) 
 
 D. XiXiy/Ji^oVf 
 
 ?\.s'X£pC0oy, 
 
 XiXixQov, 
 
 P. XtXiyp-cQcx,, 
 
 ^e'Tie^e, 
 
 XeXsypsvoi tuxl. 
 
 III. S. nlKzurpMi, 
 
 7rE7TEi(7at, 
 
 (for 7TE7rc-j(Ta-at) 
 
 iriKiuncu, 
 
 D. TtiTiia-^ov, 
 
 ■7r£7r£i(r6oy, 
 
 WETrEKrQoV, 
 
 P. TrnTiltTpiQoc,, 
 
 KETEKtQe, 
 
 WET UCT {JS.SV01 e\(ti. 
 
 IV. S. 7T£(?)«jUJU,a{, 
 
 TTE^aycra*, 
 
 keQouitou, 
 
 (forTr^av/xai) 
 
 
 
 D. 7Ci(pa,^Sov , 
 
 STE^aySoy, 
 
 weQcwQov, 
 
 P. 7T£<P<»JU,jUeQcC, 
 
 9T£<pay0£, 
 
 TTEtyoipfAEvot tlcri. 
 
 The third person plural is formed from the third person 
 singular by inserting v before roti, as KUpirai, xexpivra*. 
 But when a consonant comes before rat, the insertion of v 
 would produce an inharmonious sound. Hence a peri- 
 phrasis is formed by the addition of the verb slp\ to the 
 Perfect Participle : thus tetv [xy.Evoi eI<t) for tetvxv7m. 
 
 When the Perfect Indicative ends in pou pure, the peri- 
 phrasis of the Participle with sljA does not take place in 
 the Optative and Subjunctive ; but jua; in the Optative is 
 changed into [xw, apcu in al^nv ; and in the Subjunctive 
 fxou with the preceding vowel into w/x«t, as Indie. tetj^p**, 
 
 Opt. TETijtAfl'jUnV, Subj. T£T;jU.W|W,at. 
 
 The Ionic dialect forms the 3d pers. plur. in the Ind. 
 and Opt. by changing v into a, the soft into the aspirate 
 mute, and n into e j as TErvtyctroii, XeXex^tcc^ eI^eocxou, la-xd- 
 Xocto, upfjLExro, kyolaro, &c. So, by the change of a- into $, 
 
 •7rs<Ppa$a,Tai. 
 
 The 2d Person Imperative is formed by changing ai of 
 the Second Person Indie, into o, as xixv^-cu, teVu^-o; the 
 3d Person is formed by changing e of the 2d Person PI. 
 Indie, into w, as te'tuOO-s, t«tu00-». 
 
88 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Infinitive is formed by changing e of the 2d Person 
 Plural Indicative into a», as rervQQ-t, reru^Q-at. 
 
 The Pluperfect 
 
 is formed from the Perfect, by changing pxi into /-w, and 
 prefixing e to the Continued Augment, if there is a Redu- 
 plication, as rkvfJLfxoa, etetiy^v. 
 
 The Paulo-post-Future 
 
 is formed from the Second Person Singular of the Perfect, 
 by changing at, into opou, as riiv-^-cu, mv^-opai. 
 
 No verbs of the fourth Conjugation, or with the tempo- 
 ral augment, have this tense. 
 
 The First Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Third Person Singular of the Perfect, 
 by dropping the Reduplication, changing tui into 0>?y, and 
 the preceding Soft into an Aspirate Mute, as rervvrai, 
 
 Three Verbs assume <r, gppwrat, I pp'wcrSny ; jUEp^rca, IpwrStjy ; 
 TTcVx^rai, ewXwQ^v. But crso-wo-rai drops it, making lo-vQw. 
 In some Verbs the penultima is shortened : thus uQvpv- 
 
 rou makes cctpnfsQviv ; £up>iTai, gupE0»jy ', Isnsvr/Tow, E7rv)yE0>?v ; te0e*- 
 roa, ete'S^v. 
 
 In the Third Person Plural of the Aorists a syncope 
 often takes place j thus *)y£p0Ev for vy^vcrocv, Uoi^nQty for 
 
 EJtbo"jl/.19U?JO"«V. 
 
 The First Future 
 
 is formed from the First Aorist, by dropping the Augment, 
 and changing v into aropou, as irv$&w 9 Tu^O^Vojixat. 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by changing o* 
 into »5v, as Itvttov, Irvvrw. 
 
 No second Aorist passive occurs in <3W, Ouv, m* j or from 
 Verbs in u pure, except fxaov, l^v, Ipp'u'wy, ?<?>v>iy. 
 
VERB — FORMATION OF TENSES. 89 
 
 The Tragic Poets preferred the forms of the 1st Aorist ; 
 the writers of the new Comedy were more attached to the 
 smoother forms of the 2d Aorist. 
 
 The Second Future 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping the Aug- 
 ment, and changing •» into o-opat, as hvirnv, twrrvaopcu. 
 
 Middle Voice. 
 
 The Present and Imperfect 
 are the same as those of the Passive. 
 
 The Perfect 
 
 is formed from the 2d Aor. Active, by prefixing the Redu- 
 plication, and changing ov into a, as srv7rov } tirvrra. — 
 Hence those Verbs, which want the 2d Aor. Active, have 
 no Perfect Middle. 
 
 In Dissyllables, if the Second Aorist has « in the penul- 
 tima, from a Present in s or «, the Perfect Middle changes 
 it into o, as kxUu, tvXamov, ttew-Xox*. But from the Present 
 
 in rt OI' a», into n, as X*i0w, sXaQov, XeXtQcz. — ®a,XXw, zQctXor 
 makes rsQwAa j aud kXol^w, 'ly.Xa.yov, xsKXviya,. 
 
 If the Second Aorist has e in the penultima, the Perfect 
 Middle ehanges it into o, as tXsyov, xixoya,. 
 
 If the Second Aorist has » in the penultima, from a Pre- 
 sent in «, the Perfect Middle changes it into o*, as A, 
 t'^ov, otda. 
 
 Some retain also the diphthong of the Present : thus 
 
 Qtvyu, irityivya. and wetyvyci, 
 
 Etxw makes soixa, Witu eoXtco,, 'ipyw Eopya. 
 
 \A makes ^'Wa, to avoid the frequent repetition of 5 
 in the regular SsSoiSu ; so 9teVoju.$« for i&itoym& ; Xay^dvu 
 makes xixoyxa. 
 
 The Perf. Act. and Mid. of the same Verb are seldom 
 both in use. Indeed the Mid. may be considered as another 
 1 3 
 
90 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 form of the Act. as it has generally the same sense, and as 
 it sometimes assumes the termination of both, as xXsVrw, 
 kUXoQcc, and XE>cXo7r«. 
 
 The Pluperfect 
 
 is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing e, and changing 
 a into «v, as rsrvza, STerViruv. 
 
 When the Perfect Middle has the signification of the 
 Present, the Pluperfect has that of the Imperfect. 
 
 The First Aorist 
 is formed from the First Aorist Active, by adding pjy, as 
 
 The First Future 
 is formed from the First Future Active, by changing a into 
 
 In the 4th Conjugation it is circumflexed as in the Ac- 
 tive : thus -\scckw, ^aX-ovjj.ai : i. e. \J/aX=<rojuta*, Ion. -^aXio^ai , 
 Att. ^aXovpoct. 
 
 Many Middle Futures have an Active signification, and 
 are not used in the Active form, as fino-opxi, &c. 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by changing * 
 into y.nv, as 'irvTro-v, Irv7r6-[xr,y. 
 
 The Second Future 
 
 is formed from the Second Future Active, by changing £ 
 into ovfAOii, as tutt-w, rvTr-ovpou. 
 
 The following are formed in open ; — eXopeu, Qaycuca. 
 Trlofxcti, P'opcu and 'Aopca. 
 
 N. B. The annexed Synopsis gives a different view of 
 the formation of some of the Tenses. 
 

CONTRACTED VEKBS. 
 
 CONTRACTED VERBS. 
 
 91 
 
 Verbs in ow, ew, and o«, are contracted in the Present 
 and Imperfect Tenses. 
 
 Verbs in aw contract aw_, ao } and aov into w, as rijitaw, 
 
 Ttjuw ; Ti/^aoKcri, Ttjotwcn : — else into a,, as ■n'ji/.a?, t/jlics : — i is 
 
 subscribed, as Tipaoipi, ti^jxi, &c. 
 
 Verbs in sw contract ss into ft, and so into oy, as <pfof£, 
 <pl\u -, QiXsopsv, (PkXovfxiv : else they drop ?, as <PtXm 9 $*a£.— 
 Dissyllables in su are contracted in the Imperative and Infi- 
 nitive only. Thus we say ttaew, b-Xeojusv, and not 5taw, 
 
 7r\ovy.sv. 
 
 Verbs in ow contract o with a long vowel, into u, as 
 SnXou, &ja« : with a short vowel or ow, into ov, as &iAostf, 
 SyiXovtb : ^nAooyo-i, ^nXouVt : — else into o;,. as SrAoric;, <Wo7$. 
 In the Inf. ohv is contracted into ow. 
 
92 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 *3 ? ?'S 
 
 ? 8 
 
 o 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 8 
 
 < 
 
 ***** 
 
 j— /> ■ . 
 
 •s,«!a 
 
 •v 
 
 »«• '£*"? 
 
 *8 '5 
 
 '•"'a'* 
 
 
 ^vSno" 
 
 *" j? «r 
 
 ««* •» «r 
 
 
 v O Vo, N 
 
 *-8 vE v 
 
 
 
 
 8 3 § 
 
 
 
 
 
 'S-'S 'S 
 
 u» •* IU* 
 
 cji 
 
 ^ ^ »» 
 
 8 £ 
 
 j^ 
 
 -8 ^ 4 
 
 
 j r- /N — -\ 
 
 
 »> 
 
 •v »\ v 3 
 
 
 «£ ^ 3 
 
 v 8 v 3 
 
 
 8 3 
 
 
 hb * ~ * 
 
 J? *£ £ 
 8 Si 
 
 ^i-£ s i 
 
 
 
 
 CQ v 8 ^w ^o 
 
 •* «s 
 
 "> 1 Zi 
 
 
 a » s 
 
 8 3 § 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 •> »* »\ 
 
 
 
 23 *3 <3 
 
 
 5 f? 
 
 3 3 3" 
 
 § s 8 
 
 
 3. •< *< 
 
 It ^"^f 
 
 
 P ©-«5lS 
 
 
 
CONTRACTED VERBS, 
 
 93 
 
 a 
 
 b.! 
 
 ^8v£ 
 
 £ C £ 
 J3 5 o 
 
 
 8 2 
 
 
 v 3 v2 v§ 
 
 
 <3>. 
 
 
 V 8 s£ s 
 
 
 r «\ « 
 
 JJ VA Ul 
 
 *a-3 '3 
 
 J3 
 
 
 w 
 > 
 
 H 
 
 »-» 
 W 
 S3 
 </5 
 
 'Sisia 1 
 
 5 o- 
 
 0, 
 
 frf 
 
 
 * 8 8 
 
 K ^ b 
 
 if 8 2 
 
 5 b b 
 
 ■^£vl 
 
 ? ? ? 
 
 3-^ * 
 
 i. << f< 
 
 *• e-^ 
 
 t- o-<^> 
 
 3-3 £ 
 
94 
 
 GRAMMAR OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 o 
 > 
 
 Sri 
 
 ft 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 
 < 
 
 AKDeORJ) 
 
 *-3 -i 
 
 H ©-^o 
 
CONTRACTED VERBS. 
 
 95 
 
 8 
 b 
 
 i 
 
 Ov 
 
 3.«< r< 
 
96 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 VERBS in MI. 
 
 The most striking difference between Verbs in MI and 
 Verbs in Q is in the 1st and 3d person Sing. Pres. Indie, 
 and the 2d person Sing. Imperative. 
 
 Verbs in p are formed from Verbs of the Third Conju- 
 gation in aw, zu, ou, and vu. 
 
 1. By prefixing the Reduplication with *. — If the Verb 
 begins with a Vowel, with nr or a-r, I aspirate only is pre- 
 fixed, as ew, *n/xt ; Trraw, Wrv^^ &c. : this is called the Im- 
 proper Reduplication. — The Reduplication takes place in 
 the Present and Imperfect only. 
 
 2. By changing a into jm. 
 
 3. By lengthening the penultima. 
 
 Thus from a-rdu is formed iVrrj/xt ; 
 from 0£a>, t*9ij/a* j 
 
 from doia, diSujju j 
 
 frOm dUKVVdl, OBlKVVfAi, 
 
 Verbs in p have only three tenses of that form : the 
 Present, Imperfect, and Second Aorist. They take the 
 other Tenses from Verbs in u; thus ^'^p makes $u<rw, 
 JeJwx«, from Sou. 
 
 Verbs in p have no 2d Future, 2d Aorist Passive, or 
 Perfect Middle. 
 
 The form in p is Old Attic and Ionic; hence a. is added 
 to the 3d Person Sing, of the Present. 
 
 Verbs in up have neither Reduplication, Second Aorist, 
 unless it is the same as the Imperfect, nor Optative or Sub- 
 junctive Moods. 
 
 The former occurs also to $««, $«/« j $iiu, Svpt, &c. and 
 those which are formed from trisyllables, as xpspaw, xpE/*v*ip. 
 
 The Poets change many Verbs in a into p j as ysJia'a, 
 
 ysXn^i ; e%w, ixnpi ; XTa'w, xT*>p j oysw, oy»jp ; opaw, optip ; 
 
VERBS in fU. 
 
 97 
 
 1 Aor. 
 
 2d Aor 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Moods and Tenses, 
 
 
 Ind. Imper. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 
 f'icTT-vifAi, -a9t, 
 
 -atrjy, 
 
 -W, 
 
 -a'yat, 
 
 -a?, 
 
 Presents 
 
 1 TJ0-HJUI, -ETt, 
 1 did-Wp, -O0t, 
 
 -Etrjy, 
 -ot?iy, 
 
 -5,. 
 
 -EVat, 
 -QVOU, 
 
 
 
 Lc£JXy-UjUt, -l/0», 
 
 
 
 -UVat, 
 
 -»>. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Perfect < I" 
 Plup. 
 
 the rest like the Present. 
 
 C icrrocK-u, 
 
 klK-CC, 
 
 W-a, 
 
 ETTaJCElV. 
 
 I E0»?xa, 
 j Eowxa, 
 
 "6» 
 
 -E, 
 
 -s, 
 
 ETE0E<X£iV. 
 <TTW<T-OV t 
 
 Qw-ov, 
 
 dWK-OVf 
 
 -OtjUi, -W 
 
 -otp, -u, 
 
 Ed£dWX£ty. eoeoe/^eiv 
 
 -atp, -w, 
 
 -at/xt, -<y, 
 
 -at/xt, -w 
 
 -CtlfJUy -w 
 
 O-TCLinV, CTTl 
 
 0£t?iy, Sal, 
 
 dotrjy, da; 
 
 -£yat 3 
 -syat, 
 -Evai, 
 -Eyat, 
 
 -at, 
 -at, 
 -at, 
 -at, 
 
 -w\, 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 -0ff. 
 
 -as, 
 
 -a?, 
 
 (TTflvat, crracj 
 0£?yat, 0£t?, 
 
 Jouyat, dow?. 
 
 o-TY.cr-w, 
 
 .... 
 
 -01 [Ml, 
 
 .... 
 
 -£ty, 
 
 -uv 
 
 0wr-w, 
 
 
 
 -otp, 
 
 .... 
 
 -£ty, 
 
 -wv_ 
 
 GWC-W, 
 
 .... 
 
 -Ol^l, 
 
 .... 
 
 -£ty, 
 
 -wy 
 
 §u%-u, 
 
 .... 
 
 -M/Al, 
 
 
 
 -£ty, 
 
 -wy. 
 
 The other Tenses are regularly formed from Verbs in w, 
 thus : 
 
 1 Fut. 
 
 Some irregularities occur in those tenses of the Verbs in 
 p, which follow the analogy of Verbs in w. In the latter, 
 the Perfect preserves the penultima of the 1st Future. 
 But verbs in p, derived from w, change n, the penultima 
 of the 1st Future, into st for the Perfect, as Sew, 0wV«, 
 teOhkcc. Those derived from aw keep in the Perfect the 
 
 K 
 
OS 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 penuitima of the Present, as cndu, o-tvo-w, XcTocy.cc. But 
 Itrrnxas, is also found. In this last a syncope often takes 
 place , thus ec-to* : hence the Participle hrrctus, and by 
 syncope lmi$. 
 
 The 1st Aorist of "0-7*1*1 has an Active, and the 2d a 
 neuter signification. (So also (3cclw.) The Perf. Piup. 
 and 2d Aor. Act. have a neuter ; the other tenses an ac- 
 tive sense. The Perf. has the signification of the Present, 
 and the Plup. of the Imperf. 
 
 
 
 Indicative Moor 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 *0"r-»?/uit, r\c, 
 
 run, 
 
 cctov, 
 
 CCTOV, 
 
 ccpsv, 
 
 ccrs, 
 
 CUJi* , 
 
 rlG-yui, nc, 
 
 nTi, 
 
 btov, 
 
 BTOV, 
 
 spiv, 
 
 £TE, 
 
 lio~i t 
 
 cia-wui, uc, 
 dEHey-VjLu, vc, 
 
 UO~i, 
 
 VG-l. 
 
 OTOV, 
 VTOV, 
 
 OTOV, 
 VTOV. 
 
 v^bv, 
 
 OTB, 
 WIS, 
 
 ova, 
 
 
 
 Imperfect J. 
 
 
 
 
 IW-rv, *>?, 
 
 «» 
 
 CtTOV, 
 
 C6TVV, 
 
 apzv, 
 
 CCTB, 
 
 CU70CV, 
 
 ET«f-*}V, rjc, 
 
 »»J 
 
 iT0V } 
 
 BTYIV, 
 
 EjUEy, 
 
 BTi, 
 
 tarocv, 
 
 \oit-m, uc, 
 15-lx.v-vv, vc, 
 
 
 OTOV, 
 VTOV, 
 
 CTYIV, 
 
 v'tw, 
 
 C^BV, 
 
 vpzv, 
 
 OTB, 
 VTB, 
 
 ocrocv, 
 vactv. 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 
 
 scrr-ijVj -fic y 
 
 Mj 
 
 rnov, 
 
 r.Tnv, 
 
 YiptV, 
 
 nTt, 
 
 ris-xt §, 
 
 %§-w s *<;, 
 
 «, 
 
 BTOV, 
 
 ZTfiV, 
 
 E[*fV, 
 
 ITS, 
 
 BCOCV, 
 
 E^-U>V, WC, 
 
 M, 
 
 OTOV, 
 
 CTYIV. 
 
 opev } 
 
 OTB, 
 
 oaccv. 
 
 * From earn/xi. 
 
 f The Third Person Plural in the Present is the same as the 
 Dative Plural Participle of the same tense. By the Attics it is 
 commonly terminated in a<rt, as TiQkao-i, Sidoaci, dtixvixxcri. 
 
 I Verbs in pi are seldom used in the Imperfect. They generally 
 in this, and sometimes in other Tenses, adopt their original con- 
 tracted form ; thus i'oT-aov, wv; Jr/9-Eoy, ovv, &c. 
 
 § The Second Aorist retains the long vowel in the penuitima of 
 the Dual and Plur. except in t/9yi/*/, oic>u/jt,i and <Vw. 
 
 The 3d Person Plur. is often syncopated ; thus »0«r for sgnaay, 
 i J 9iv for 'iQiaav. 
 
Sing. 
 
 4£7T«-9i * 
 
 101 -Tl, I 
 
 £4JlVU-0t, -/ 
 
 Sing. 
 
 0£f, 0ETW, 
 
 VERBS m ^LCt. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Dual. 
 
 99 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Dual. 
 
 ctutov, arnruVf 
 
 torov, 
 
 roTcoy, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 O-TYITE, <T7r,T0t<T0tV t 
 
 0£TE, SsTwc-ay, 
 
 &3TE, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Sol-vv, J 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 nroy, wtw, 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 Plur, 
 
 UToy, »it*iv, wy.iv > »5Tf, »5eray,, 
 
 * The Poets retain the long vowel, as iW»9/, riQr>ri. The syl- 
 lable 61 is frequently rejected, as lara. or JVty), t ( '9v), &c. 
 
 f The Second Aorist Imperative ends in 0», except Ge*, Sor, if, 
 1* ffwty, <ry\s and £f>«r. 
 
 J Dissyllables in v/a.i have a 2d Aor. Imper. as *\v8t. 
 
100 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 l(T7~u> 3 ag, 
 tlQ-ui *, rig, 
 cto-uij, vg, 
 
 oc, 
 
 ax or, our oi} 
 
 Tjroy, r,rov, 
 
 UlOVy WTOV, 
 
 Z^fv, art, 
 u>[M, art, 
 
 wcrt, 
 
 W(7t. 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 6S, Qyg, 
 ou t atcg, 
 
 O-TV, 
 
 PTYITOV, tTTYiTOt, 
 QrJTOV, 0T5TOV, 
 OUTOVf OVTQV, 
 
 arruptv 
 
 Q(t>(ASV } 
 
 , CTflTf, 
 
 Qrirs, 
 
 (TTUCTl, 
 
 owo~i. 
 
 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 l&TMOU. 
 
 tiQevou. ot,oovcu. 
 
 Stixvvvat. 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 
 
 
 (TTrivai. SeTvcu. 
 
 Sovvcu 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 Participles. 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Second Aorist 
 
 
 t&T-OCg, CMTOty 
 
 TiQ-Eig, slcra, 
 dia-ovg, ovtra, 
 Stw-vg, vera. 
 
 av. CTocg, 
 it. §*}g, 
 6v. ooijg, 
 vv. 
 
 oovcra, 
 
 crray 
 
 GOV. 
 
 The Infin. Pres. has always the short vowel j the 2d 
 Aor. a long vowel or diphthong — » instead of a, s7 instead 
 of f, and ov instead of o. 
 
 * Ionic tj9!« ; Poetically tiSe/m. So also the 2d Aorist. 
 
verbs in p. 
 
 101 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Moods and Tenses. 
 Imp. Opt. Subj. Inf. Part. 
 
 ofxui, -ocro, -o*ju,»jv, 
 
 •ufAOU, -ocfaj, 
 
 /*"<TT-up.cii, -euro, -atpriv, -Zjj.cn, -cca9ca t -w 
 
 J Ti0-£jU«t, -IGO, -llfJWV, -WfJLOtlj -ECrQoU, -SjJ 
 
 \ }!* . ._. J. ~. -_fl„. * 
 
 (j 
 
 /! 
 
 I! 
 
 the rest like the Present. 
 
 -MiAtiIOZ, 
 
 l£iXVt^*JV 
 
 Tenses formed from Verbs in u. 
 
 /tar-ccpcii 
 
 ■OfJLOCi, 
 
 Plup. 
 
 1 Aor. 
 
 1 Fut 
 
 1 c 
 I 1 
 
 rlc-Tafxriv, 
 
 | EdEdO/Xfly, 
 
 VjdEdEiyju.?!)'. 
 /i(7Ta0rjv, 
 
 S £TE0fly, 
 
 I idofijjv, de 
 
 J T£0»5V-O|U«t, 
 
 J do0>j'cr-Ojwai, 
 V^dEi^O^'cr-Ojotaj. 
 
 f icrracr-oji/,at, 
 F.< TE0£*<r-oua», 
 
 -aero, 
 
 -ocro, 
 
 -ajjuiiv 
 
 -Ei'psVj 
 
 -UfJLUl, 
 
 CTT<»0-»5Tt, 
 
 -£i»y, 
 
 -EiWV, 
 
 -£*ny, 
 
 -o*jU,»jv, 
 -oijurjy, 
 -Oijomy, 
 
 -ofyt»iv, 
 -o*^,»jy, 
 -o//*»iy, 
 
 -ao-tfat, -cc.iA.ivQg, 
 -£~cr0ai, -«]w,Eyofj 
 -ojUEyoj, 
 , -Eiy^tfyos. 
 
 -oo-Qai, 
 
 -wet*, -ilj, 
 
 -Ecr0a», -ofJiBvog. 
 
 -tO-Qctl, -OfAiVOg. 
 
 -ta-Qxij -6jj.tvog, 
 
 -£cr0a<j -ofxivog, 
 
 -taQizi, -cyxEyof, 
 
 -Ecr0at, -o/xsyoj, 
 
 -Ecr0ai, 'Sfxivog, 
 
 k3 
 
102 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Present. 
 Dual. 
 
 7T0C- "\ 
 
 Jl 
 
 Plur. 
 
 crOoy, /btfGa, 0*0?, >Ta*. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 to, jutOoy, o*9oy, crQyjy, |UE0a, <70r, it©. 
 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 t<TT«- *\ 
 
 hixjv- J 
 
 a-vov, aUuv, crvs, <rVu<TC6v. 
 
 i 
 Wot- J 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 jaw, o, to, jusQoy, o"0oi>, <70»jv, jus0a, o-0e, uto. 
 
 * In this Person in the Passive and Middle Voices the Ionic 
 dialect drops the <r } and the Attic contracts that resolution ; thus 
 Hcrrourat, Ion. trraat, Att. <Vt*j ; IOecto, Ion. ZQso, Att. ZQov. 
 
VERBS 111 /uu. 
 
 103 
 
 •w/xat 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 wfjuQoy, oia-Qov, a&Qov, 
 up$ov } rio-Qov, ricrQov, 
 wfjLtQov, warQoy, wa-Qov, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 wju,E0a, yaQs, wvtcu. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 terracrQa*. 
 
 Paeticiple. 
 Present. 
 
 Tivs<rvou. 
 didWSat. 
 hiKvva-Qixi. 
 
 )[XIV 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Moods and Tenses. 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are the same as in the 
 Passive. 
 
 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Opt. Subj. Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 IcTToiixriv, 
 
 <rra,<ro } 
 
 $■£(70, 
 
 do<xo } 
 
 crreJju.*)!', crSjuai, <rrao"9a», 
 VufAriv, SaJ^tat, Vto-Oc&i, 
 dot/x^v, du^cti, ^ecrOfiw, 
 
 C-T<X[AEVOS 
 
 
 Tenses formed from Verbs in w. 
 
 
 
 1 Fut 
 
 Z(TTr)>JCC[Ji,r)V, C7T«(7-ai ,~\ 
 
 idWa/xw, dw>c-Oft, j ' 
 
 I 3W-o/xatj .... I , 
 
 j dW-ojuat, .... f r > 
 
 \.$u%-oum, .... J 
 
 ccifj.rtv } WfjMi, outvoU) ctptyos. 
 
 opwos. 
 
104 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Indicative Mood, 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 fxrtv, <T0 t to, (jleQov, cQoy, <r9riv, [xsQcc, cr9fj vto. 
 
 E<7T(X- ] 
 
 itfi > 
 
 i&- J 
 
 .-* 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 U'J, jUEOa, ffQf, VTO. 
 
 a-Tca-^ 
 
 $«- [ pw, o t to, /xeSov, aQov, <tOj 
 
 m- J 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 O-T-WpOLl, rj, YlTOU, W[J.tQoV f YICrQoV, licrQoV, UfJLtQot, W70J, WVTOCi. 
 
 S'-w/xa*, y, yitou, wp&ov, rio-Qov, vio-Qov, u[xe9oc, n<rQ?, uvtou. 
 d-w^oci, tt>, wTat, vjjleQov, uaQov, ua-Qov, vfjuQcx,, wa9s, uvtou. 
 
 * This and the following Mood in the 2d Aorist of *'<xt*i/ui being 
 seldom used, are here introduced only for the sake of analogy. 
 
VERBS 
 
 in p. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 erraerQat. 
 
 crra," 
 
 105 
 
 p.WO!'. 
 
 FORMATION OF TENSES OF VERBS IN p<. 
 
 Active Voice. 
 
 The Imperfect 
 
 is formed from the Present by prefixing the Augment, and 
 changing jxt into v, as rlQnfM, It19w. 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Imperfect by dropping the Reduplica- 
 tion j as It19y)v } Mm j or by changing the Improper Redu- 
 plication into the Augment, as Yo-rw, e<rrw. 
 
 If the Verb has no Reduplication, the Second Aorist is 
 the same as the Imperfect. 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 The Present 
 
 is formed from the Present Active, by shortening the 
 penultima, and changing y.i into /xai, as ktt»ijlu, Vcrrayxai. — 
 The Poets however retain the long syllable, as £*<^at, 
 
 ovrtfACUy &C. 
 
 The Imperfect 
 
 is formed from the Present by prefixing the Augment, and 
 changing p.a* into ju.»v, as tjQe/xcu, IriS^y. 
 
 Middle Voice. 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Imperfect, by dropping the Reduplica- 
 tion, as iTiSf/xrjy, iQepnv ; io-rapw, laroipw. 
 
106 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS IN P 
 
 may be divided into Three Classes, eacli containing Three 
 Verbs. 
 
 I. From ia> are derived u^), to be ; and elfu and U^, to go. 
 
 II. From Iw are derived Inpi, to send ; vpcu, to sit ; and 
 ufjicci, to clothe oneself. 
 
 III. Ke7juat, to lie down j 'Icrvpi, to know ; <P«jiaJ, to say. 
 
 Class I. 
 1 Ei/x^ to be. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Sing, up), 
 Dual. 
 
 ih or e^ 
 
 ECTTOV, 
 
 EOT*. 
 £<7T0V, 
 
 Plur. lo-ph, 
 
 eVts, 
 
 fieri. 
 
 S. ni, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ri Or *}v, 
 
 D. 
 
 W'?W, 
 
 riT»iv, 
 
 P. r,pu>, 
 
 TJTE, 
 
 Pluperfect*. 
 
 ri<rctv. 
 
 S. tf/umv, 
 D. tjjueOov, 
 P. vptQa,, 
 
 y<r9ov, 
 
 Future %. 
 
 TITO, 
 
 »vto f. 
 
 S. la-opcci, 
 D. i<rojL*E0oy, 
 P. Io-qjaeQci, 
 
 tern, 
 
 ECTEO-SoV, 
 
 icrnon, 
 Ecrovrcu. 
 
 
 * Called also the Imperfect Middle. 
 
 f in/*™ and Jvto are generally used in the sense of the Imperfect. 
 
 I Called also the Future Middle. 
 
s. 
 p. 
 
 VERBS in fj.t. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 iVc5i or eo-o, 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 IO7 
 
 iCTTU, 
 tCTTWV, 
 1<TTU<TCC9, 
 
 s. 
 
 s'iyv, 
 
 £*V, 
 
 sU, 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ilriToii, 
 
 eIyitviv, 
 
 P. 
 
 EitfjUSV, 
 
 H*T£, 
 
 Future. 
 
 unvccv c 
 
 8- 
 
 E£70t/X>1V, 
 
 SCOiO, 
 
 zcroiTo, 
 
 D. 
 
 icroifxsQov, 
 
 sctohtQov, 
 
 IcroicrQw, 
 
 P. 
 
 lo-oifjiiQa., 
 
 eo-oktQs, 
 
 ECTOiPTO. 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 
 nrov t 
 
 WCTi. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 
 SIVCCi. 
 
 Future. 
 
 -oc, 
 
 Participles. 
 Present. 
 
 ovcrcc, 
 ovcrnc, 
 
 * Used also for the third person singular in the sense of Utu, 
 let it be, be it so. 
 
108 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N. lo-ofJiEvos, la-ofxsvn, Icrop'vov, 
 
 G. Ic-ojus'voy, la-ofxsvvic, IVo/a 
 
 '-V0V. 
 
 2. Elp, to go. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present *. 
 Sing. • Dual. Plural. 
 
 elfxty Ei$ or eT, ila-h, J rroy, Stop, | i/AEv,m,src7^iVi,or<a<7t. 
 
 Imperfect f. 
 Eiv, Etj, a?, | JVoy, trw, J */aev, *te, iW*. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 iiX-UV, Sl$, U, J ElTOVj E*T*JV, E*/A£», EiTS, «<Tav. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 toy, tfff, «, tSTOV, iSTtJV, *0|UtW, *£TE, iOV. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 i'S* or £?_, *tw, "top, *Vwv, fre, Jrwo-av. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 *E, IETW, iETOV, UritlV, iETE, Isrucrxv. 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 iotfju, tote, to*j i'oiTOP, lotrviv, ?o*/xep, torn, i'oiEv. 
 
 * In the Attic writers sl/u.i has a Future signification. So also 
 have the Infinitive and Participle. 
 
 * The Imperf. and 2d Aor. belong to Epic poetry ; but i'a and 
 uv, "tv)v and f<7a», are all that can be found, except in composition. 
 r,'iov and p«, used by Epic poets, and ™»v, r7« and ?>*, in a Plup. 
 form, are also found in the sense of the Imperfect. 
 
irregular verbs in /**, 10$ 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sing, Dual. Plural. 
 
 IV, itt?> M, iWoV, i»TGV, J ittUEV, i'^Tf, fWi. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Present, Second Aorist. 
 
 Umi or i'yat. i^v., loy<r& ? Iqv, 
 
 Middle Voice, 
 
 Indicative Mood, 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 ilia, UOii, IfS, itoCTOV, tlUTOV, j U0t,fXiV 3 UXTij tiS,<Tt, 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 3/ j< a I v 3 / i j/ u v 
 
 or rjusy, hts, ^<r«* s 
 
 First Aorist. First Future, 
 
 3. "lfi(M, tO gO. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Optative Mood, 
 Present. 
 
LQ GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Infinitive. Partigiple. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 Uvea. U)t;, livro$. 
 
 Middle Voice. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Sing. Dual. Piur. 
 
 Present. 
 
 It-fjuu, <roci } roa, /xsOov, <rQov, c$ov } | jueGa, crOe, vtva 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Is-fjLnv, uo, to, : jj.eQov, crQov, <tQyiv, | //.eOa, cr§i, vtq. 
 
 Imperative. Participle. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 i£(TQ f tEtraw. tsfj.sv-oc, r>, ov. 
 
 Class II. 
 
 1. "IvifM, to send *. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Infju, ins, *Wh "stov, "trov, U[jl?v, lire, UXcri. 
 
 * This Verb, formed like r/fln^i, has few irregularities. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS IN p. Ill 
 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 " 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 \»i 
 
 m$t . m } 
 
 Utov, Utviv, 
 
 'U[ASV, 4ET£, 'll<J<X,V. 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 
 r 
 H-/.OC. 
 
 , HKHV. 
 
 riKCX,. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 r,v, fa, %» | t£ ' TOV ? *,TW> I */*■"* ETF,.EO-av*. 
 
 First Future. 
 *j<t-m, mj, ei, | £tov ; £tov, - 0j«», ete, 01/(7*. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 i£0i, UtOJ, 'ittOV, isTUV, j iETS, »£TWff«V. 
 
 Perfect. First Aorist. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 ££, STW," ETOV; EtWV, ETS, 'huCTOiV, 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Ui-nv, *$, r\, yitov, h'thv, 15/xEy, wf, )?yay, 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Ei'xOijUi. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 8>-W* ns, vi, riTov, rirriv, ' npiv, nre, 'fiaccv, 
 
 * The Attics have it/*™, sTtj, thav. 
 
31$ GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE- 
 
 First Future. 
 
 a 
 
 Subjunctive Moot). 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing, Dual. Plur. 
 
 lZ, **»|, iri, j Intoi) triiov, J tups*, Itjtj^ iScri; 
 
 Perfect. 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 7/TOV, *iTOy, WfAEV, *5T!j Wjf*, 
 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Present. Perfect, 
 
 Second Aorist. First Future, 
 
 tlvcct. n<Tuv. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present. Perfect. 
 
 U\c } lua-a,, Uv. tlx.ws, eUvTcti I.X9?. 
 
 Second Aorist. First Future. 
 
 hi;,- iicx, ev. v<ruiv, ri<rovcra, 3 go**. 
 
 Passive Voice, 
 Indicative Mood, 
 
 Present. 
 
 It'ixou, ecu, i<x\, | /xcGoy, vQov, a-Qov, p0«, <?Qt, vtt 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS IN juu. 113 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 Is-fj-riVj cro, to, { peQov, crQoy, cr9riv, [xtQcc, <x9f, vro. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 ti-pcu, crock, Ton, j jusQoy, o-Qov, crQov, | p.z9ct, o~b, yrat. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ^"ixriVj cro, to, I |Uf0ov, er9oy, a9»5v, j| jue9«, crOf, vr:, 
 
 First Aorist. First Future. P. p. Future, 
 
 Middle Voice. 
 
 Present and Imperfect like the Passive*. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 nn-ciprw , v, ctro, | ctfxsQov, a.o-Qov, ci<r9m, | ci^Sa, cc<t(j; } uvro. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 iif*,rti, zero, \ro, J EUE0oy, sVSoy, E<rG*)y, | eju.. c 9« 5 W^Ge,, evtc. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 riT-oy.cu, »i, etk^ I o^sGoy, scrGoy, so-Goy, | 6[xc9ii, tcrO?, ovt&i. 
 
 Imperative Mood, 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 'zero, scrQw, zcrQov, 'icrQuv, «r0£, Ee&nftey. 
 
 * "\ty.on and U/tfw, the Present and Imperfect Middle, signify 1 
 send myself, &c. or I am impelled. Hence they are generally reed 
 in the sense of wishing. 
 
 L3 
 
114 grammar of the greek language, 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 n-fj.v\v, o, to, j [a;Qov, rQov, crQw, J jue9«, <t9e, yro, 
 
 First Future. 
 
 r.ffol-fji.nv, o, TO) I /utOop, aQoy, 0-fitjy, [ jitsQa, <t0e, ?tg. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Sfuu, yi, hoci, | wpsQov, ntrQw, riv-Qov, \ w^a,, toQt, wvr«*. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Second Aorist. First Future. 
 
 Participles. 
 Second Aorist. First Future. 
 
 s/xsv-oc, v, on, Tiir6[j.svoc ) v ? o*. 
 
 2. *H/«w, to sit. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 %pa* 9 wet*} r,7<xi, I vp^ov, r.a-Qov; nffVov t j r\pi§%> wrQt, wtou. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 vi(xr,v } wo, wo, J r^i^otfYiT^^W^h | Yipzbx, *,<?§(, hra. 
 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS IN jUi. 115 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 Infinitive. Participls. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 no-Qca'. »j|L«,£y-of, n, or, 
 
 3. E!/*«j, to clothe oneself*. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 Present and Perfect. 
 
 t^uat, el<rcu, bitch , 
 
 & $l<ricu } 
 
 £i/AH», "CO, & s<ro"o, 
 tiro, ii<rro } h<rro, &.\<jro, 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 1 
 
 las'- J 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 euro, J a/xeOoy, acrOoy, ao-9>?y, | dp&K, acrSf, avro. 
 
 Participles. 
 Present and Perfect. First Aorist. 
 
 fi/xsvoj. loW/xsyo?. 
 
 * This Verb may be considered as Middle. The Active is «•> or 
 !>y«//c*i, forming «<r« 1st Fut. and e!cr« 1st Aor. Inf. then, with * gene- 
 rally doubled. 
 
116 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Class III. 
 1. YLfinai, to lie down. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Piur. 
 
 XU-(J.OU, COto, TOM, J pSoY, O-QoVj C70OV, j plQ(X., <?Qs, VTCti. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 iKii-pw, ao, to, j fxtQov, o-Qov, o-Qyiv, j ^[JLzQot, aQs, >TO. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 xnV-0/xa^ i\, stul, j ofAcQov, ecrGoy, eo~Qov, j ojueGo, ectSe., oytki. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 Kilao, HEicrGw, ks?o-0ov, XEtt70wv, xs7ct0e, ki'ktQu&olv, 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 Xlol-^fiY, Of TO) | JU.e9oVj <T0OV, uOtjv, | f/.s9a, <r9s, yTO. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. First Aorist. 
 
 XEWjUCCi. X.tl(7U[A<Xl. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 xe?ctS«<. Ktlfjuv-os, ri, ov. 
 
 2. *1m[m, to know. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 arov, aToj^ | apiy, cite, 1 
 
iRREGt'LAR verbs ltf fil, 117 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Sing. Dual. Pl.uii 
 
 Imperative Mood* 
 
 Present. 
 
 *«■-«& & 0t, *t« J cctov & Toy, arwv I an & Tt, fcf tocWH, 
 
 Infinitive. Participle, 
 
 Present. Present • 
 
 Middle Voice* > 
 
 Indicative Mood* 
 
 Present. 
 
 ifrfrpM, foil) VUlt | jixsGoy, o-Soy, o-9o», | ptQtti cr§^ yf&4» 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 l<?a-fjiviv } <?o } TO) | jujfloyj crSoy, crStfy^ j jUfQa^ tftff^ vfo« 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 %0-a.crQa.t. icfa/xsV-o^ f\, <a. 
 
 * The Passive fct*p>ctt is seldom used; but'E*/ffttf i w«i often occurs^ 
 
IIS GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 3. $«|Ut, to say. 
 
 Indicative Mood*. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 (piop), Qric, tyricr), j ^xtov, QaTov, j QoLplv, ^ccte^ Qoiat. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 f$-^y> *)?, rjj ccrcv, arnv, \ aptVy <x.rt 3 a<ray & ay. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 tQiKf-ct, ac y e, ccrov, <£rw, | ct/uisv,, are., ay. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 First Future. 
 <pn<r»& 3 tig, ti, J srov, £Toy, ojUEy_, £te_, overt. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 (pccQt, (p%?u, | Qixtov, (pdruv, (poire, (pciTuaav, 
 
 Qoti-W; fic } n 3 
 
 Optative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 psy, re, 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 (br\<r-<x.ip.i ) cci*;, at, curov, ctirriv, captv, am, a.ktv. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 (pZ>, fyyq, <pY, } j QriTOV, QriTOV, j $U>[AEV, (pilTf, $WG-t. 
 
 * In the Present and Imperfect the <J> is frequently dropped by 
 Homer and the Attic writers j thus *>/«.*, %s, wt, m, r>t, f>. 
 

 IRREGULAR VERBS IN 
 
 (U 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 
 Infinitive Mood 
 
 , 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Qoivat. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 
 (Pnvcci. 
 
 Present. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 
 First Future. 
 
 ac, tpdrra,, (pocv. j 0*i<raf. 
 
 I 
 
 tyrio-uv. 
 
 119 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 Indicative. Imperative. 
 
 Perfect. 7rs$ara*. mtyoia-Qu). 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Middle Voice. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 (^a-ju.al, <ra\, ra.1, J jujGov, erQoy, trSov, j iusQcj, <r9?, Krai 
 
 Imperfect and Second Aorist. 
 
 E<p«6-JAEV, (70, TO, | p&OI , <tQoV, CrQr.V , | fAs9«, 0"9c, VTO. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 Present. 
 
 QcitT-o, 6oj, Gov, Quv } Of, Swa-ai. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Present. Perfect. 
 
no 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 SYNOPTICAL VIEW 
 
 Of the Terminations of the Tenses in General. 
 
 There are in the Active and Passive Voices two principal 
 classes with reference to the termination, one of which we 
 shall call the class of the Principal Tenses (the Present, 
 Future, and Perfect) ; the other the class of the Historical 
 Tenses (Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorists.) The Tenses 
 of each class agree with one another in certain points, as 
 the following Table shews ? 
 
 
 - 
 
 Principal Tenses. 
 
 
 
 1st Per. 
 
 2nd Per. 
 
 3rd Per 
 
 4> 
 
 f Sing. — 
 
 — f. 
 
 f — ?4. 
 
 
 I D. wanting. 
 
 -— rov. 
 
 TOK. 
 
 
 lFU«pa, 
 
 ^— rs, 
 
 .— *• 0"t. 
 
 V 
 
 f*S. fJLOCl. 
 
 -*— ceci. 
 
 •>— TXi. 
 
 
 1 D. — peOov, 
 
 — o-Qov. 
 
 — o-Qov, 
 
 £ 
 
 tPl.— peQ*. 
 
 I 
 
 Historical Tenses. 
 
 w vrat. 
 
 
 1st Per. 
 
 2nd Per. 
 
 3rd Per. 
 
 6 
 
 rSing. — 
 
 — «■ f« 
 
 — s. 
 
 Zj 
 
 1 D. wanting. 
 
 s — rov.. 
 
 — s TW, 
 
 < 
 
 1 P. — ft*. 
 
 T£. 
 
 — ~ "f 
 
 
 rS. *-** pyv. 
 
 ere- GO. 
 
 rr TO. 
 
 '1 « 
 
 1 D. — jueOov. 
 
 * — <r9ov. 
 
 — cr9yjv s 
 
 Cu 
 
 LP, — t&t . 
 
 *»(&, 
 
 — ^" »T0. 
 
 This Table serves also for the Verbs in f*t, and on that 
 account the first person is left indefinite. 
 
 The third person sing. act. is « in the present and future 
 of Verbs in — *>, in the Perf. t ; in Verbs in (m it is <n % 
 
ANOMALOUS AND DEPONENT VERBS. 121 
 
 ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 There are few Verbs in the Greek language, which can 
 be regularly conjugated in all their Moods and Tenses. 
 Some of these deficiencies may be traced to harmony : for 
 others, it is difficult to assign the cause. 
 
 Anomalous Verbs are a kind of Defectives, which borrow 
 some of their Tenses either from their own Primitives, 
 whose Present and Imperfect are obsolete ; as, XapGdvaj, 
 A>i\J/o/xcu, "kixrtOoc, which borrows its Tenses, beyond the 
 Present and Imperfect, from the obsolete Verb Xn'&y • or 
 from Verbs of the same signification, though of a different 
 original, whose Present and Imperfect, are likewise obsolete; 
 as, e'pxo/asji, Ixsva-opcci, TjXuGst, which borrows its Tenses, 
 beyond the Present and Imperfect, from the obsolete Verb 
 IxivQu j or from Verbs which, though otherwise perfect, 
 commonly use irregular or dialectical forms in some of 
 their Tenses j as, ayvv^.i t 1 Fut. Att. 2«|j», 1 Aor. wsfa, 
 2 Aor. f'ayoy, &c. from a,yu. There are also some Verbs 
 which, though they form several of their Tenses regularly 
 beyond the Present and Imperfect, yet borrow others from 
 other Verbs of the same signification, though of a different 
 original, and many of them obsolete; as, aipsu, uipncra, 
 ripvKtx,, which from the obsolete Verb eXw borrows l\Z, tfiin, 
 
 iiX6ixr,Vy hXcifxw, &C. 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 To the class of Middle Verbs are sometimes referred 
 those, called by some Grammarians, Deponents. They 
 have the Middle form, except in the Perfect, Pluperfect, 
 and Paulo-post-Future, of which the form is Passive. 
 Their Perfect has sometimes both an Active and a Passive 
 sense, as «pyacr/A«t from Ipyafo/za*. Some of these Verbs 
 have, besides a Middle, a Passive 1st Aorist and 1st Future, 
 the signification of which is Passive. In the other Tenses, 
 a Middle sense may generally be traced. 
 
 Perhaps it would be more analogical to consider them 
 as Defective Verbs, whose Active is obsolete, and which 
 want some of the Passive and Middle Tenses. The follow- 
 ing is a synopsis of their form : 
 
 M 
 
122 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Indie. Iraper. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part. 
 
 \zy^-ov y -oifxriv, -Wjixat, -jeSca, -o^uyoj. 
 
 Present 
 Imperf. 
 Perfect 
 Pluperf. 
 
 }, 
 
 > dsdi-to. T ,r -r -yyxt, -yurvo?. 
 
 Idsyoy-W, 
 osoeyuoct, 
 
 P. p. Flit, ^sas^-o^xt, -oljxr,v, -seQxiy -oyLVJOc. 
 
 IstAor.M Ah^oi-ur,v, I'-Z-xi, •CLip.vp, -k/xai, -xcrQtxi, -x(j.sw. 
 IstFuLM.^Ef-o/uat, -oijAW, -E<r9ai, -g^e»oj. 
 
 IstAor.P. lYsyJlw, $EJ$-r,7i>-EUw, -a, -hx\, -els; 
 
 IstFut.P, ^E^SrjV-c/zaJ, -olpriVj -tcrQou, -ojusvo;, 
 
 A few of these Verbs have a 2d Aorist Middle, as irt/v9a»cx- 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Defective Verbs want some of their Tenses. 
 
 These several kinds following are scarcely ever used 
 beyond the Present and Imperfect; viz. 
 
 1. Such as signify Likeness or Desire. 
 
 2. Poetic Verbs in xix. 
 
 3. Verbs derived from the Future of their Primitives. 
 
 4. Verbs in tu«. 
 
 5. Some Verbs having two Consonants before u. 
 G. Reduplicate Verbs have a Liquid before a. 
 
 7. Verbs ending in AJ.u and vXKv. 
 
 8. Frequentat. Verbs in a£a> and »£w, when they have 
 the same signification with their Primitives, and Poetic- 
 Verbs in «w derived from other Verbs gradually 5 as, 
 hx^oiu, to retain, from Xa-y^, and that from \ya. 
 
 9. Poetic Verbs in xOu, e9«, vQu 9 o-Qv, x§w, xo>, jy-ui. 
 
 10. Poetic Verbs in afy, fy, or <rS«, formed gradually , 
 
 as, xXva-Kci^ui, Sac. 
 
 1 1 . Poetic Verbs formed from the Future of other Verbs : 
 as, &£w from ayv, &c. 
 
 P2. Poetic Verbs in /S\a, y.-a, xXw, crra, and jttw ; as, 
 ^.'|uoAo ( uaj, from fj/;(j.£\x, to take care, &c. 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 123 
 
 Examples. 
 
 1 Xiciu, to be white like snow. 
 VuXYindu), to be quiet or 
 
 calm. 
 Ba<nX««&>, to desire to reign. 
 Ma9>ma», to desire to learn. 
 Ma^«'ii, to desire to fight. 
 
 2 YLifdiu), to mingle or mix. 
 ?.Kt$oclu, to disperse. 
 A»Aaio/xai, to desire or covet, 
 
 3 Bfutrslu, to desire to eat. 
 'OvJ/Eiw, to desire to see. 
 
 4 'AXv/w, to be vexed in mind. 
 'Ayvtu, to accompany one. 
 'OTUiw, to be married, &c. 
 
 5 '?Efx€u, to lead in a circle. 
 *sp£«, to feed or nourish. 
 MsX&v, to seethe or boil. 
 "EX&w, to desire. 
 
 6 Mxpfxcdpu, to glitter. 
 ITaju<,$afrw, to shine. 
 Ba/A&Jvw, to stammer. 
 KcLfxattpu, to brandish. 
 MopjULvpu, to murmur. 
 Aap^asrrw, to tear. 
 
 7 Asv^'xxw, to wink. 
 B$v\\u, to abhor. 
 
 8 Tpo^afw, to run often. 
 ITpoxaXifw, to provoke. 
 'Artifa to seek or ask. 
 'lo-xayccw, to retain. 
 
 AhkcmoLoiaxi, to receive. 
 9 'ApwaQu, to help. 
 A<a;xa9w, to pursue. 
 Ox?ya0a>, to burn. 
 OSivv'Ow, to corrupt. 
 "EcrSw, to eat. 
 'Eps^Ow, to cut, to shake. 
 3 OxUu, to destroy. 
 'EpvKuxu, to restrain. 
 
 TsXcjAca, to be. 
 K<\oixa,i, to exhort. 
 TiTfxu, to find, &c. 
 
 10 'AAuo-xa£w, to avoid. 
 Apacntc&^w, to fly, &C 
 
 'EXxyr«fw, to draw. 
 Ep?rufa£a>, to creep. 
 Tpowax^w, to turn, &c. 
 
 BiSacrQw, to gO. 
 
 11 "A&, to lead. 
 'Oierv, to bring. 
 "Opcoj, to stir up. 
 IleQpUu, to shake or 
 
 shiver. 
 'Epp'/yw, to be cold. 
 
 'EypnyopoJ, to Watch. 
 
 12 Ms/x^Xojwa;, to take care. 
 "Eypojua*, to be roused. 
 K£xXo ( aa*, to advise. 
 "Eo-TrofMCu, to follow. 
 
 'EviWw, to say, to scold. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs are such as have only the third Person 
 Singular of each Tense, and in Participles only the Neuter 
 Gender. They have generally the sign it before them in 
 English j as, 
 
1'24 GRAMMAR OF THE GKEEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 AsY, it behoveth ; Imperf. Un ; 1 Aor. \$en<n ; 1 Fut. 
 fcj Opt. Pres. osoi; ]nfin.<^7v, ^jjo-mv, esVea; Part. &ov, 
 
 Aoxeij it seemeth ; Imperf. e$oxh ; 1 Fut. &fei ; 1 Aor. 
 E$b|fs; Part. $o-/.£v. 
 
 ITpsTrji, it becometh; Imperf. tsyEraj In£ larpevfty | Part, 
 
 v Avnit» 7 it is proper; Imperf. avwcs j Part. qvwcav. 
 ITpoo-wsi, it is meet or convenient; Imp. -nrpocmxEj Part. 
 
 MiAsi, it is minded 3 Imp. ejueXqj 1 Aor. ejksXj^ej 1 Fut. 
 ]U •'?.*? era. 
 
 Xp£ for xpfl'tn, it behoveth 3 Imperf. *;epw or %p^v 5 1 Fut. 
 Xpxo-Ei ; Inf. ^pnvow or xf'^' J - 
 
 Many Verbs are likewise used as Impersonate in the 
 Passive Voice; as, }JysTcu, it is reported; ei/Aaprai, it is 
 decreed by the Fates ; e^e^etcm, it may be ; lyva>$-a.t i it has 
 been known ; wus-cci, it has been heard ; 'Kilm:Ev<xt^ it re- 
 mains ; EipuTat, it has been said, &c. 
 
 As all Impersonal Verbs are defective in their Persons, 
 having only the Third Person Singular, so also most of 
 them are defective in their Tenses ; but in forming them 
 let the Learner name the three principal Tenses, if used ; 
 a?, cwpSairo, it happens ; 
 
 Pres. 1 Fut. Perf. 
 
 c-vpooum, vvpGwEi, cvyJziQnKE. 
 
 And where the Perfect or 1st Future are wanting, let him 
 name the 1st Aorist and Imperfect instead of them, or any 
 other of the Tenses, if used, as above. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS, &c. 
 
 1. Prepositions in Composition with Verbs, when prefixed 
 to Vowels, lose their own Vowel; as vmcxiiai, to hearken, to 
 obey; inakor,, obedience, &c. Except Ttrspl ard -srpo ; as, 
 tfepexutj to contain ; -nrpaayw, to lead or go before ; and 
 sometimes apty), as, auQisvwfMu, to clothe, to put on ; -srpo 
 is often contracted, as, «rp£;g«j for is-pos;^, to have the ad- 
 vantage, to excel. 
 
 i 
 
COMPOUND VERBS — VERBAL NOUNS. 125 
 
 2. Prepositions change their smooth letters into aspirates 
 when compounded with Verbs, &c. beginning with an as- 
 pirate ; as xa$ot7TTo^a», to bind, or twist j KaSd^apoc, pu- 
 rification. 
 
 3. If the Preposition ends in v, it is changed into y. be- 
 fore /9, p, v, <p, and 4- } as* e/a£*xxw from ev and 6ci\\u, to 
 cast into ; and it is changed into y before y, x, f , and x 5 
 as, lyKocXvTru, to cover over ; and into X before X j as, 
 lxxa,[jLVu, to shine upon, to illuminate. Suv sometimes 
 changes v into the Letter following it ; as, a-vavvpw, to draw 
 together. Sometimes v is rejected before er or £; as, 
 <rvr't\\u, to constrain, to swathe or bind up ; avfyriw, to 
 enquire together 3 but if the Verb be augmented with £ the 
 w is resumed $ as> crursXXw, <rwsrzX\o?. 
 
 VERBAL NOUNS 
 
 are formed from Tenses of the Indicative, by dropping the 
 Augment, and changing the termination. 
 
 Some are formed from the Present, as ^i/vap? from 
 » Jvajuat, xAsVthj from kXstttw. 
 
 Some few from the Aorists, as 3of« from s^ofa, Qrim from 
 iQriKa, £uyn N from tQvyo)), noiQos from EsraQov. 
 
 The larger proportion are formed from, 
 
 1. Perfect Active, distinguished by x, x> or $ m the last 
 syllable, as fyUv) from vstppiKcc,. ^a-x^ from ^i'^^a, ypa^ 
 from ysyp&tpbc. 
 
 2. Perfect Passive. 
 
 First Person, distinguished by M, and ending in 
 
 pet, 7Toivi[Jt.<x. from T£7To/>JJU.ai, 
 
 /w,>7, juvfl'jun from {j^fxwifxcci, 
 
 p3j, \^aXjix,o$ from Ev^aX^ai, 
 juwy, (Ainpuv from ^(jLvrifxai j 
 
 Second Person, distinguished by 2, and ending in 
 
 crux, Oyo-<a from TsQvo-cti,, 
 
 <nq, Xe|»s from XEXs£ai, 
 
 (no?, Qcc,vjjLX<nos from reQ'avfxtzcrea, 
 
 ^H- 01 ?} ^prVtjuo? from K?x?v<Tc<>t > 
 
 M 3 
 
126 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Third Person, distinguished by T, and ending in 
 
 TYIp, TVIS, SoTYlf, XOimric, 
 
 fypioc, rtyiav', XvrYipioc, troTYiptov, 
 tor, rtxoc, cug-Qyitgc, aKovtTTtxor, 
 
 i r 
 
 rpa, rpov, paxrcx, KccT07zrpov, 
 rvp) ■A0G-' [ j.ri , 7wp ) 
 
 T£0<-, tlX, TBOVj ypaTTTSOr, ypaTTTiX, yfaTTTSCV. 
 
 3. Perfect Middle, terminating in a, ae, eve, n, r,e, tc, 05, 
 
 as <pOopco from s'£0cpa, voj^xc from vsvopa, roKt.dc from tetoxk , 
 rpd^i? from ji-poQa, Tvxri from tet&jtcs,, $oAi< from fiifioXa, 
 
 TtyAOJ from TiTCUX, &c. 
 
 UNDECLINABLE PARTS OF SPEECH, 
 
 Comprised under the general head of Particles, 
 
 ADVERB. 
 
 An Adverb is an indeclinable word, which being joined 
 to Nouns or Verbs, &c. serves to explain some circumstance 
 or quality relating to their signification ; and denotes. 
 
 vwj now. 
 wplv, before. 
 X&h) yesterday. 
 kf(, always. 
 
 ccv , "J 
 
 fVi. as yet. 
 ay.*, together. 
 Ire, until. 
 ccpn, lately. 
 tu$t how long. 
 
 1. Time. 
 
 tiooz, so long. 
 vh, now. 
 &«/*a, frequently. 
 6\\, late. 
 -GraAai, formerly. 
 EuSv?j immediately 
 crtt'/xspov, to-day, 
 aupiov, to-morrow. 
 Svv, long. 
 K7r«f, once. 
 
 *)?, twice. 
 izGWax.tr, often. 
 vrzpov, afterwards, 
 wjjoTspQVj first. 
 sdMEots, never. 
 !w» s not yet. 
 line, thereafter. 
 ilra, afterwards. 
 
 jJ-iXfh as ^ ar as ' 
 axfh even unto. 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 127 
 
 <2. Place. 
 
 X ov > 
 and 
 
 and oi j as IvTavOa, 
 
 ivwroc^ov, in every 
 as ovpavoQs and oupavo- 
 
 J/i <z p/c/ce, ending in 0«, 0*, yj\ s 
 here; oipavoQt, in Heaven; iruvTax^ 
 place ; 7r.4oT, on the ground. 
 
 Motion from a place, in 0e and 
 fisy, /row Heaven. 
 
 Motion to a place, in h, &, <rt and <n, as o^pavov^, and 
 ovpavoTE, to Heaven; ^apa,?!, to the ground ,- /AQrJvncrt, *o 
 Athens. 
 
 Homer sometimes doubles ^e, as, ov^s Sopovh. 
 
 njtrohv, from whence/AS»j'v*i3-*, at Athens, mo), whither. 
 xpavoQw, — Hcaven.apavo0j, in Heaven. ev0«, IheJ, there. 
 o'Uo&sv, — home, ^ <*/*«£?, to the ground. 'Uua-z, thither. 
 'A0«v»}0 c -y, — Athens. 'ASuWfe, to Athens. wS, where 
 ZkuQm, — hence, ^ocvotej to Heaven. 
 cMwSev 1 , — above. %a/*at, on the ground. i-y 
 jtarwQsy, — beneath. &,w, above. 
 opmsQiv, from far off. xarwV, beneath. 
 Iv7iw0sy, — hence. cixxoQt, elsewhere. 
 o'Ucch, homewards, ^zto^v, between. 
 
 ccyXh J 
 
 &, 
 
 h 
 
 home. 
 
 TaVTV 
 07TS 
 
 thi3 way. 
 which way. 
 
 a^ t backwards, 
 Xitps, apart. 
 
 txipu., 
 
 Stvpo, hitherward. 
 
 > beyond. 
 
 aTag, enough. 
 «y«v, greatly. 
 txdxa, very much. 
 xiav, greatly. 
 cx^ov, almost. 
 poytc, scarcely. 
 ptXts'g hardly. 
 
 erw, \S0, Or 
 
 J so that. 
 
 3. Quantity, Quality, Manner, &c. 
 
 }w 
 
 ell. 
 
 fc'TWC, 
 El), 
 
 xax.%, ill. 
 QxvXug, badly 
 eto^, in vain. 
 •$«$, rashly. 
 
 orws^jj, hastily, 
 ^xa, gently. 
 svsc«> l for the 
 ^apjv, J sake of. 
 arf, whereas. 
 e^v, be it so. 
 opSSf, rightly. 
 aXr)9&!j, truly, 
 feesj verily. 
 
 -craAtv, J " °' 
 ra%fw?, quickly. 
 
 • , ■■ > > on iv. 
 
 WTTTSp, J jUOVOy, J 
 
 wis, thus, so, here. «W2c, not at all. 
 
 1 to no 
 p»Tnyj J purpose. 
 
 ,' j > bravely. 
 
 icr^wpw?, J * 
 
 bpoiuc, likewise. 
 tsea&npxX, publicly. 
 IQ'.Xovtw, willingly. 
 ay^pi,-*, manly. 
 avoltpavSa, clearly. 
 «rs, so that, 
 otiw?;, how, as if. 
 tfj.3, together. 
 
 « ' > even as. 
 
128 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 4. Affirming ; p)v, oV, truly ; ticx, a^y, certainly, be 
 it so ; olov, o?x, W, for as much as, oWa, iwVafiev, to wit, 
 namely. 
 
 5. Denying ; a, ax, «xl, juV, no, not ; «Te, ju*^e, neither 5 
 juhj, JjJtcb, no verily. 
 
 6. Doubting; h, tl, htj, or, if ; a^a, yea, rather; *<r&;j, 
 ri/;/oy, Tu'%a, perhaps. 
 
 7. Interrogation ; &<* t*, J/oti, t/ -etote, why ? for 
 
 what ? ivar;, avO' «v, wap o, wherefore ? «p* ju.ii, -etotf^ov, 
 
 whether ? if? yea or no ? 
 
 8. Preference; /u.£xXov, rather.; pa,\irct r I faugsrwf, espe- 
 cially, chiefly ; xai ptv $v, kuI yt, yea, likewise. 
 
 •k 
 
 9. Defect; <ra-apce. /xix§o>, (UKp3h7,. w.5 ett* to iso?u>\ near,, 
 almost, thereabout. 
 
 10. ABATEMENT; axpo&iyw?, xaTa /xixpoy, arptfiCK;, E7n£pa;£^, 
 by degrees, by little and little ; ^a\E7rw?, oW;$£p«j, appwrw?, 
 hardly, with difficulty. 
 
 11. Order; xa0£fv5?, in order; e*t«, a^ro T^Ttf, tsrop'p'^ 
 thereafter, from this time : to TsXEUTaToy, to cu'yoXoy, teAo?, to 
 so-gOToy, finally ; roc, vrara, lastly ; -crpwToy, in the first place ; 
 ^EUTEpoy, hvTzgvs, secondly, in the second place; Tprroy, Tp*T«s, 
 thirdly, &c. 
 
 Some Adverbs form comparison; as, fyovf/*«s> wisely, 
 
 ^poyiju-wTspwc, ^povtjuwTCCTwe ; ayw, upwards, aywTEpw, aywraTW ; 
 
 [xolxoc, grealy, /itaXXov, /uaAij-a; to^x v > swiftly, S&Tloy, T«^ir«; 
 w«, a little, ^rloy or ^<7<roy, n^To-i &C. 
 
 Some Adverbs have so near an affinity to one another, 
 that beginning with a Vowel they are Indefinitives, with s- 
 Intenogatives, and with t Redditives; as, ote or rwxa>. 
 when j ttote or 9rW/cor, when ? tote or T»mxa, then ; oQtv, 
 whence; sroOsv, from whence? tCQ», from thence; Sh, 
 
ADVERBS. 129 
 
 where, noQi, where ? to9i, there ; ocrov, as much as ; woo-ov, 
 how much ? roa-ov, so much ; olov, like as ; xoTov, what 
 like? to7ov, such like or such kind j oerax*?, often 5 ?ro<roxi?, 
 how often ? Too-ax;?, so often. 
 
 The Greek Adverbs are innumerable, and are generally 
 derived from other Parts of Speech. 1. From the Genitive 
 Plural of Nouns, &c. by changing w into vg ; as, cro^Sj, 
 wisely, from o-oftwv the Gen. of o-otpog, wise ; /Sap.'wj, gravely, 
 from /Sapgwv the Gen. of jSapuj, grave ; •ffpsvovlcag, decently, 
 from 9rprarov7wv the Gen. of wgevm, decent 5 cra<?>w? manifestly, 
 from <ra(pa5v the Gen. of o-a^7i\, manifest. 2. From the No- 
 minative Sing, by changing its termination into $ov ; as, 
 l[j.oQvpac!ov, unanimously, from o/xoSy^o?, unanimous ; uyeX^ov, 
 by flocks, from wytTw, a nock ; fioTpvSov, by clusters, from 
 jSoT^u?, a grape. 3. From the Neuter Gender of Adjectives j 
 as, tvQi), directly, ra%u\ quickly. 4. From Verbs ; as, Iffo 
 and apefrfc, successively, in order, from e|oj^«i the Fut. of 
 6^o/*a», to have 5 $«}, lo, behold, from elMu, to see ; Kpv€$w, 
 secretly, from k^vvtu, to hide. And some Verbs are taken 
 adverbially ; as, a,yt, dym, well, well, come on, the Im-- 
 perat. of ayw : Qep, suppose, for example, the Imperat. of 
 
 The Interjections are included among the Adverbs ; as, 
 1. Rejoicing j IS, io ! 2. Grieving; W, «, alas! at, 0*, 
 *w v , oh, woe is me ! 3. Wishing ; 0V» I wish ! 4. Reject- 
 ing ; cx.Ta.yi;> away with ! 5. Praising; six, ivy?, well done! 
 6. Admiring ; £»£«*, waTal, O strange ! 7- Threatening ; 
 Sou, woe to me ! 8. Calling; S, O ! 9. Shewing; $e, $£, 
 lo, behold ! 
 
 Adverbial Particles, used only in Composition : 
 
 "Privation, from aw, without, as aw- 
 ^oj, without water. 
 
 « or «, signifying < Increa f fror ? f™ much ' as **°* 
 ^ a j much wooded. 
 
 j Union, from a/*«, together, as ato^o?, 
 
 L a consort. 
 
 Av before a Consonant drops the v, as o,9c««to?, immortal, 
 
130. GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 The following signify increase : 
 
 api, from upu), to furnish. 
 fiw, from fiovg, an ox. 
 £§», from PptQvc, strong. 
 £a, from oao-vj, thick. 
 
 5^, from spu, to connect. 
 fa, iEolic, for £ta. 
 Xa, from \ictv, much. 
 Xi, the same. 
 
 Auj signifies difficulty, as ^vort,;^, to be unhappy. 
 Ne and »* signify privation, like the Latin ne, as mtens, 
 without pity. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Six are Monosyllables: eU, h or l|, i*, vpo 3 irpoj, o-i/'v. 
 
 Twelve Dissyllables : a/x<£>*, ava, avr), a7ro, $iu, fad, Kara, 
 (Airoc,, wa^a, Kt%\, vv\p, viro. 
 
 In composition, five of these increase the signification : 
 £*?, ex or e£, cruv, rsp}, Cwe^. 
 
 Six sometimes increase, and sometimes change: am, 
 cctto, &a, xaTa, ?rapa, Trpoj. 
 
 One diminishes : vttq.- 
 
 One changes : pna. 
 
 3 Of the Prepositions the three first are Atonies, without 
 an accent ; the rest are Oxytons. 
 
 There are eighteen separable Prepositions, viz. u*1) 9 
 a7ro, ex, -crpo, e», cuv, aya, Etj, dta, xara, /-tE/a, i/Trep, a,ix<pi, 
 WEp*, iTr*^ 'Erpos, 'nrapa, ^Tro. 
 
 'Av7<, aTro, Ix, vrpo govern the Genitive j Iv and <rvv the 
 Dative ; ava and as the Accusative j &a, xala, p7a, imp 
 the Genitive or Accusative ; <xp<pl, we§), est*, wpoj, wapa, £tto 
 the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 
 
 'AvJi, for, instead, on account of. 
 'Atto, from, by, for, since, out of. 
 'Ex, from, by, after, of or out of. 
 npo, before, in presence of. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 131 
 
 'Ev, in, among, with, by, into. 
 Zvv, with, together with. 
 'Ava, by, through, with, against. 
 Elc, to, towards, at, into, among. 
 Aioc, by, through, in, among. 
 Keel*, by, against, according to. 
 Mzlx, with, after, in, towards. 
 'YrEp, for, above, concerning. 
 'A/xsp*, about, concerning, near, 
 n^i, about, concerning, near. 
 '£*■;, in, upon, besides, near. 
 n^o<;, to, from, at, near, with. 
 ITapa, from, with, towards. 
 'T7ro, under, by, with, about. 
 
 I. The significations annexed to the Prepositions, as 
 above, are the most usual ; but some of them are some- 
 times englished otherwise 5 as, 
 
 1. 'Av7J sometimes signifies by, before, above ; as, oV/i 
 
 V01S, by what means ? otyrl x.a>c«v airoivTUV xav ayocdov ho\ 
 
 r^sifjiviv, 1 prefer one good man before, or above, all the 
 bad men in the world. 
 
 2. 'Ex. sometimes signifies with ; as, Ik y.<ylruv a-v^o^v f 
 with vast loss. 
 
 3. n^o, for or instead of ; as, too Tot'iSos Samv, to die 
 for his child. 
 
 4. 'Ev sometimes signifies before, under, for, of, or con- 
 cerning ; as, ev roTg ^>carot:, before the judges ; ?> t^W 
 vtxtoic, under these Consuls; iv t*5 To\v\6yix. av-rSv, for 
 their much speaking ; Iv C HX*«, of or concerning Elias. 
 
 5. 'Ava, about, on or upon ; as, ava j*wpi»Ta$ $vv f about 
 two measures each; ava fivfAQis, upon the altars: with a 
 Dat. or Abl. instead of the Ace. 
 
 6. *£*?, for, against, about; as, dc rov cclZvx, forever; 
 ih rov $r,ij.ov, against the people ; tU 'Uotrov, about an hundred, 
 
 7. A;a, before or in presence of, for, with, because or on 
 account of ; as, hot toXXudi p.«pTv'pwv, before many witnesses ; 
 hot o-sixvto, ypciQu, I write these things for you; ha. fA.iha.mi, 
 with ink; h' a^apnav because, or on account of sin. 
 
132 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 8. Kara, sometimes signifies on account of, at, before, 
 towards, upon, throughout, concerning ; as, ovx. on x.«,r' 
 vrqnra Xsy», not that I speak on account of want j xar' 
 cp%«^, iu, or at the beginning ; k«t» vfoo-uvov ira^m xduv, 
 before the face of all people 5 xara \i£a, 7 towards the 
 South-east 5 xara y«s xaS^at, I sit upon the ground ; xaS 1 
 oKus Ttis la^aiaj, throughout all Judea ; r» *«*•* ITaCXov, the 
 things concerning Paul. 
 
 9. Mto, within, or on, during; as, per' ey^ouv r'/x/pav, 
 within or on the eighth day ; (xetoc tqv Giov, during life. 
 Sometimes it is used by the Poets with a Dative, and sig- 
 nifies among 5 as, /xeto. Bg^rotat^ among the first. 
 
 10. 'Tarep, on the side or part of ; beyond or more than ; 
 Swep »fjLt£» Er*Vj he is on our side or part ; vvlf I/xe, more 
 than me. 
 
 11. 'A/x(pl, towards, for the sake of; as, otp<p' SxaeXa-ou 
 'AjpUasg to diive the Greeks towards the sea; a^fi 'oSve-nog, 
 for the sake of Ulysses. 
 
 12. Tl^h towards, for, or for the sake of; as, n k^I 
 Geas iveeiQsio., piety towards the Gods ; mfi xoXXuy ix^u^svov, 
 shed for many. 
 
 13. n^os, among, according to, towards, or near, mean- 
 ing of time 5 as, are «rufjT«v ^pc? uineq, so that they ques- 
 tioned among themselves ; Tpo? r$v ax»'0«av, according to 
 the truth ; t» tt^qc eipinn, conditions of, or concerning 
 peace 5 wgos emn&n Wl, it is towards evening. 
 
 14. n«fi, for, or on account of 5 besides, or except; 
 against, or contrary to ; as, 7rap 5 hoc «v0^w7ro>, for, on ac- 
 count of one man ; Trapa vov Kelp&ov, besides, or than that 
 which is laid ; -rago. rov v6[j.ov, against, or contrary to the 
 law. Also above, or in preference to; as, rj/^pav xa,^ "r^av, 
 one day above another ; at, or in the time of: as, vaga. to 
 ^cittvov, at, or in the time of supper ; through or during ; 
 as, nag oXov tov /S*ov, during the whole time of life j through, 
 as, 7:0,% avow to pgat-Kvpo*, through the whole army. 
 
 II. Many of the Prepositions require sometimes to be 
 englished by circumlocution ; as, ol ano rni vTcCldac, consu- 
 lar men 5 ol xar' ayo^av, pleaders 5 avx. ^moi^iov '{XaQov, they 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 133 
 
 received every man a penny $ Ik irepoSu, round about ; kxt 
 '/<W, apart, separate ; ol koct Ipl, those of my age ; apty 7 
 upoHriv Ictvo-oLTo teJ%ec6 koCKw, he put on his fine armour ; 
 ocrro six.0%^ improbable ; 3*' utpixnccs tIQeg-Qcu, to appropriate, 
 or turn a thing to one's own use. 
 
 'Ex, and o,ko often signify the same thing. Also ot,p$\ and 
 k^I have often the same signification 5 and several of the 
 other Prepositions are sometimes used for one another. 
 
 III. The Adverbs Znv, x u fc> Ifw, and hro?, are often 
 used for absque, sine, or extra ; ^sVafu is sometimes used 
 for inter ; h%g for intus or intra , vsgot or ve§oo> 3 for trans or 
 ultra ; w%pi or »x§Ut for tenus j and AaS^a, for clam. They 
 all govern the Genitive ; as, 
 
 "Anv Xoya, without the word. 
 X«§ls $£ji*8X<«, without a foundation. 
 'Ex<^ ccpTreXcDvos, out of the vineyard. 
 3 Ekto$ t« n crufxarog, without the body. 
 Metu^v aWriXuv, among themselves. 
 'Evto? teix^s, within the walls. 
 'Evrog t5 TTorajuy, on this side the river. 
 ITf^av 'iySSv, beyond the Indians. 
 'Apcpi T«ra t« \6yx, until this word. 
 Aa0§a >fjuwv, unknown to us. 
 
 IV. 5 E| is used for Ik when a vowel follows j lyi is used 
 for ev by the Poets ; kA is sometimes joined with a Dative 
 by the Poets ; and the Attics use U for hg. Also Ivto? is 
 sometimes joined with a Dative by the Poets ; as, Ivrog 
 viuv, among you. Palam, openly, is expressed by Trs^tpoi- 
 vu$ ; and k^vQcc, or xpu£5nv is sometimes used (instead of 
 Aa9§a) for clam, without the knowledge of. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 I. 'Avrt, kxo, £*<*, xara, Tra^a, either augment or change 
 the signification of the simple word - } as, 
 
 N 
 
134 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 'Avra^oc, preferable. "Avtiweijlwq, to send back. 
 
 'A^oTEiyw, to extend. 'Asro^avSavw, to forget. 
 
 Arxy-xZ, to laugh at. AiasrtrS, to disbelieve. 
 
 K»t eo-9/w, to devour. Kotratyoveu, to despise. 
 
 Ucc^y.£d\\u), to throw far. Uix^yo^oc, 2, law-breaker. 
 
 II. 'Fac, If, truY, arsg*, V7r/f, augment the signification, 
 and vt:o diminisheth ; as, 
 
 'Ehtoikxu, to hear plainly. U<fiKcl\\n$ } very handsome. 
 
 'Exl-upou, to be amazed. 'Ysr^a/vo/xa^tobestarkmad. 
 
 'EitvmrehZ, to finish com- 'Tvo^sl^u, to be somewhat 
 
 pletely. afraid. 
 
 III. Tloog generally augments ; as, ^oc-Trao-^w, to be 
 much affected ; and sometimes diminisheth ; as, 7r«oo-acrro- 
 (xou, to touch slightly. 
 
 IV. 5 A^1 either retains its own signification in compo- 
 sition, or denotes doubtfulness or ambiguity ; as, <%p$i- 
 GotWu, to throw or cast about, to embrace j »^i,Qaim t to 
 go about ; a,fxQi€o\os, doubtful or ambiguous. 
 
 V. Usol either augments the signification, as, we&xfosi 
 very glad ; or it retains its own, as, vtprpQw, to turn 
 about, &c. 
 
 VI. TI=o generally retains its own signification, as, sge- 
 x'-yu, to foretell ; s-pof'rupj to put before, or place over 
 others ; ^oX«./xCava;, to pre-occupy, &c. 
 
 VII. 5 Ava implies elevation; as, ava£a.«r«, to look up ; 
 avaTiSjjpi, to hang up. It also often corresponds to the in- 
 separable Preposition re of the Latins, as, wccGoiWu, to 
 retard, to delay ; a.'ta.Xa.pGa.vu, to resume, &c. 
 
 VIII. 'Ev imports the state, disposition, or situation of a 
 thing, and corresponds with the Latin m, as, eyvumu, in- 
 cumbit, it threatens, or it is imminent j IpGclxhu, injicio 
 to throw or cast in or upon ; hovrXog, armatus, armed. 
 
 IX. 'Etti generally retains its own signification, as, Im 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 135 
 
 T&nfu, to put or lay upon ; ImQulvw, to appear bright, to 
 shine upon ; Imxeipw, to take in hand : sometimes it aug- 
 ments, as, etto^i/vo?, whatever causes an additional pain : 
 sometimes it diminishes, as, IttIxwkoc, whitish or somewhat 
 white, &c. 
 
 Two, three, or more Prepositions are often joined to- 
 gether in the same word, as, 
 
 Tlxpz^tYi[jLt, to go further. 3 'Avn7T£oxaTaAa ( u'oay<y , to anti- 
 
 'AvTtvx^irifji.t, to pursue. cipate. 
 
 'EwWr*y**,9 to stir up. 'Avrtwot^dyu, to lead against. 
 
 AiawoXAvp, to destroy. 
 
 'Am, in composition, not only either changes or aug- 
 ments its signification, as has been said above, but also im- 
 ports contrariety or opposition, as, aiiO/p^**. to resist or 
 oppose j avTi^ixos, an adversary, &c. In like manner A»« 
 and xctTa, though they often either augment or change 
 their signification, yet 5*» also signifies transition or pass- 
 ing over, as, JiasrXsw, to pass or sail over ; and x»t« signi- 
 fies downwards, as, kcctxQo^.oj, to bring down ; wto&ctUw* 
 to descend or come down. Also av» in composition often 
 signifies back or again, as, avayysAXw, to bring back word; 
 «v«f««, to regain, &c. 
 
 INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 There are twelve inseparable Prepositions j a«», e^t, /S5, 
 
 j§pT, da, £a, \a, At, a, dVc, vh, yjj. 
 
 1. "A|*, ep*j |85, /%:, d\x, fa, Aa, At, augment the signi- 
 fication, as, 
 
 ocoiTTiK^oc, very bitter. oapoivo?, greedy of slaughter. 
 
 sfiCpo/Aoc, roaring loudly. tyQug, most divine. 
 
 /9aXtj*»a», to be very hungry. Aapcavn, a great bason. 
 
 @ptvinvoe, heard from afar. Aj7roy»po?, very wicked. 
 
136 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 2. 'A denotes, 1. Privation, as, a,6p»roq, invisible ; c 2. 
 increase, as, ktevyis, very attentive ; 3. collection, as Sneac, 
 all together j 4. it sometimes makes no change in the sig- 
 nification, as, ur»x v ^» the same as ra%u?, an ear of corn. 
 
 3. Ns and vri signify privation, as, vswohs, having no 
 feet, vyiXbv)^ unmerciful. 
 
 A, signifying privation, comes from avzv, without ; sig- 
 nifying increase, from ayav, greatly ; and when it signifies 
 collection, it comes from a,^%, together. 
 
 SUMMARY VIEW OF PREPOSITIONS, WITH 
 EXAMPLES OF THEIR CASES. 
 
 Ay.Ql, de Gen. Dat. circa Gen. Ace. 
 
 Ava, cum Dat. per vel inter Ace. 
 
 'Avrl, pro Gen. 
 
 Atto, ab Gen. contra vel procul ab Gen. 
 
 Ata, per Gen. Ace. propter Ace. 
 
 Ek, ad vel in Ace. 
 
 'Ex. ante consonam, e| ante vocalem, ex vel a Gen. 
 
 'Ev, in Dat. 
 
 'Ewt, super vel m Gen. Dat. Ace. ad Dat. Ace. 
 
 Kara, adversus Gen. secundum Ace. de Gen. sm6 Gen. 
 per Gen. Ace. 
 
 MsTa, cmwi vel in^er Gen. Dat. Ace. per Ace. post Ace. 
 
 riaga, apwd \e\juxta Gen. Dat. Ace. a6 Gen. prater vel 
 contra Ace. sz^pra vel w/^ra Ace. 
 
 TT.^1, circa Dat. Ace. de Gen. Dat. prce Gen. 
 
 ITpo, pro Gen. ante Gen. 
 
 n^os, ad Ace. ab Gen. per in jurando Gen. 
 
 2u\, cmwj Dat. 
 
 f T7r^ ; pro Gen. swper Gen. Ace. 
 
 'Ytto, sw& Gen. Dat. Ace. ab idem valet ac s«o agentis. 
 
( 137 ) 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 A Conjunction is a Part of Speech which joins words or 
 sentences together, and thereby shews the dependence of 
 the word or sentence upon another. Some are called, 
 
 1. Copulative j kou, t), »$e, vph, and; x«* $), and. 
 
 2. Disjunctive; as, v, %toi, sirs, yyxv, whether, ei- 
 ther, or. 
 
 3. Concessive ; as, xav, Kufaep, si kcc\, although, be 
 it so. 
 
 4. Adversative ; as, aAXa, ^, but ; y\, ph, aXkoc p?\, 
 indeed ; aXAa xal uq, ko\ pyv, aXka, o^ux;, nevertheless. 
 
 5. Casual; as, yap, for; *va, onus, that; eifap; isret* if 
 indeed, since ; IwM, IwuStiwsp, whereas, forasmuch as. 
 
 6. Conclusive; as, apa, §v 3 therefore; 'Stomp, where- 
 fore ; roiwv, likewise ; TotyapSv, therefore. 
 
 7. Conditional; as, $1, av, lav, viv, if ; si $), vv $\, but 
 if j fj.sx? k r %> whilst; oi^xpU av, "suq <x,v, until, &C. 
 
 8. Expletives, or particles used only for ornament, or 
 the filling up of a discourse; as, wsp, ye, to), pa, 9sv, vt), and 
 among the Poets, tts, 7rw, ap\ 
 
 Note. Two or more negative particles serve to enforce 
 the negation, as, uSswort &$sv « /W yswrai tuv h6vTuy f no- 
 thing that is necessary will ever be done. 
 
 n3 
 
( 138 ) 
 
 PART III. 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The Article, when it differs from the English, is 
 found in a general or indefinite sense, and even before pro- 
 per names - 3 as, 
 
 Tm sig*iv*iv vouTarQai, Demosth. to make peace: 
 "EQv o Sw)cpaT>ij, Xen. Socrates said. 
 
 But eyen in these instances a peculiar emphasis is often 
 implied: thus *J elpvivy may signify the peace desired; 6 2m- 
 
 Kpolrni;, the great philosopher. 
 
 Note. — Xenophon frequently omits the Article ; as, uSikh 
 2.uKoo(,Tvg, Memor. but never with e$*j or sins. 
 
 2. It is freqnently joined to a Participle ; as, 
 'O <puX«TTwy, Herod, the guarding, i. e. he who guards. 
 The Article is sometimes dropped by the Poets, and the 
 
 Participle is used alone, as tvpuv, Pind. the inventor ; k^m- 
 tej, Theoc. the reapers. 
 
 3. The Article in the Neuter Gender, before a Genitive, 
 signifies elliptically possession or relation; as, 
 
 c O ©fo? t« ruiv a,v9^7raiv SioikeT, Isoc. God directs the affairs 
 of men. 
 
 Sometimes the ellipsis is supplied, as, ra twv ©nQcciuv 
 
 TViocy^ara, kockuh; e^e*, IsOC. 
 
 In some cases the relation between the Article and the 
 Noun folio wing is so close, that the distinction of theproperty 
 
SYNTAX. ARTICLE. THE NOMINATIVE. 139 
 
 and the thing itself is scarcely perceptible, as t» rrfs tu;pft 
 o%eiois l^a to.? pna£o\a,i, Fortune Aas sudden revolutions . 
 Thus to e/xov, m ?/*», are sometimes equivalent to lyu, &c. 
 
 The Plural Article, followed by a/x<pl and mp} with a pro- 
 per name, signifies attendants, or the party, as, o£ a^pi np/- 
 a/^ov, Horn, meaning" the attendants of Priam. 
 
 The Article has a peculiar construction in this elliptical 
 form before an Accusative and an Infinitive Mood, as, to 
 
 %ai£Eiv rotg lAipypcKri ttoIvtcls, crv'y,<Pvrov ro7g a,v9gtv7?on; ectti, Arist. 
 
 This circumstance, that all should delight in imitations, is 
 natural to men. 
 
 THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 1. A Neuter Plural is generally joined with a Verb Sin- 
 gular *} as, 
 "Ao-rpa. Qalvereu, Homer, Stars appear. 
 
 As a Noun of multitude Singular may be followed by a 
 Verb Plural, so a Neuter Plural being taken in a collective 
 sense may more readily be followed by a Verb Singular. 
 Thus, when Homer says Sovpu <rs<rme, he means the collection 
 of planks and timber, with which the ships were constructed. 
 
 The Plural Noun, however, is sometimes also Masculine 
 and Feminine, but then it is always used in a collective 
 sense ; as, kx^m hptyoti pTuwy, Pindar. 
 
 <2. A Dual Nominative is sometimes joined with a Verb 
 Plural, and in prose this construction is general ; as, 
 
 "Ajia^w xiyovai, Herodotus, both say. 
 
 In the same manner a Dual Substantive, as it signifies 
 more than one, may have an Adjective Plural. The Verb 
 or Adjective, however, can seldom be of the Dual number, 
 when the Noun implies more than two. 
 
 * In the Doric and Ionic Dialects, the Singular or Plural Verb 
 followed the Neuter Plural Nominative ; the Attic restricted the 
 Verb to the Singular, except in some instances, of which animals 
 are the subject. 
 
140 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1. The matter, of which a thing is made, is put in the 
 Genitive ; as, 
 
 Toy SlQpov iTrolno-tv »V^yp£y fi/Xwy, Xen. He built the chariot 
 of strong wood. 
 
 2. The quantity, or measure of a thing, is put in the Ge- 
 nitive ; as, 
 
 Aixkoo-'iuv 7ro$u>v, Thucydides. 
 
 This Genitive is governed by ix and wo^ sometimes ex- 
 pressed, as, T£T»yn*E»« If oc^dfjiavTo^ Theocr. 
 
 3. Words signifying 'plenty and want are followed by a 
 Genitive j as, 
 
 nxouo-ios jcax&Jy, Eurip. Full of evils.. 
 <bl\w e§n/xof, Eurip. Destitute of friends. 
 
 4. Pari of time is put in the Genitive ; as, 
 ©Igqus te xal xh(awvos, Xen. In summer and winter. 
 
 This is governed by lvr\, sometimes expressed, as Ut s 
 $iiipvs, Her. When the Dative is used, it is governed by b 
 understood, and sometimes expressed ; h ru awu $*pu. 
 r rhuc. 
 
 5. Comparatives are followed by a Genitive; as, 
 
 'Avagxiaq ju-eV^bv ovx. serri Kotxcy, Sophocles, There is no 
 greater evil than anarchy. 
 
 This Genitive is governed by ocvrl or itpo : thus p/fov »vrl 
 tv><; irdrgaq, Soph. Than after a Comparative is often ex- 
 pressed by r,, as, t* ysyotr' ay Epilog (jleT^ov, y QiXog xccxoc. Soph. 
 
 6. Cost or vafa/e, crime or punishment, difference or emi- 
 nence, are put in the Genitive ; as, 
 
 Aoj oivrov rj/A^y ^pa^urK, Anacreon, Giue /iiwi to us for nine 
 
 * This is governed by am, as aXXaTTsaQa* tivi rpop&s ear] vo/aIs- 
 fAturos, Arist. Sometimes the Dative is used ; <np't*<r§*i @ow], Lucian. 
 
SYNTAX. THE GENITIVE. 141 
 
 rpatpo^ai o-s juot^s/a?, Lysias, I accuse you of adultery*. 
 Aia,QEf-uvTuva,x\m, Plato, Different from the others. 
 Xdppa, Kavruv ivca^ov, Pindar, A joy surpassing all. 
 
 7- Verbs signifying the senses or the passiojis, are fol- 
 lowed by a Genitive ; as, 
 
 Tuiv fjLc&pTvpM axnxoaTE, Isoc. You have heard the viitnesses. 
 T/j ovk ccv a,ycx.<ra,iTo Tm GcpeTris, Dem. Who would not ad- 
 mire virtue? 
 
 To Ipav tuiv o-ojQpovuv, iEschines, To love the modest. 
 
 Many of these are frequently, and those of seeing, are 
 always, found with an Accusative ; as, op£ rov xou^ov, Isoc. 
 
 'Axov'u, signifying to hear onesself called, or simply to be 
 called, has the construction of Verbs of existence, as out 1 
 aWo-o^at xctKot;, Soph. It is often used with the zv, x.ccku>s, 
 and kccXus, and followed by vtto or itapa with a Genitive, as, 
 
 KCCKWq OCKOVStV VTCO TUJV TToXlTUIV, IsOC. 
 
 To these may be added Verbs signifying to abstain, to 
 ask, to attain, to begin, to care, to cease, to command, to 
 conquer, to despise, to differ, to endeavour, to fill, to neglect, 
 to remember, to restrain, to separate, to share, to spare; and 
 in general those which imply of or from, and may be fol- 
 lowed by Ik and »vri. But many of these are found with 
 other cases. 
 
 8. A Noun and Participle are put absolute in the Geni- 
 tive ; as, 
 
 'Kxlov tsXXovtoi;, Soph, the sun rising. 
 
 This construction may in general be considered as ex- 
 pressing the cause of the event, which is the subject of the 
 sentence. It is governed by U, Inl, or utto understood, and 
 sometimes expressed, o,v<toIvtm uV c A^atwv, Horn. 
 
 From this solution it will follow that the case absolute 
 will vary according to the nature of the Prepositions which 
 govern it. Hence we find the Dative and the Accusative in 
 that sense j as, Au <yj Ts§7n>c*pauv« ^wojuevw, Horn, evidently 
 
 * This is governed by mp), as, liuxu ere ire pi Qacvdrov, Xen. These 
 words are sometimes put in the Dative, (^//uwa-avTor invrnKovrcx ret- 
 XavTots. Her. 
 
142 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 governed by vvro. The Attics often use the Accusative go- 
 verned by a Preposition understood, as, iikv el Qxvsvt ueXt- 
 t», Soph. Thus the three cases, with which Prepositions 
 are joined, may be used absolutely : in some writers they 
 are used promiscuously, even in the same sentence. 
 
 To the Accusative must be referred most of those in- 
 stances, which are said to be in the Nominative, as 5eo», 
 ifov, vtaflv, &c. Those which are really in the Nominative 
 may be construed upon common principles. In other in- 
 stances a Verb must be understood. 
 
 9. Exclamations of grief and surprise are put in the Ge- 
 nitive ; as. 
 
 TZq fAupiccc, Aristoph. What folly ! 
 
 Ol'juot is often prefixed, as, olpoi tuv xockuv, Arist. i. e. eW«. 
 
 10. The Genitive is often governed by a Substantive or 
 Preposition understood ; as, 
 
 ITiE?v vScztos, Her. (yJpoc und.) To drink some water. 
 
 Maxapio? rife tv'^u?, Aristoph. (zveko, und.) Happy by his 
 fortune, 
 
 Mue-^oa; woSos viy, Soph. (Ix. und.) Having seized him by 
 the foot. 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 This case is generally used as the Dative, and sometimes 
 as the Ablative, in Latin. It expresses the object to which 
 the action is directed, or for which it is intended. It im- 
 plies acquisition and loss. It is placed after dpi, &c. in the 
 sense of habeo, and after verbs signifying likeness, agree- 
 ment, trust, resistance, relation, &c. It follows verbs com- 
 pounded with avTi, h, IttI, 7ra,%a, TTpos, <tvv, vivo. It is fre- 
 quently governed by h, Ik), <tvv, or some other Preposition, 
 understood. 
 
 1. The instrument and manner of an action are put in the 
 D:itive : as, 
 
SYNTAX. THE DATIVE. 143 
 
 Apyupsats Xoy^ato-t y&xpv, x.a,i kccytoc K^ocr^crHc , Oracle to 
 Philip, Fight with silver weapons, and you will conquer the 
 world. 
 
 "HXtxas fi$Ei KCU. tmtye ^oXw, Horn, He struck him with a 
 sword, and killed him by stratagem. 
 
 Instead of the Dative, the Prepositions &«, h, \it\, Kara, 
 are sometimes used with their proper cases, as IvaipffQai Inl 
 wXovtw, Xen. 
 
 To this rule may be referred the excess or deficiency of 
 
 measure, as avQgojvw (Accxgw d^arog, Her. 
 
 2. Neuter Adjectives in tov, tbov, and noc, govern the Per- 
 son in the Dative, and the Thing in the case of the Verb, 
 from which they are derived 5 as, 
 
 T* av avrw wowrsoy uvi, Xen. What must he do ? 
 l T[j.7v rccvra, vpaxriov, Dem. You must do these things. 
 
 These Adjectives imply necessity, and have the force of 
 the Latin Gerund. 
 
 They sometimes agree with the Substantives, as a>§nrsoq 
 
 vovg, Soph. 
 
 3. c O auroj, the same, is followed by a Dative j as, 
 
 Isoc. Those who conceal, are deserving of the same punish- 
 ment as those who commit a fault. 
 
 Euv is here understood. 
 
 4. Verbs signifying to accompany or follow, to blame, 
 to converse, to pray, to use, are followed by a Dative, as, 
 
 Tic vrm etovto, Horn. Him ships followed. 
 
 TTkttoi)? wyou tou v s rot? a>[j.oi^rocvoy,evoig ETrmjuwyras, Plutarch, 
 Think those faithful who reprove your faults. 
 
 Yo<Po7<; bfjuXuv, Kavrog ix&io-si <ro®o>, Menander, Associating 
 with the wise, you yourself will become wise. 
 
 Evx&Qou Att, Hesiod, To praz/ £0 GotZ. 
 
 npc£c6T0i$ '^gijo-Oa^Xen. To M*e sfoep. 
 
 Asopou requires a Genitive of the Person ; as, hyo-opou. 
 iifAuv, iEsch. 
 
 Many Verbs have a Dative of the person, and a Genitive 
 
144 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 of the thing ; as, x{A<Pi<T < or)Tw, xoivwvEW, /ASTa^wjiu, ju,ET£%w, crvy- 
 
 yivwo-KO), $Qovw -, and the Impersonate, &r, \Axh, ^rx^ixn, 
 
 fxsTEO-Tk, 7rpoo-r,x.tk ', as, uv lyu aoi ov <p§ovYicrw, Xen. <jo\ nxiouv n 
 
 tfet, Eurip. But this Genitive may easily be referred to the 
 government of a Preposition or a Noun. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The Accusative seems to be the favourite case of the At- 
 tics, who frequently use it for the Genitive and the Dative. 
 
 As in Latin, Verbs oientrtating, concealing, and teaching, 
 govern two Accusatives, Verbs Neuter also often assume 
 an active signification. Both are followed by an Accusative 
 of their own signification. 
 
 1. Distance and space are put in the Accusative ; as, 
 
 v E<p«7oc x7c=x H <*7ro Zap^Ewv Tptwv Yifxipuv o^ov, Xen. Ephesus is 
 distant from Sardis three days" journey. 
 
 2. The Accusative is of universal use, with xara under- 
 stood ; or with Six, ti? 3 wegl, or 7rpo$; h«t<* being the most ge- 
 neral, as it embraces the parts, qualities, and relations ; Six 
 being applied to the cause, and rig, mpl, and w^o? being ap- 
 plied to motion ; as, 
 
 Anvog pxxw> iEschylus, Terrible in fight. 
 
 TLEiguJ t6 jjlsv crw/xcs sivxi tyiXoirovoq, rr,v Se -^v^viv (piXoVo^o?, 
 Isoc. Endeavour to be in body fond of labour, and in mind a 
 lover of wisdom. 
 
 These Prepositions are sometimes expressed, as, *$ kxtx 
 
 crus^x ycxTiog, kxtx vovv 5' xv ioriv xpoffloc, Epigr. 
 
 3. The Accusative sometimes appears in the beginning 
 of a sentence, without a regimen expressed, as rouVEX^vas 
 
 ovSiv axtytg XtytTXi, Xen. 
 
 4. Verbs signifying to do, or speak well or ill, to give or 
 
 
SYNTAX. THE ACCUSATIVE. 145 
 
 take away, to admonish, to clothe, govern an Accusative of 
 the Person, and another of the Thing, one of these Accusa- 
 tives being governed by x«t* understood ; as, 
 
 TLoXXcx. ayaOa rnv vox™ Itto^cte, Isoc. He conferred many 
 services on the city. 
 
 'E'lpyoca-y.ui kclkol tov oIkov, Thuc. I have done evil to the 
 house. 
 
 'Axocrripu [as tcc ^p^ara, Isoc. He deprives me of my pro- 
 perty. 
 
 Tavrcl <rt v7rofjuy.vy<Tx.v, Thuc. I remind you of these things. 
 
 1L\[xxtcI jus Ifs^uo-av, Horn. They stripped me of my clothes. 
 
 To the Accusative of the thing are frequently substituted 
 the Adverbs tv, xaXwj, xaxw? ; as TTocpovTca; ph Tovg <QiXov$ h? 
 sv TrpcirTEiv, ccttovtcci; $e tvXoynv, Epict. The Verb alone, im- 
 plying treatment, may have the same construction, as Zsv'j 
 
 {AS TCXAiT tfycKTSV, Al'lStOph. 
 
 Verbs of adjuring and swearing are also found with two 
 Accusatives, as o^lty o-s ovpuvov, Orpheus. 
 
 A change of Voice implies a change in the Case of the 
 Person, but the Case of the Thing is preserved ; as wms% srXe- 
 7<rrx 5i3^y£TOu'u£0a, Xen. SoJ/AOSTiov Ik$v6[aivo<;, Dem. 
 
 THE ADNOUN. 
 
 1 . An Adjective of the Masculine Gender is sometimes 
 found with a Feminine Substantive ; as, 
 
 Tw yuvaTxs, Xenophon, The two women. 
 
 The Attic construction is used in order to generalize the 
 sense, as ®so$ and Deus are applied to both sexes for a di- 
 vine, wQpuxos and homo for a human person. Perhaps also 
 this form is adopted to dignify the female sex. On this 
 principle, when a woman speaks of herself in the Plural 
 Number, a mode of speech adopted by the great, she uses 
 the Masculine Gender. This mode is confined to the Dual 
 and Plural. The Masculine Article is joined with a Femi- 
 nine Noun in the Dual only. The Dual appears to have 
 
 o 
 
146 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 been originally common in gender in the Nominative and 
 Accusative. 
 
 Compound and Derivative Adjectives in oj are considered 
 by the Attic writers as of two terminations, consequently 
 used as Feminine as well as Masculine. 
 
 Comparatives and Superlatives of three terminations 
 sometimes express the Feminine by the Masculine ter- 
 mination, as a7ro|wTEpo? 11 Xy^is, Thucydides. 
 
 When the Adjective is put in the Neuter after a different 
 Gender, xpV a * s understood, SpQov « aXn'0»a, Soph. The 
 ellipsis is sometimes supplied, as ri x% *>/*« 3paV»?, Soph. 
 
 2. The Substantive is often changed into a Genitive Plu- 
 ral, preceded by a Pronoun or an Article ; as, 
 
 Oi ayaOoi ruv av^pwv, Isocrates, Honourable men. 
 
 This construction is also found, in Attic writers, in the 
 singular, as rnv w^eierw t*js a-T^ocnac, Thuc. 
 
 In the Greek idiom the Genitive of the Personal is used 
 instead of the Possessive Pronouns, as tiJ» /*>iTEpa [i.ov rivals, 
 Xen. You honour my mother. But the latter are some- 
 times found with the article, particularly in the orators, as 
 
 rviv o/xovoiav t>iv C/xETEpav oi xoXXol fUTovcrij IsOC. 
 
 3. A Substantive is sometimes used as an Adjective j as, 
 TXua-a-ocv 'EXXciSoc. &&»&, Her. He taught the Greek lan- 
 guage. 
 
 Here IxXxg may be considered as an Adjective used as a 
 Substantive. 
 
 4. Adjectives are frequently employed alone, taking the 
 place of a Substantive, as oi iroXXoi, r* I^a, &c. 
 
 THE RELATIVE. 
 
 1 . The Relative often agrees with its antecedent in case, 
 by attraction j as, 
 
 5 Ev t«Tj EopTaff, uU viyofxev, Aristophanes, In the festivals, 
 which we celebrated. 
 
SYNTAX. THE RELATIVE. 147 
 
 This is called attraction, because the Antecedent attracts 
 the Relative into its case. 
 
 The Relative, in this construction, sometimes precedes 
 the Substantive ; as, cn)y y *x H $ $vvu[ah, Xen. 
 
 2. The Article is poetically used for the Relative j as 
 
 TTar^, o <r hptty, Horn. Your father, who educated you. 
 
 The Article is often put for outo? and exe*vqj. as o y&g 
 (3et<ri\r,i x°*-u^U, Horn. In this sense 6 or o may be consi- 
 dered as the Nominative of the Personal Pronoun ov. 
 
 The Relative also sometimes bears the same significa- 
 tion, as » ¥-c$. Plato, And he said. 
 
 VERBS PASSIVE. 
 
 1. Verbs of a Passive signification are followed by a Ge- 
 nitive governed by vtto, aw, Ik, vuga,, or wpo? y as, 
 
 'O vovg vtio o'ivov &»$$&*&&, Iscc. The undcTitunumg h im- 
 paired by wine. 
 
 TeQvvjxsv vty'-vpuv, Xen. He vms killed by you. 
 
 2. The Preposition is often understood ; as, nVrccc-Qai t«v • 
 
 crvptyoguv, ISOC. 
 
 Some Verbs, which in the Active are followed by the 
 Genitive or Dative of the person, and the Accusative of the 
 thing, are preceded in the Passive by the Nominative of the 
 
 person ; as, ol twv 'AQwotivv l7ri,TSTga,[jt.[ji.svoi tyvXawv, Thuc. 
 They who were intrusted with the defence of the Athenians; 
 or, they to whom the defence of the Athenians was intrusted. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. The Infinitive Mood is used to express the cause or 
 end of an action ; as, 
 
 T<5 cr<?>w£ luv/rjxs ji*«^£o-0«t. Horn. Who induced them to 
 fight ? 
 
 o2 
 
148 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 2. The Pronoun Accusative, before the Infinitive, is fre- 
 quently omitted -, as, 
 
 "E$n £jte?v (socvrov und.) Plato, He said that he was in- 
 quiring. 
 
 The Infinitive Mood and the preceding Verb, generally, 
 but not always, relate to the same person j el hs o~ov Xa£o- 
 
 /x5?0£ £*jto ho-puiTygiov liroLyoi, tydcnim txhxuv (<x\ und.) Plato. 
 
 3. The Infinitive is often preceded or followed by a No- 
 minative; as, 
 
 2o^>oxX»j$ e<P»j, ayroj ju,sv otouj dEt, ttoisiv, Evpi7r$n<; d\ f olol ita-t, 
 
 Arist. Sophocles said, that he made men such as they ought to 
 be ; Euripides, such as they are. 
 "EQnare <pl\o$ ehou, Plutarch, He said that he was a friend. 
 
 4. Instead of the Infinitive preceded by the Accusative, 
 the Indicative preceded by or* or *s is commonly used j as, 
 
 TvuQt on lyu ocXriQn Xsyu, Xen. Know that I speak the truth. 
 Aeyu u$ Ikuvos ov woXe/ae?, Dem. I say that he does not make 
 war. 
 
 "On and w? are really Pronouns : the former the Neuter 
 of oa-Tic, riV;? ; the latter the same as oc, in an adverbial 
 form. This will clearly explain the construction, yvZQi. 
 or*, lyA uXyiQv xiyw ; know that I speak the truth. Aiyu w> 
 ikuvos ov ko\£[ah, I say that or thus, he does not make war. 
 It is not necessary that r*s should be always joined with o?. 
 
 Sometimes on is added to strengthen the force of ano- 
 ther Pronoun ; as, aAX 5 ovv I'ywy ov vuvaopui, tovt iVQ' on, 
 Aristoph. 
 
 The Greeks in narration frequently use the Present 
 tense, when on introduces the words of the person, who 
 is the subject of the narrative. 
 
 "Or* sometimes signifies to the end that. Here the full 
 expression is 3*a on, for that, for this. The two words 
 often coalesce, and become h&n, — Sometimes on signifies 
 elliptically what is the reason that; as, e 5 *W on roa-crov 
 Ixvo-olto 6o:£og 'AtoXXuv, Horn. Here the full expression is 
 uTToi n la-nv oClnov on, let him say what is the reason for thin, 
 Phoebus is so enraged ; or h* on. — It is likewise frequently 
 used for because, and is there too governed by &*, for this 
 reason. 
 
 
 
SYNTAX. — THE INFINITIVE. 149 
 
 5. The Infinitive is used with or without a Preposition, 
 in the sense of the Latin Gerunds and Supines ; as, 
 
 'Em<rra/i«vo$ wo^e/a^hv, Horn. Skilled in the art of war. 
 
 'Ev rw [xaQuv, Soph. In learning. 
 
 'ixavos "WEft y.ou npoi%cci, Lysias, Qualified to speak and to 
 act. 
 
 TJicrrovs vspm Ivurxovetv, Xen. He sends trusty men to 
 examine. 
 
 KoIxXkttx &?*, Xen. Most beautiful to behold. 
 
 6. The Infinitive of the Present, Aorists, and Future, 
 preceded by the Verb pixKu, expresses the Future ; as, 
 
 Me AAw T£0vayat, Plato, I am to die, 
 
 7. The Infinitive of some Verbs is preceded by £%«, in 
 the sense of Sumpou ; as, 
 
 MnSlv %x ov ™ A**** Dem. They have nothing to say. 
 
 8. The Infinitive is often governed by another Verb in 
 an Imperative sense, understood ; as, 
 
 M*j te crvy' aQocvKTOKri api%sa^isuj Hom. (o^a, beware, OV 
 
 $s\e, wish, und.) Nor contend thou with the immortals. 
 
 9. The Infinitive is sometimes put absolutely, without 
 another Verb expressed j as, 
 
 c fts a7rAw$ s*9mv, Dem. To speak plainly. 
 Aoks7v IfAol, Soph. As it appears to me *. 
 M»x^ou hXv, Isoc. Nearly. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 1. The Participle is often elegantly preceded by the 
 
 Verbs elf*), <ylvoy.cu, <Q(xlvoy.Gti, w»^w, *X U > xvp&/ ; as, 
 
 Xapt? ^;api» Ic-riv >i tjxtovo-' asi, Soph. A kindness always 
 produces a kindness. 
 
 * That is, xocrx to doxuv s/ao), secundhm meam sententiam. The 
 Infinitive is sometimes understood, as hhiyov vctptdoQri, Lysias, (&»> 
 und.) ctuveXovt*, Dem. (<pp<x<jau und.) 
 o3 
 
150 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ova ?%9po5 virri$x*' J ® v > Dem. He was not an enemy. 
 Tov \6yov crov Savfxdcnxs I'^w, Plato, 1 have admired your 
 speech. 
 
 El/Ai is used as an auxiliary with participles, as Tf(W<mj 
 tin, Thuc. 
 
 The Participle is sometimes used alone, sift being un- 
 derstood, as pixwv Koipy (3d,Xiv, r\? h\ jcw'tw fipiQofjLevri, (eVti Und.) 
 Horn. A poppy bends the head, which in a garden is weighed 
 down. To this construction may be generally referred 
 what is called the Nominative absolute. Thus $\>\a.% \\iy- 
 xw Qv'kcLYM, Soph, (h und.) Sentinel was blaming sentinel. 
 
 The Participle of dpi is often understood, as ol h rixu, 
 (ovte; und.) Thuc. Those who are in power. 
 
 c 2. With a Participle Tuy%a'vw signifies by chance; XetvGuw, 
 privately or ignorantly ; <pSdvoj, previously; as, 
 
 "Etyn tvxuv \w, Her. He said that he chanced to be. 
 
 'EXoLQofjLiv SiatpsgovTsc, Plato, We were not aware that we 
 differed. 
 
 <3?Qdw rovg Oixovg evsgyzTvv, Xen. I anticipate my friends in 
 conferring benefits. 
 
 3. The Participle is used after clvXog, tyunpog, nQuvfa, &c. as 
 Autos tovto %oim Qxnolg h, Arist. He manifestly did this. 
 
 4. The Participle is used instead of the Infinitive, after 
 Verbs signifying to persevere, to desist, to perceive, to show, 
 or an affection of the mind ; as, 
 
 Tnv slpww ayovTEf hoiTE\ov<riv, Isoc. They continue pre- 
 serving peace. 
 
 <2>-ov ov x^oo x(>o<T7d,7Yiv bx uv > Soph. I shall not cease having 
 God for my defender. 
 
 "lo-Qt Mtyiypevvi, Aristoph. Know that thou art come. 
 
 Aei%v <ro$o$ yiy^g, Eurip. I shall show that I am wise. 
 
 MspvYitro uvQpuTres wv, Simonides, Remember that you are a 
 man. 
 
 'O ©505 woWgLkh; x a ' l Z H rov S l^ v pwgovg [xzyaiXovg ttoiu/v, rovg <se 
 
 fjuydxovg lUKpotic, Xen. God is often delighted in making the 
 little great, and the great little. 
 
 ZvvoiSa. is found with various cases, 
 
 This last expression must be referred to the force of at- 
 traction, which is particularly exerted on Participles. 
 
( 151 ) 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 1. Adverbs are followed by the Genitive, Dative, or Ac- 
 cusative : 1st, either because they are originally Nouns \ 
 or, 2dly, because those cases are governed by a Preposition 
 understood. 
 
 Examples of the former. 
 Ti\h, rejection, vXviv Ipov, iEschyl. Excepting roe*. 
 Xagiv, for the sake, x^P tv "Ekto§oj, Horn. ,For the sake of 
 Hector. 
 
 XwpJ?, separation, xu§U tuv av^Sv, Her. Without the men, 
 Tov Ato$ huiriov, Plut. In the sight of God. 
 
 Examples of the latter. 
 
 "Anv ovopurov, Plato, (aero und.) Without names. 
 "Ay.cc, \ucc, Horn. (<ru\ und.) With the people. 
 Nat px roh o-mnTgov, Horn. (ItI und.) / swear by this 
 sceptre f . 
 
 The Preposition is sometimes expressed ; Ixaq »v Iuvtuv, 
 
 Her. a^ua tvv avToTg, Plut. 
 
 "ih and l$ov behold, which are sometimes found with a 
 Nominative, are really Verbs, and govern the Accusative j 
 as $ov jus, Eurip. 
 
 2. Adverbs, with the article prefixed, are sometimes 
 used for Adjectives, as Iv tw k^v x?° vc f> Soph. In the former 
 time. In the same manner they are used for Substantives, 
 
 as ol 7reK<xc, Soph. The neighbours. 
 
 3. Adverbs of time are sometimes changed into Adjec- 
 tives ; as, 
 
 * Tlxrtv sometimes assumes the nature of a disjunctive, and is 
 followed by every case, according to the government of the Verb, 
 with which it is connected. 
 
 f Ma generally denies, unless it is joined with v«* ; vh affirms, 
 unless joined with a Negative. 
 
152 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ov x%* ircmvxw) svhiv j3ov\n$6pov a*$pot, Horn. A man of 
 counsel ought not to sleep the whole night. 
 
 4. Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with the Verbs 
 
 iX u > Ka,<Tx u > no/su, $£%&), Qvpi, ^pao^at, &C. as, 
 
 c H$su<; e^e 9rpo? oiitixvTocq, Isoc. Be pleasant to all. 
 
 EC ntzo-xuv, tv Tcotuv, Dem. To receive, to confer, benefits. 
 
 5. Two or more Negatives strengthen the Negation j as, 
 Ovk Eoriv ovTtv, Eurip. There is nothing. 
 
 Ov^ettotb ov^h ov y.ri yvmrui rwv Seovtuv, Dem. Nothing that is 
 necessary will ever be done. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 
 
 The principal relations of things were first expressed by 
 cases ; the others, and that perhaps at a later period, were 
 expressed by Prepositions. As the relations of things be- 
 came more numerous, the number of Prepositions was ne- 
 cessarily increased ; and that great variety, which became 
 expedient in modern times, being applied to the Greek lan- 
 guage, has produced some confusion and difficulty. Twenty 
 different meanings have been assigned to a Greek Preposi- 
 tion ; and the same Preposition has been made to bear the 
 most opposite senses -, as to and from, for and against, 
 above and below. 
 
 One primary natural sense, however, has been assigned 
 to each Preposition ; and to that sense may be referred all 
 the other significations, arising from analogical or figura- 
 tive relations, easily flowing from it, and regulated by the 
 case to which the Preposition is prefixed. The meaning, 
 then, of the Preposition adapts itself to the use of the Case. 
 Thus the primary and natural meaning of vvo is under. The 
 Accusative is used after words signifying motion; hence Cto 
 v I?uov rix9f, Horn, he came under the walls of Troy. The 
 
SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS. 153 
 
 Genitive implies influence or origin ; hence Ino x.<x.vpcc.7os, 
 Hes. under the influence of heat. The Dative expresses the 
 instrument or manner : hence xw iv W jptTspyo-n dxovara, 
 Horn, taken under, or by, our hands. Before the Genitive 
 and Dative it confines itself to a state of rest. 
 
 Mercc signifies with. Prefixed to the Genitive and Dative 
 it is confined to that meaning. When with an Accusative 
 it implies motion, it is succession of place or time, in close 
 affinity or conjunction with its object : thus jxbt i%»a j8«7vf, 
 Horn, he went close with her steps, i. e. after her steps. 
 
 'Ew* signifies upon. With a Genitive it signifies situation 
 upon; with a Dative, close upon; with an Accusative, 
 motion tending upon, &c. 
 
 Thus simple and uniform are the uses to which the 
 Prepositions are applied ; yet Grammarians have not scru- 
 pled to give them the most discordant significations. 
 
 In the following view of the Prepositions the learner 
 may trace the analogy of the different significations to the 
 primitive meaning of each. 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 'Avt*, For. 
 For: %apt? «vtJ %a§iToc, Eurip. favor for favor. 
 Instead of: elpw* »vt* KoXtpov, Dem. peace instead of war. 
 
 'Atto, From. 
 
 From : asnwE Iwi/Vov a7ro tou nvgyov, Her. he threw himself 
 
 from the tower. 
 After : »ro too vvvo'v, Thuc. after sleep. 
 
 'E^ or Ik, Out of. 
 
 Out of: Aia? Ik SaXajU.7vo? a<ysv yyja?, Hom. Ajax brought 
 
 ships out of Salamis. 
 From : Ik S'aXao-crj? U ^dxaa-o-ccv, Her. from sea to sea. 
 After : Ik zr>$ vau/xa;£iaj, Her. after the naval fight. 
 

 154 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 TI%o, Before. 
 Before : v^o Svfiv <pa,tn&' ^h, Aristoph. he appeared to us 
 
 before the door. 
 For : -tt^o 7rarpi%<; knoQwcrx.uv, Her. to die for our country. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 'Ev, In. 
 In : in tw ©jw to t?Xo; Icm, Dem. /Ae end is in God. 
 
 Ivy, With. 
 With : <jv\ ©ew, with God. 
 
 Accusative. 
 E*s, or U, Into. 
 Into: f<? «<rru xaTa&wvKv, Isoc. to descend into a city. 
 
 Genitive and Accusative. 
 
 Aia, Through. 
 
 Through : G. $i» xupuvog, Xen. through the winter. 
 
 A. &» ttovtov, Pind. through the sea. 
 After : G. &a /xaxpou %§ovou, iEschyl. a/iter a forag Jzwie. 
 On account of: A. hot c\, Soph, on account of you. 
 
 Kara, According to. 
 Under: G. Svvca x«t« Ty$ yris, Plato, to go under the eart) 
 Through : G. xkt» o-rpurov, Her. through the army. 
 Against ; G. x«ra rrij woXewj, iEsch. against the city. 
 According to : A. jc«t» Xoyo* £Jv, Arist. 2o live according to 
 
 reason. 
 In : A. I£e<t9)3v xaTa xTuoyAouV, Horn. </ie?/ sa£ in sea^s. 
 
 'Tsfsg, Over. 
 
 Above : G. vv)p yris larl, Eurip. is he above ground P 
 For : G. §m)o-ku usrsg <rsQev, Eurip. I die for you. 
 Over : A. vvfy rov Sopot, Her. over the house. 
 Beyond ; A. j^'yaps inrlp avfyunroy, a power beyond that of 
 man. 
 
SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS. 153 
 
 Dative and Accusative. 
 
 'Aviv, Through. 
 
 Upon: D. si^st <%v<% crKocictu) Aiog cdinlc, Pind. the eagle sleeps 
 
 upon the sceptre of Jove*. 
 Through ; A. ava og*j, Xen. through mountains^. 
 
 Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 
 
 'A(j.<p\, About. 
 
 On account of; G, w$axo$ a,p.<pl /ug^eo-Sov, Horn, they fought 
 
 on account of a spring. 
 About : G. a,p<p\ ttoTuo? otxotm, Her. £/&ey dwell about the city. 
 Concerning: G. (poi[xsv up.<p\ Scupowv xaXa, Pind, tfo spea& 
 
 wew concerning the gods. 
 About: D. a^l o-wpw, JEschyl. about the body. 
 On account of: D. apQl yvvatxi wdaxuv, Horn. To suffer on 
 
 account of a woman. 
 About : A. «jw<p* Tpotccv, Soph, about Troy. 
 
 'Et), Upon. 
 
 Upon : G. ivt\ Qpovou IjcaOe^ero, Xen. he was sitting upon a 
 throne. 
 
 On account of: D. ovk eWi croQov wfi to~j Kgoyovoig fAsya, tyovii- 
 
 cat, Isoc. it is not the part of a wise man to think 
 highly of himself on account of his ancestors. 
 
 Upon : D. IQ' 'lirvrar, Xen. upon a horse. 
 
 Near : D. Isrl o-To/xart tov Trorapov, Thuc. near the mouth of 
 the river. 
 
 To : A. e^so-0' In*! ^7tt»o», Horn, go to dinner. 
 
 On : A, l7ri ya.la.Vj Hesiod, on earth. 
 
 * A Dative after avd is used by the Poets. The construction 
 may be, ocvcc lv axxirrw, up on the sceptre. 
 
 f 'A*cc signifies motion upward, Kara motion downward. So 
 their corresponding Adverbs *vu and xarw signify upwards and 
 downwards. — 'Avl is sometimes used adverbially in a distributive 
 sense. Thus o5«ror avx ukoti /u.srpa f Horn. Twenty measures of 
 water to one (of wine). 
 
156 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Mara, With. 
 
 With : G. {Jbira, tbxwS) Isoc. with art. 
 
 Among : D. a.vro<; p,£T» TTgitiTourt wove'itq, Horn, he laboured 
 
 among the foremost *. 
 To : A. Zeu x s iQn /aeto. Sal:™, Horn. Jupiter went to a feast. 
 After : A. ol v6[x.ot (xetix tov ©eov c-ucpva-i t» v v ttoXiv, Dem. the 
 
 laws, after God, preserve the state. 
 
 Tlaga, Near. 
 
 From : G. ov vctpci tyxxpyvgov x<*^ v $" Iki&tm, Plut. we must 
 
 not seek a favour from a miser. 
 At : D. it^ ox^ouq, Anacr. at the banks. 
 Near: A. jSij ntoL^a, $hct SaXeeo-cm?, Horn, he went near the sea 
 
 shore. 
 To : A. TTa^a a\ zgxofjLcti, Xen. 1 come to you. 
 Above: A. ?ra§a rk a,xxa, ^a, Xen. above the other animals. 
 Against : A. ira.%% <pu'«v, Eurip. against nature. 
 
 Tlz%\, About. 
 
 About : G. Ti TTs^i ^u;^ Ixeyojujy, Plato, what did we say 
 
 about the soul ? 
 For: a>[MvvB(rQa,i Tttg! 7rar§/K, Horn, to fight for our country. 
 About; D. ^w^ajta 7r^i toT? ctepvok;, Xen. a breast-plate. 
 About: A. $uXauui wtjl to <r5/t**j Xen. a guard a6ou£ 
 
 6oc/z/. 
 
 n^oc, Towards. 
 
 By: G. tt^o? twv ©s«v, Xen. 6?/ £fte gods. 
 
 For : G. tt^o? a-cv, ovF l^ou Qgolcrv, Soph. I will speak for 
 
 you, not for myself 
 From : G. x% r > a ' rov ^P^s «^p°s ju.*iJev vtovoh xax.6v, Epict. from 
 
 a good man expect nothing bad. 
 Towards : D. n^os ru rsXn tov (3'iov, iEsch. towards the end 
 
 of Ufa 
 
 To l A. a, $' av [Aa,Qn vottg, rccvroc <rwo~oc.crQcti $i?\.Et" 7Tpo$ yve^s, 
 Eurip. what we learn in youth, we commonly preserve 
 to old age. 
 
 Against; A. srgos xew§« p} Xc&xt*£s. Eurip. do not kick against 
 the pricks. 
 
 * h is found with a Dative in poetry only. 
 
SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 157 
 
 'Tiro, Under. 
 
 Under : G. vvo voaov uvoQcumv, Her. to die under a disease. 
 
 By : G. viro xgncrrm ayopou, Aristoph. 1 am harassed by my 
 creditors. 
 
 Under : D. tip -n\lu, Eurip. under the sun. 
 
 Under ; A. ocvocyscyooi lino QqIvmks, Xen. leading under palm- 
 trees. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS and ADVERBIAL 
 CONJUNCTIONS 
 
 which govern the 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Ai'^s, «9e*, I wish, before the 
 
 Past Tenses. 
 AvtUh, as soon as. 
 "AX? & f*f^g», as far as. 
 
 'Ette*, "^ 
 'Exiiv^, > after. 
 
 "ivx, where. 
 
 "ivoc, that, Imp. Fut. Aor. 
 
 Kxtireg, although. 
 
 Mso-^a, until. 
 
 Mrf, lest, Past. 
 
 v Ottov. when. 
 
 3 Oty*, whilst, Past. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Ai'Qf, el'Qe, 1 wish, Pres. and 
 
 Fut. 
 Interrogative Particles, with 
 
 ay. 
 
 Ivcc, 
 
 TTw? ccv, how 
 
 ]• that, Past. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 \Av, e<xv, nv, i/*. 
 Ei7TE^, although. 
 'Ettolv, l-Ttu^ocy, since. 
 
 'Eaq m, until. 
 
 o^ a , }^^Pr.afdFut 
 
 * AiQi, t?Qt, and jther Particles, are sometimes joined with the 
 Imperfect and 2d Aorist of hpslxu, as 'aw9' o^sXk £<yovo'j t' s/amzi, 
 Horn. 
 
158 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LAN&UAGE. 
 
 Kav, although. | "Otyu, whilst, Pr, 
 
 Ottoj^ av, that. 
 Orav, when. 
 
 U^v av, before. 
 Ylj av, that. 
 
 Infinitive and Optative. 
 "On, that. | "Ottwj, how, that. 
 
 Indicative., Optative, and Subjunctive. 
 
 A X? l > ^X^> until - 
 El, if 
 
 Mr}, forbidding. 
 Mvjtto;?, lest. 
 
 'Ottotj, 
 
 'Ottotccv, y-wheri. 
 
 "Ore. 
 
 •ore, -\ 
 oTav, >5 
 h J 
 
 El is used by the Dramatic Poets with the Indicative and 
 Optative only. By Homer it is used with the Subjunctive 
 also, joined to av or ki. — When eI is used with an Impera- 
 tive, or an Aorist Indicative, the Verb in the corresponding 
 clause, preceding or following, is put in the Indicative 
 with av ; as, d /x*j v tot Ittqvovv, vvv av ovk sv^aivo^nv, Aristoph. 
 
 Mu\ forbidding, with the Present, governs the Impera- 
 tive j with the Future the Indicative ; with the Aorist, 
 when it refers to the Past, the Optative, — when it refers to 
 the Future, the Subjunctive. 
 
 Indicative, Optative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive. 
 
 
 \\v, Ks, Potential, 
 "Euq, as long as. 
 
 MviTTOTF, leSt. 
 
 n$\v, before. 
 to?, that. 
 
 *Av used in prose, and x.s and kzv in verse, give a Potential 
 sense to the Verb. Thus in the Imperative hx ov signifies / 
 had ; sl^ov av, I would have. In the 2d Aorist elvov means i" 
 said ; ufiov av, I would have said. 
 
 The Present Optative with av is often used by tragic 
 writers in the sense of a Future Indicative -, thus ^vo*/*' dv, 
 Soph. I will stay. 
 
 4 Av frequently signifies soever; as, a7ravS > oV av \iyu t 
 
SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS. 159 
 
 Aristoph. whatsoever words I may speak : or; xev xaram/erw, 
 Horn, whatever I may nod. — *Av in this case follows the 
 Noun or Particle, and precedes the Verb. 
 
 *Av is sometimes understood, as JxQov iy»\ Theocr. i. e. 
 ay, / would have come. 
 
 Indicative, Optative, and Infinitive. 
 J 'flo-Tf, so that. 
 
 
 These have ay expressed or understood, with the Opta- 
 tive : w<m is also found with the Imperative. 
 
 Optative and Subjunctive. 
 'Eureay, after, | M>i N , lest. 
 
 Conjunctions Postpositive are ya%, •* 
 
 These are Prepositive and Postpositive, — ay, a^a, }rt, In*. 
 
 The rest are Prepositive. 
 
 These are called Expletive, which are not easily trans- 
 lated into other languages, but have a peculiar expression, 
 the loss of which would be discovered by a critical judge of 
 the niceties of Greek composition : — «$, «,§», «u, ys, W, 
 ^>rra, S» v y, xe, ksv, (xnvj w, wig, itov, ttw, pa, and some others 
 used by the Poets. 
 
 CORRESPONDING PARTICLES. 
 
 'Em^ay, when, — -nwxauTa, 
 
 then. 
 T Ht, as far, — ravm, so far. 
 r Hjuai, when, — tote, then. 
 
 p2 
 
 'H/xev, when, — v$e, then. 
 *Hn*oj, when, — r^og, then. 
 'UvIkk, when, — tyivUu, then. 
 "la-ov, just, — noil, as. 
 
160 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 KccQdffsg, as, — ovroo, so. 
 Msv, indeed, — ^e, but. 
 Mh, both, — $\, and. 
 O^olov, like, — cvctte, as. 
 Opo'iug, like, — wo-TTEp, as. 
 "Qnovy where, — IxeT, there. 
 Ocra-ocKk, as often, — t6<t<tuki, 
 
 so often. 
 Ov, where, — Iks), there. 
 TLdgoe, before. — 7rp)v, that. 
 Tlglv, before, — y, that. 
 U^)v, before,- — ve)v, that. 
 TIpoTE^ov, before, — tt^Iv, that. 
 
 Tote, then, — ote, when. 
 Tors, then, — orocv, when. 
 Tots, then, — lirsiSav, when. 
 Tors, then, — rtnKoi, when. 
 
 Qg, as, — ovrci), so. 
 
 Clg, as, — ua-txvruc,, thus. 
 
 Slcs), as, — ovrv, so. 
 "Onov, where, — hravba,, there. 
 "Orov, where, — svQcc, there. 
 Outwj, 50, — ceg, as. 
 
 V CL<T7TSg, OS, OVTU, SO. 
 
 Cta-Trs^, as,—"X.ou, so. 
 Slcrtrsg, as, — ua-ocvrvs, thus. 
 
 Some of these may be inverted thus : 
 
 a>s— outwc: 
 
 &C. 
 
 One of the Corresponding Particles is frequently omitted, 
 
 as ovah Iv rZ $iZ rap^icrra yiSfoia-KU w? y> %^k, Socrates*. 
 
 * See Appendices IV, V, VI, and VII, for Accents, Prosody ; 
 Poetry, and Dialects* 
 
( 161 ) 
 
 APPENDIX. No. I. 
 
 THE DIGAMMA. 
 
 The form of this character was at first a Gamma re- 
 versed, then a Gamma : afterwards it assumed the shape 
 of a double Gamma, F, whence it derives its name. 
 Hence it has sometimes been written r, as TdQioi for Fa&o*. 
 The Emperor Claudian ordered that it should be written j-, 
 or F reversed. It has frequently been expressed by B, and 
 sometimes by K, M, IT, P, <£, X. 
 
 It cannot be ascertained with precision what was the 
 pronunciation of the Digamma, which underwent some 
 changes. In its origin it was probably a soft guttural 
 sound, like the German g final in wenig. Such is the pre- 
 sent Greek pronunciation of the Gamma. 
 
 From a guttural the transition was natural to the sound 
 of our W. In this state it passed into Italy, under the 
 form of V, and retained this pronunciation during the 
 rougher periods of the Latin language. 
 
 The German g, commonly expressed by gh in the Eng- 
 lish language, has shared in South Britain the fate which 
 the Digamma experienced in many parts of Greece, and is 
 disused. The few instances in which it is sounded follow 
 the principle of the Digamma F, as cough, enough, laugh, 
 rough, tough, trough. 
 
 The frequent recurrence of this sound produced an 
 effect so harsh and inelegant, that in the most polished 
 states of Greece it was changed into an aspirate, and in 
 the iEolic and Latin dialects it was softened into F or V, 
 and became the Digamma. The Lacedesmonian dialect, a 
 branch of the iEolic, always pronounced, and generally 
 p3 
 
162 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 wrote, the Diagmma like B, a letter which in modern 
 Greece has the sound of V. 
 
 It is probable that the Digamma final, or before a conso- 
 nant, was pronounced like our F, and before a vowel like 
 our V. 
 
 The old Dialects of Greece admitted few or no Aspi- 
 rates. The Digamma was calculated to prevent the hiatus 
 which the concurrence of vowels would produce. 
 
 The Digamma, however, was not interposed between 
 two vowels to avoid a hiatus, but it was a regular consti- 
 tuent letter of the word, omitted in a later age for the 
 sake of smoothness. 
 
 Aspirates were afterwards introduced into all the Dia- 
 lects except the iEolic, which adhered to the Digamma. 
 Hence it has preserved the name of the iEolic. It has 
 also been called the Homeric Digamma, because that great 
 Poet adopted the original forms of the iEolic and Ionic 
 Dialects, which threw a majestic air of antiquity on his 
 poetry. Homer did not, however, adopt arbitrarily the 
 different Dialects. His was the pure appropriate diction of 
 verse, the classical language of ancient Greece. The use 
 of the Digamma having been insensibly abolished by the 
 introduction of Aspirates, the transcribers of the works 
 of Homer neglected to mark it : and the absence of the 
 Digamma made him inharmonious and defective. The 
 restoration of the Digamma has at length vindicated the 
 Poet, and displayed the harmonious beauties of his original 
 versification. 
 
( 163 ) 
 
 APPENDIX, No. II. 
 
 PRIMITIVES. 
 
 In the opinion of some philologists the original form of 
 Verbs consists of two letters, the former denoting the Ac- 
 tion, the latter the Person : and from these elements spread- 
 ing out into many vowels and consonants significantly 
 combined, was formed that copious variety of words, 
 which distinguishes the Greek language. 
 
 The five simplest combinations are ecu, w, *«, ow, and vu. 
 Of these the former letter will be found to indicate some of 
 the principal functions of nature. The last letter denotes 
 the Person, and is changed into other letters to signify the 
 different Persons, Numbers, Tenses, and Moods. The first 
 Person of the Active has the force, and the abbreviated 
 form, of Iyw x j that of the Passive, of jae. The most simple 
 change of the former into the latter formed the Middle 
 Voice. Thus I'w, I produce, I send into existence ; hpi, or 
 dp.], I produce myself, I send myself into existence ; or sim- 
 ply, I exist, I am. From the same principle the origin of the 
 Passive Voice may be deduced. 
 
 "A«, signifies to breathe, to flow. 
 
 v Ea;, to produce, to clothe. 
 
 "lu, to send. 
 
 y Ou, to bear. 
 
 v Yw, to pour, to rain. 
 
 After these Duads, the next combination consisted of 
 Triads, formed by a Vowel inserted, or a Consonant pre- 
 fixed or inserted. 
 
164 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 1. A Vowel inserted: a.vu, to breathe; ieiu, to permit; 
 ldu>, to send , olw, to bear, to think. 
 
 2. A Consonant prefixed : £a'a>, to live ; $w, to bind ; km, 
 to go ; wou, to drink ; 0u'«, to produce. 
 
 3. A Consonant inserted: oiyv, to drive, to lead, e$v, 
 to eat; Ixto, to come ; o§«, to excite ; v$u 9 to flow. 
 
 From these original combinations the formation of 
 Verbs and their derivatives will be easily deduced. Thus 
 from ayw are formed ccyav, uyccXXu, aysXri, ayelgu, ccyogix, ccyga,, 
 ocyvix, &c. From /Saw are formed /Sa£w, pciQoc, fialvu, ficuos, 
 fioiXKu, &C. From Ytu come ¥to<;, hilu, <$u\o$ 3 ^e/*», hc-pac, 
 ha-KQTYiq, Stvw, Sexopw, $ov\o<;, &C. 
 
( 165 ) 
 
 APPENDIX, No. Ill 
 
 LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE 
 VERBS. 
 
 Of the following Verbs, those which are used only in the 
 Present and Imperfect, are found in the first column. The 
 second contains the obsolete roots, followed by the Tenses, 
 which are formed from them. 
 
 A. 
 
 Ayojjua*, cvydito, a,ycz<TQfj<Mt ) yycc,(7diAYiv ) hyciO'iJi,ai } riyec<TQnv. 
 
 'AyvJw, ") uyu, afw, y\%u, 3 ri%a, v)yov. 
 
 '' 'AyvUjUj, S folyu, toc%a, } toc^oc, 'iayov, Idynv, eoTyoi. 
 
 "Ayu, 
 
 afw, *fot,y<xyu, yyctyov, yyctyopyv. 
 
 } 
 
 " k ' > dYta, adricrw, yioyix.cc, yiqov & eaoov, sada. 
 
 Avdavu, 1 . 
 
 Verbs in a J«, frequentatives, as Tpo^afa;, 2o rzm o/£m. 
 Verbs in «9w, derivatives (from other verbs), as dWaOw, 
 from d\wxw. 
 
 Verbs in cuv, derivatives, as x.B^aiu, from x?g«'u. 
 
 Verbs of these three classes, and others in this list of the 
 same form, have generally the Present and Imperfect only. 
 
 Al^EW, 
 
 a,l%Yi(Tb), Xw, uXov, sl\6[jt.Y)v, tXw, iXovpou, tlhU(AYlV. 
 
 Yignx-cc, 
 
166 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 AxSna-x.w, 
 
 'AXs^u, 
 
 'AXzopcci, 
 
 'AXwdsu, 
 'AxIo-ku, 
 
 'AXQotivu, 
 
 ' AfJHZgTciyu 
 
 'Avuyu, 
 
 aywfw, 
 
 wuya, & 
 ccvwyct, 
 
 > ot,X$iu, aX^ricru, r,x}-nKCC. 
 
 {Lx'vau, kXt^dpnv, yX&Xxov. 
 
 aXtvv, yXwara,, yXwcipnv and Asa^v by Syn- 
 cope. - 
 
 aXtu, aXicru), nXiKoc. 
 
 {uXou, a.Xw-0-u], <7o/xai,ri'Aw<ra,>3Awxa& IdXuKX, 
 
 yXupcti, r,Xuv & taiXuv. 
 oA^ew, aXtyno-u. 
 
 d.poc^riw, cc{AccgT , n-(ru), crojitat, v)[jt.dpTri-(Ta., xa, 
 put, vpcigToy, Poet, ri'/x^poroy. 
 
 I aywysw, Imp. yvwyovv, a,vuyi)<ru. 
 
 fdvuyrtpu, Imper. avwyrjOt, aywp^St. 
 
 A7Tf%0avojuai, ccrrz^iu, a7TE;£0wro|i/.at, a7nf%Qflju,at, acr^So^y. 
 
 A^ectxw, ") a^EW, d^i-aw, o-opcci, v^tcc, ygz<rdpnv, >?^cr- 
 
 A^w, J jxat, y}"p£cr9*3>- 
 
 Av^dvw, ~\ 
 
 Av%v, >xv^eu), ccv<;r l -o-u } crou.cu,riv<;r\-(rcc, pai, wZnQriv. 
 
 A^So^at, h,y$iu, a^Qscojuiat, *?%0iV9?iv, dy§i<T§n<?o\t.vA. 
 
 Verbs in aw, frequent atives, as fan-aw* io come frequently. 
 
 Verbs in taw, signifying desire, as jxaQjmaw, £o desire to 
 learn. 
 
 Verbs in aw, signifying imitation, as %ia'w, *o 6e wftite 
 as srcow. 
 
 B. 
 
 /5j5'<ro]w.at, s£Wa, IbWa^xJiv, jSsbrj-xa, 
 juat, @iGa,x, 2d Fut. jSso/nat. 
 
 Part. Pres. /3t£wv. 
 
 2 A. e&jv, Subj. jSh'w, Part. Pr. #£»?. 
 
 &Xr\7w, fistoXv-xec., //.at, I^*)9t)v, fiXnQri- 
 
 a-ofxcci. 
 
 fiaXXricru). 
 
 VSim 2d Aor. Opt. M. 2d Pers. /3xe?o. 
 
 fit&tiXcX,. 
 
 /3twVojua», @tGiu-Kct, ji*at, s'otoy. 
 
 '(3dv, 
 
 Eatyw, 
 BdXXu, 
 
 j /3t£aw, 
 V./St&jjui, 
 
 jSaXw, 
 
 E,5aAov, 
 
 
 Btwcxw, 
 
 f Btow, 
 
APPENDIX. IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 167 
 
 Bpucrxti) y 
 
 BtbOONTXW, 
 
 { 
 
 (3\cc(ttsv, fiXoto-rvj-w, fieSXoio-TvixXy s£Xa<TToy. 
 
 fiotTKllti, fioO-KVI-O-ti), (TOfAXl, @So6<TX.YIXX. 
 
 Paw, ficucru, @i£u,xx. 
 
 (3ov\soj, $ouX»iVo/xat, /3e£ouXV)jwc«j \Gov\yiQnv. 
 
 fipov, fipuo-u, {ZiQpuKX, 
 
 (3pWfU, £bpwv. 
 
 /SsbpwOiW, /SEbpwGotjUt. 
 
 Verbs in £w, preceded by a consonant, as tyifim. 
 
 Ta,fjt.tti } 
 
 tyYifj.ajxYiv, 
 TypcLcrxii}, 
 
 rlyvopM, 
 
 TtyviocraUf 
 
 TllW&KU), 
 
 I yauAw y 
 
 {ynpaw, 
 yipvfu, 
 sysvsui, 
 
 J ysiva/f 
 Lyaw, 
 
 }yv6w y 
 yvupi, 
 
 r. 
 
 yx^au, yxfjt.scroiJi.xi, lyxpwx, yiyxp.*- 
 
 yrjpaa-ojuat, ly»pacra, yEy/paxa. 
 
 Pr. Inf. yr§ayat, Part, yupa'j. 
 
 ysy>?<70jiAca, EyEV»J0"a/uifly, yEysyrj/xat, lys- 
 
 y»)9»5y, iysv6fj.m, yiyovx. 
 
 yuvofxat, lyEiva/xyjy. 
 
 yEyaa. 
 
 yvw-au, copal, zyju-KX, c/uat, EyvwaSjiVj 
 
 yvw<T0»j(7OjW,a;. 
 
 syyaiy. 
 
 Aaw, 
 <o Zearn. 
 
 Aaitii, 
 fo divide. 
 Aaxyw, 
 
 Aap^ayaj, 
 
 Aud<y, 
 dEicra), 
 
 tiEdElXO, 
 
 Atofjxtt, 
 
 1 
 
 \xfy, 
 
 } 
 
 A. 
 
 ^a>i-o-w, aropxi, ^atjxaand^EiS'aa,^*- 
 
 »?juai, l^arv. ($t$nx } 2 Aor. M. Subj. 
 
 dowra** 20 &W772.) 
 
 ScL-au), copal, «$aara, i^aca/xny, ^a- 
 
 xa, o-jutat. 
 
 W-|a>, ^opxi, l$»jf;a, $$r)-x <x 'f yp&i • 
 
 £oi%9lv, s^axoy. 
 
 $ap9wrojtzc«, ^a^Orjxa, Ua^Qtjy, s^a^Soy 
 
 and e^«0ov. 
 Jeffy**, Imper. Se&fl* and &<M. 
 
 W. 
 
 nxw, 
 
168 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 dpwat, Hdp»:v and e<Wv. 
 
 AldgCVTKU) 
 
 o6<zu), eoo^o., dsoo'KXf yjj.cu & arisen. 
 oocccrofAcu, Idooca-ocfxYiVj Syil. Edoa//,»iv. 
 
 Aoxew, ^ *, 
 
 Poet. doJtvjo-a;, > n / 
 
 dSOOKYIKCC, J 
 
 f C ovvocu, di»v>i<ro^a4,EdLiv?i(ra/x>iVjdEdyy*j/Aa^5duv*)0*iv. 
 
 ' ' \ Svvd^u), l$VVC6<T&V)V. 
 
 {dVw, d^'-crw, o-o/^ai, $s$v-kc&, <rpou. 
 
 Avvu. 
 
 Verbs in $u preceded by a consonant, as ku\Iv$u. 
 
 E. 
 
 'EyEt^a, £yp^> Yt<y%6pr,v y iygwyopcc. 
 
 z^nvM, IdEcrSrjv, I'dSida 
 uxa, 
 
 Verbs in s0», derivatives, as <pxEy£0&;, from $Xeyw. 
 
 Eidw, 
 
 EOEW, 
 
 Edoo;, 
 
 9w, deri 
 
 Ei'dw, "\ 
 
 st'cra, I sidew, £*d»j<rw, efivi-o-ot, xay Plup. rjc 
 
 sZ&jv, i'dbv, fufapi, Pr. Opt. ej^uv, Inf, EidE'vat. 
 
 oid'a, -/ 
 
 Verbs in Eivw, 'poetical, as ig£fr«i 
 , 2 I Etpsw, Eipvaouou. 
 
 E?W, >, / » / * , //s 
 
 Verbs in «w, signifying design, formed from Futures, as 
 o-i/siu, to design to see, from otttv, F. o\u. 
 
 ''EXa.ww, eXoo/, IXoutui, r\X<x<7a,, YiXa.<T<x\t.'w , nXotKOC & 
 
 vXnXxKee, IXYiXaxa, riXocfxai, yXviXctfAOU 
 & v)X<x.c-p<xi, flXaQnv & wXacrO^y. 
 
 The origin of the Verb is iXu. Hence three forms are 
 derived ; the Boeotic, Ixdv ; the iEolic, Ixuvu ; and the 
 Doric, IXocvvu. 
 
 « r ,( lit/ » , « / V . c 
 
APPENDIX. — IRREGULAR VERBS- 
 
 169 
 
 "Eo-Sa/, 
 'EtrQtu, 
 Evocu, 
 Evpi&KU, 
 
 E#w, 
 
 EvJ/a; ? 
 
 E£tl0W, 
 
 eXeuSiw, 
 
 El/dEW, 
 
 f*x*»i 
 
 
 Eptiy»o"w. 
 
 Ipucw. 
 
 eXeuctojuom, ri'kiva'Ct, yXvQov, Syn. wXGoy. 
 
 Perf. M. favQa, & IxAvOa. 
 
 Et/dfJCW. 
 
 r 
 
 EUpww, Et;fWaju.*5y, eu^-xa, ^a*, Et/ps- 
 crp/E9)io-o]uai, ect^ov, £<r^o/x*)i». 
 
 2d A. Imp. V^e's. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zaw, 
 
 Z*Vw, 
 
 Zwvyuw, 
 Zwyyu/xi, 
 
 
 £W<y, e£W«, l£u)crolfji.v)v t z^u-kx, a-{xoci 
 
 ©e\w, 
 
 ©iyyayai, 
 
 &VVHTX.UI , 
 
 ©yu'fw, 
 
 ©o^yy/uu, 
 
 ^EXrj'crw, sQ^o-a, teG/X^cc. 
 
 $»'£w_, ed«fa, IQ^dfAYiv, riQn-xKjYH-* 1 ' 
 
 §t-|a>, |ojw.a», sGiyov. 
 
 TtQwixa,, rsSyaa, TsSyfixa & t^Qvuix, 
 
 rsQvs-tdg, (wcra gen. wtos.) 
 
 ESayov, 2 F. M. $<xyou|uat. 
 
 T£0y>J-fw, OfAOH. 
 
 Pr.Imper. tj0»«S*, Opt. T86va*u>, Inf. 
 TiSyayat, Part. rsOya?, 8. A. Ww. 
 
 $op*icrw, IGo^oy, $opov/xa». 
 
 'i^vyw, 
 
 i<*£U(»j 
 
 wgoGuv & i^yyQtjy. 
 
 /X«», 
 
170 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 t T o / ( Icocv, Itvlcru, iVWa. 
 
 C t^Uy kcrw, icroc. 
 
 Verbs in i£w, derivatives from Verbs, as 9roX?/*»fw from 
 
 5rcX?jU,E«. 
 
 'iSJvw, t9«Wj iQvcrct), 'iQvcrct. 
 
 WW*, / fc Wj ~f°^ at ' ^ v ' Iy/xat ' U W 
 
 ~* (. ifw, tfov. 
 
 ',. / rlXocu, IXoccrofxai, \\a.o~ct,fj.r l v , \Xyixoc., IXuo-Qyiv, 
 
 U„p, rx«S*,Pr.M. i'^a, 
 
 t / i 
 
 > 'STTEOJ, CTr>l<rW, TEG-TV,*, a, TT S KT CC [ACCl . 
 
 K. 
 
 iKTVfJU, 
 
 xocvcru, 
 
 KIKO.VXCC, 
 
 Kspccvvvoj, ~\ xe^oio}, xzotkcroj, ly.zpa.cra,, \xEga,cra,fj,v\v , xzxzpa.cr- 
 
 Kzga.vvvjj.1, I | uat ^ EXEpac-Orjv, /CEpac-OnVo^oa. 
 
 / % Cxgaw, x^clcru, kek^cc-ku,, fj,cu, ExgaQriv, x%a%- 
 
 ' ' - .• aofxca. 
 Ksgoaivw, 
 
 xzgoavw, fKE$£w 3 ks$y)-ctv, crofxai, lyJp$Y)<ra,, xzxzpc>r>xa„ 
 xzxEp^uxa, 
 
 KXa^ui, 1 
 
 xXayfw, >xX>ryw, Perf. M. XExXrjya. 
 
 JCEV.Xay^a, J 
 
 xXctvcru, >x"kcuiw, xXairxru) . 
 
 xixXocvxa, J 
 
 KXvu, xXvfxi, Imper. xAuQt & XExXvQt. 
 
 KopZVVVW, 1 JCOpEW, XOpsCTO), IxopECTa, IXOgZCrd.fJ.rw , KZX.OgYI-X.CX,, JJLCU,. 
 
 Ko^vw(ju, S IxopscrQYiv. 
 
 , (kpzu.cw, xpEiAtxerw, xpEu.ricroua,i, EKptiLCtara, zxpzua- 
 
 Kpsfxanvc 
 
 ¥Lpz\J.a>vvvfj.i, 
 
 I x*iai, 
 
 >XEgdEC< 
 
 > xix*U) x.ix* <TO l*' a,i > lKi X v * a ' a 'y lKi X n<7a 'r l ' fiV > iKi X < - 
 
 , CxpzfxaAi>, xpEfjuxerw, xpEfj.ricrofj.a,i, 
 
 ' -l cra.fj.riv, Expzfj.curvv\v . 
 
 " ' LtfEju,r)/x^ xpEfxa.fj.ai. 
 
 l XTHjW, EXT^V, 2 A. M. IxTOCfAYIV, Inf. XTOO-fiat, 
 
 sxraxa & f Part. xt*/asvoj. 
 
 IxTovrjxa, 
 
 
APPENDIX. IRREGULAR VERES. 
 
 171 
 
 KvhivSv, 
 Kvvecp, 
 
 KVXlVOElt), KVXlVOVKTU. 
 
 kvw, kvo-ci), iKvaa, & eKVcrcroc. 
 
 Accyxavv, 
 
 AocpQccvcp, 
 
 AccvQd.vw. 
 
 f Xfi^oj, Xri-qv, %opui, 'ki'wxjx, Att. i%Xy\-x^, 
 
 ypca, eXuxov, Perf. M. XiXoyx?-" 
 X^opoci, XsXriQa, Att. ilXrityu, PuAti/a- 
 pcct, & EiXyppui, iknfflm & El\Y)(pQr,v, 
 XYiQQr l Touo'A ) sXaSov, \Xcc£opriv. 
 XtXahrixcc. 
 
 Xolp-^opxi, lXocp-^ccpr)v, XsXccppcu, 
 sXccp(pQviv . 
 
 Imp. eT^Oov, X»-<rw, cropou, XiXno-pou & 
 XtXcco-pcti, IXvaQvv, sXctQov, }Xcc9opnv, 
 XiXriQtz. 
 
 'Juioiii, 
 
 Xoiphb 
 
 M. 
 
 MayQavw, 
 
 juaGsw, 
 
 pafe-ATopou, IpaQwcrdpYiv, ptpuQrixa., 
 EjixaOoy. 
 
 MapTTw, 
 
 JU.047TW, 
 
 EfzaTTOV, pKTTEUV, ptpUTCOHV. 
 
 Ma^ojuat^ 
 
 p*x™> 
 
 jxcc^rtcropoct & pc^x^opcn, Ipax^crcipnv 
 & lpa.xwoi.pnv, pspuxvpeu, 2 F. 
 
 MeXXw, 
 
 psXXsu, 
 
 psXXn&tP, \ptXXv\croc. 
 
 MeXw, 
 
 pfXiu), 
 
 pikricru, IpsXwo-apriv, pipiXn-xa, pal <& 
 pipQXnpca, ipikffew, spsXcv, p^pnXoc. 
 
 M/yyi/p, 
 
 f ply V, 
 
 pi-%u, Zopcci, epifa, pipi-x<x>, ypcci, 
 ptpl<;opcu, IplxQw, 2 A. P. tpiyw, 
 piyy\<ropou. 
 
 M^uv^crKa;, 
 
 pVCCUJ, 
 
 pvYi-<7u, (Topui, spvritrcx., Ipvna-ccpriv, pep- 
 vwpai, p<pvri<ropa,k, Ipvrio-Qviy, pvnc-Qn- 
 
 
 
 aopou. 
 
 M/^avw, 
 
 (AtVEW, 
 
 ptpsvriKoi. 
 
 Jvlop'yyuw^ 
 Mo^yyyjou, 
 
 Vpopyu, 
 
 p6p%ti), Ipof^ocp'nv. 
 
 'G^copyy^/xt^ 
 
 J 
 
 
172 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Mvku, 
 
 fXSfJLVXCC, 
 fjXVXOV, 
 
 } 
 
 {ji.vx.ci(,u 3 (ucyjcr/crw. 
 
 N. 
 
 Verbs in vctv, 
 vsu 
 
 voKTOfjica, tvcccrcc, ivcca-a.jj.rw, iva.o-yri> 
 
 ' > derivatives, as nmccu, from vtfdu. 
 
 Odcc^u, 
 
 -oft., 
 
 0C7W 
 
 Perf. 
 
 : 'oJw^a has the sense of the Present 
 
 Of&aii 
 
 \ 
 f°ft«, 
 
 rf.MAj 
 
 Qdtx^iu, odcc^rxrcv. 
 
 VidXlVU, ~\ 
 
 OlSccvx, >ol$£U, 
 
 O"ou,cci, ") ,, 
 
 O^ai, J 
 
 2 A. u^6fj.r-,v, J ol^ou, 
 
 ' OXiaQcclvu, 
 OXktQcIvw, 
 
 'OXXv'u, 
 "OXXvfAt, 
 
 'Ofxvvco, 
 "Ofj.Wfj.1, 
 Ofj.opyw[xi, 
 'Oytf/xi_, 
 "Ovivvjixi, 
 'Ofvvv, 
 *Opvpn, 
 
 '0<£>e*aw 
 
 "Op* 
 
 'O^Tua-xa 
 
 CoXzu, 
 
 } 
 
 OfAOU, 
 
 ofAopyw, 
 oveu), 
 
 
 otrq 
 
 PfiAEW, 
 
 'AW, "k , / 
 
 I o®fiAE& 
 
 / I oOXtv, 
 
 HTX.CCVU, J 
 
 o\dv\<ru), toon-act, xoc. 
 
 olntroiACU, loYipoci, ypw, urtQrtv. 
 ol^na-oixcn, wxy-Kct, (xcu. 
 
 iC^UKCC. 
 
 uXitj-^n-ccc, xcc, w/\i<jQo)>, uXi<r9nv. 
 
 oXes-u, uXktcc, uXs-x.cc, (J.cu, & oXuXtxcc, 
 
 uXeo-Qw, uXov, oXu, uXofxriv, cXovpctt, 
 
 uXcc & oXuXcc. 
 
 opoaw, u^oa-cc, up.oa-cc^rw , ufMCxa. & 
 
 6fM'M{A.oKcc, pea, c 2 F. M. opovpyA. 
 
 6[x6o^u, (ojj.o^ccfj.riv. 
 
 ovrj-erw, ao^ca, wvo-ct, uyr l <7ccy.r,v & 
 
 UVOCfJLYlV, WW^Cd, UVoStiV, 2 Aor. UVCC(Jt.nV. 
 
 ogo-v, upca, uppcu, ogwpcc & w^o^cc, upo- 
 
 /LC*3V. 
 
 oQhXy&w, uQtlXnxcc, ufynXcv & wtyXov. 
 o(pXr,<ru, wtyXrixct, 
 
APPENDIX. — IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 173 
 
 n. 
 
 TLegvciw, 
 Hepvnyi, 
 
 Tlplayon, 
 Tliacru, 
 
 TlsTOLVIVU), 
 
 TLertxvwyi, 
 
 TLnyvvu, 
 Tlviyyvyi, 
 
 TLivoj, 
 
 HlTTlffKW, 
 
 TlifxX'Xounu , 
 
 TLrapvvyca, 
 
 TlvvQouoysn, 
 
 'TiiGu, <7relffoycn , BoBOt. for vric-oycn, enrica, 
 
 E7ra9ov, TrsTT^Oa. 
 TruQeu, ira&ria-u, Iv&Qvi&ct, TTETraO^xa. 
 jxivQu, Perf. M. wewovQetj wiisoa-Qa & %a. 
 
 vepctui, Syn. itgau, t 7t^ot,<xu ) sriVpa-xa, /xai, 
 xi'Trpc'/roycn, tVpaQrjv, TrpaQnaoycn. 
 
 TTZTTTti), ni^U), eTTe-^Oi, Veltlyyon ^ ItTeQQviV. 
 
 'KETcH^U, TCerdffii), \<7TerU<TOi, TCVJTer OiXOi &<7re<7rrtZXCt, 
 
 irvzeroiffyon, <7revroiffy.cn & vevrayon , 
 
 iTrerecffQw. 
 irr.yw, iry^to, iVnfa, Ivn^olynvj 7rs'7rYi-x a '>'y[ Jitt h 
 
 lwii%vnv, iVayfly, 9ray>x70juai , TiTrnya. 
 'Trow, 7rw<7w, ttettw-xo, juat & •7te<7roycn i eVoO^v. 
 
 tt/w, Pres. M. irioyoii, •jrla-oy.cn, eviov, 2 F. 
 
 M. movycn. 
 .Trlyi, Impel'. ttTO*. 
 
 7nw, •jrio'u, eiTiffa. 
 
 •TrXolw, rrXriffw, \irXnffa, I'rr'Kna-ciym, ireTrTwiffycn, 
 
 sTrXyo-Qriv , T£?rA»)0a. 
 T\r)yi, Imp. Pas. E7rAr?/-e»jy. 
 Trroct), TrevruKot. 
 
 <7reru, eveffoi, \<7recra,ynv. 
 
 TSff-eu, e<7rsffov, C Z F. M. <7Teffovycn. 
 •yrraipu, eWTOigov. 
 ttsvQu), <Trevffoycii,'JTe<7rvffyoit ) \'7tvQoy.w.,'7rvQovyoii. 
 
 'Pifr, 
 
 "Pf«, 
 
 P«yyJw, 
 'P^'yyv/xi, 
 Pwyyi/'w, 
 Puyyvjuu, 
 
 l%y«, 
 
 pUEW, 
 
 1 priffffoi, 
 
 P. 
 
 Att. £§^w, £ffw, t^yyjxif etpyycn, & 
 segyytzi, Perf. M. eofycc. 
 
 puww, puwropaj, tpp'jvixa, tpptwy. 
 prj^Wj eppn^cc, Eppyjfapjy, eppr,y<x, & spp'w- 
 ya, Ipp'aynv, pay naoyon. 
 puffw, eppv-fftx, kx, yen & cyon, sppwer- 
 G«>, EppWo, farewell. 
 q3 
 
174 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 2. 
 
 S&yvw'w, 
 
 XbEyyW/Xi, 
 
 SxEdavyvw, 
 SxEdayvw/xt, 
 
 }<t£e'w, (Tvio-ci), to-£;cra,, eVoexo. & E<r©»}xa, 
 
 
 > crxEdaw, <7XEd'aa - w, EO-KE^a-aa, o~y.cn, EcrxE0ao-0*!y* 
 
 {crxXaw, cry.\y\a , oy,c/A, 1 A. £<rx?iXa, ectxAtjxgs. 
 axXnyA, Pr. Inf. (7xX«vat. 
 
 Verbs in o-xw, derivatives, from Primitives in aw, ew, o&j, 
 and ww, form their tenses from their primitives, as ew^Vxw, 
 
 EWpECt), Ewpw'cw, &C. 
 
 Some of these, like Verbs in p, prefix the Reduplication, 
 as yvyvuo-Ku from yywa-w. Some change the vowel of the pe- 
 nultima, as ^£w, r^n'o-w, vGcco-ku. 
 
 i<T7Ctvjy.yA, lo-'TTEiaQriv. 
 
 Z'/TrVdW, 
 
 Sro^svy'jw, 
 
 "ZTOfSVVVfXl, 
 
 Sro^ywfit, 
 Zr^wyyw'w, 
 S/r^yyw^zt, 
 S^'Ow, 
 
 CTTTEtW, 
 
 I ctto^e'w, 
 
 > <TT£OW, 
 
 *"X E 
 
 (7to§ectw, crjopw, icrro^cra., E<7Topso-a//.»iv, 
 so-TC^£ / cr0)iy. 
 
 CTTpw<7w, Ecrr^wcra, E<7T^wcrc4p.ry,E<rTpwju,ai 
 
 T. 
 
 TaAaw, *) rXaw, rXricopx*, TET^nxa. 
 
 TsT\ny.t, f rXrifxi, trXriv. 
 
 Tccvvui, Tuyu, sTCtyov, isrccycc. 
 
 TSLLVUJ, ~\ , , 
 
 ' „ I TEU.EW, TEW.rO"W. 
 
 TEU.W, I /y ,/ * 
 
 / n ^rttnyw, run^cu, zrunqec. 
 
 rsrsmKct, & ( r * ' „ r T / 
 
 rkuwee, J tTpctyov, sr^ayrjy, rpciyvo'oy.cu. 
 
 Tf/xyw and Ta/xyw are both found ; the former derived from 
 te'.uw, the latter from rap. Hence the 2d Aorist is either 
 
 itb^ov or sreifxov. 
 
 T/XTW, TEXW, Te'-|w, fojUCU, ETEJ^Qrjy, ETSXOJ', £TEXO^l»y, 
 
 TETOXCC. 
 
 TiT^aw, 7 rpaw, rpwrw, et^wto, TETp«-xa, /ua», Erpn0>iy. 
 
 Ttrpn/x*, J Trtfotivu, 1 A. Irlr^vcc. 
 
Trtpuicrxu, 
 
 Tguyw, 
 trgccyov, 
 
 Tvyxavy, 
 
 APPENDIX. — IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 175 
 
 Qyiv, TguQwo-ojxut. 
 
 }dpa.jw,EW, dE^ct/^-xa, fxoci. 
 ^ijj.u, 'iSpccpov, 2 F. M. Sgctpovpcu, $z$gop<x, . 
 
 V Qolyvj Qolyopai, 2 F. M. Qccyovij.cu, ttyocyov. 
 
 < TeJ^W, TSV%OIJ.CClfTtTeVXOC,,T£TVyiACCl ) T£TV<;0[Aa,h } 
 
 L £TV;g011V, ETIT^OV. 
 
 T. 
 
 T7r;<7^yso/xat, Woy/ita, uToa-p^Vo/xat, iTTEcr^juai; uffsc^-sfiTj^ 
 
 Verbs in «0w, derivatives, as p'0»vu0w, from <p0E«. 
 Verbs in u«_, polysyllables, as c-Cewuw. 
 
 *. 
 
 <t>a<rxw, < !/? 
 
 
 ft0ew, 
 
 
 
 tuQovy, 
 
 ^«0w a 
 
 wo-w, wcra, wo-juat, wa-0*iy. 
 
 uQwcru, 
 
 
 
 
 
 oi'crw, otcro/xa*, oia-0??y, oicG^Vojitat. 
 
 
 Evtyscw, 
 
 1 A. vjyEyxa, wsyx.a,y.V!V, tive^Guv, rfyEy- 
 xoy, WEyxo/xnv. 
 
 
 lyEXfc', 
 
 1 A. riVEixa, tmjxaftrjy, hwtyfACCi, tjyr^- 
 
 */ ? w, «< 
 
 
 0>jv. 
 
 
 i»*X»j 
 
 Per. M. hhox«- 
 
 
 <pO£EW, 
 
 <Po%rio-v, ItyogriG-a,, viQ6pvy.ou, Syil. PpEW, 
 (Pprjcw, &C. 
 
 
 „$£»y**» 
 
 Imper A. 2 <Pfts. 
 
 $0ay<y, 4 
 
 r (Ji0aw, 
 
 (p0cccrw, (f)0tjtro/xat, E<f>Qa-cra, xa. 
 ?<p0»i». 
 
 <D0/yw, 
 
 <p6;Wj 
 
 <p0t-<r#, cropoti, £<p9i-xa, juat, 
 
 ©UW_, 
 
 >&("> 
 
176 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 X. 
 
 'ftfitw, 
 
 
 Xatfw, 
 
 } w**™* 
 
 Xugvio-u), %a,^(royM\ t \y^,^w. 
 
 X*?»> 
 
 >X a ^' iU) > 
 
 Xai%Y)cru, lx<xi£i>icra, } xf^apn-xa, |wat, 
 
 xsp^xa, 
 
 J 
 
 XE^ap^Vo/xai. 
 
 Xayaaya;, 
 
 
 E^adoy, XE^avda. 
 
 
 p^EicrOjUtai. 
 
 Xacxw, 
 
 \ XMM, 
 
 %av£, ^ayoy/AOi, sp^ayo?., xs^aya & 
 
 XcMTKC&^Ot), 
 
 xsp^va. 
 
 X^UVVlJU), 
 XgWVVVfJLl, 
 
 j X9™> 
 
 Xgvcrit), kex%(i>-[jlou & cr/xa*. 
 
 Xoyytw, 
 
 \ X° u > 
 
 X^o-w, %x u< ™f x-£X u<r ! JiC(,i i Ip^wcrGuv^ 
 
 Xwyyu^t, 
 
 %W(70«Vojuai. 
 
 VojOi^ 
 
 a. 
 
 k)£rw ; wrra, ucrfxccij uavnv. 
 
( 377 ) 
 
 APPENDIX. No. IV. 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 The Acute is used on the last syllable, the penultima, or 
 the antepenultima. 
 
 The Grave is used on the last syllable only. But when 
 that syllable is the last of a sentence, or is followed by an 
 enclitic, the Acute is used. 
 
 The Circumflex is used on the last or the penultima ; and 
 is said to raise and depress the tone on the same syllable, 
 which must be long, and therefore consist of two short. 
 
 The Acute and the Grave are put on long and short 
 syllables 5 the Circumflex on syllables long by nature, which 
 contain a long vowel or a diphthong, and never on the pe- 
 nultima, unless the last syllable is short. 
 
 No word has more than one Accent, unless an Enclitic 
 follows. These incline and throw their Accent on the pre-* 
 ceding word, with which they are joined and blended ; as 
 
 uvQpWTroslcm, crwpot. Icm. 
 
 Ten words are without Accents, and called Atonies: viz. 
 h, Yi, ol, Oil, el, f*j, h, If, (or Ik), ov, (ovx or ovx), wj. 
 
 Rules. 
 
 Monosyllables, if not contracted, are aculed, as oc, %d$, 
 Monosyllables of the Third Declension accent the last 
 syllables of the Genitives and Datives, but the penultima 
 of other cases, as, S. yj}?, x H ?°$> X H fi> X-~Z 0C ' D* X*~Z f > X"? ^* 
 P- X^> X u fi v > X f P«"'» X i7 ^- 
 
178 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Dissyllables, if the first is long and the last short, cir- 
 cumflex the former, as fxovacc : in other cases, they acute 
 the former, as /*ouV«j. 
 
 Polysyllables, if the last syllable is short, acute the ante- 
 penultima, as avfy unoc ; if long, the penultima, as avQpwwou. 
 
 Exceptions with the last syllable short : 
 
 1. Participles Perfect Passive, as tetv/*j*eW 
 
 2. Verbals in eo$ and sov, as ypxTrrsog, y^irriov. 
 
 3. The increasing Cases of Oxytons, as Aa^a?, Aa/x- 
 
 ~oL$og. 
 
 4. Many derivatives, as Trai^'ov. 
 
 5. Compounds of $dx\w, ttoAe'o/, x™> & not w ^h a Prepo- 
 sition, as hy€6\o$. 
 
 6. Compounds of tUtu, mwu, r$£<pu>, with a Noun, if 
 they have an Active signification, as, vpuToroKog, she who 
 produces her first child; %iQokt6vos, he who kills with a sword j 
 Aaorgo^of, he who feeds the people. If they have a Passive 
 signification, they follow the general rule, as Trpwroroxo?, 
 the first-born child; %i$Utovo$, he who is killed with a sword; 
 AacTpotfioc, he who is fed by the people. 
 
 7. Compounds of Perfects Middle with Nouns and Ad- 
 jectives, as ao-rpoAoyes, okoyop.oj. 
 
 S. Many other Compounds retain the Accent, which 
 they had in their simple state, as ov%a,v6Qe», xa-mpcov. So 
 Prepositions, preserving their final vowel in composition, 
 
 Exceptions with the last Syllable long. 
 
 The Attic mode of keeping the Accent on the antepe- 
 nultima in MmXsuc for Mfvteos ; or the Ionie Genitive, as 
 TlnMidhu - t or the Compounds of yixuc, can scarcely be 
 called exceptions, as the two last syllables were in pro- 
 nunciation contracted into one. 
 
 At and oi final are considered as short in Accentuation, 
 as pova-ou, av0§wwo». Except Optatives, as ^tXW*, mvQot ; 
 Infinitives of the Perfect in all Voices, of the Second 
 
APPENDIX. ACCENTS. 179 
 
 Aorist Middle, and of the Present of Verbs in p, as tctw^e- 
 vai, tstv'QQou, TETUTrevat ; Tt>7TE<r8ai 5 icrravai. 
 
 The Genitive Plural of the First Declension circumflexes 
 the last syllable, as povo-uv , except Adjectives of the first 
 Declension, whose Masculine is of the second, as aytoc, 
 olyluv, dyioc, dytuv : with Wvcrtoov, p^Xou'vwv, and %£iOTa;v. 
 
 Oxytons of the First and Second Declension circumflex 
 the Genitives and Datives, as, S. tj/W, t^u*??, t*/**j, Tipjy, nju?j. 
 D. Tt/xa, rt/xaTv. P. Ti/xai, Ti^aiv, Tijua'tV, Tip*?, Tiptt. 
 
 Vocatives Singular in su and o* are circumflexed, as /3aa-i- 
 
 X:i», a$o7. 
 
 Pronouns are Oxytons, except outo?, sx£7vo?, SeTvcc, and 
 those in te^o?, as n'prEpo?. 
 
 The Imperatives 1x0=, siVe, eu^s, *^e and Xa/3e, are accented 
 on the last, to be distinguished from the Second Aorist In- 
 dicative. 
 
 The Prepositions placed after their case throw back their 
 Accent, as Seov cctto. Except ava, and &», to distinguish 
 them from av«, the Vocative of avaf ; and from Aloe, the 
 Accusative of Abu? or A/?. 
 
 Oxytons undeclined lose their Accents when the final 
 vowel suffers elision, as, ira^ \^ov. Those that are declined 
 throw an Acute on the penultima, as, croXX' isr*. 
 
 Contractions are circumflexed, if the former syllable to 
 be contracted is acuted, as yoo?, you? ; otherwise they retain 
 the acute, as (plxss, <pl\u. 
 
 Enclitics. 
 
 Pronouns, pu, }j.ev, poi, p j crov, cso, (7bv, a-oi, toi, <ti ; ov, 
 ol, e, py, o-^s, <t<Pw ; <r$ui, c-Qio-i, a^ixc-, tic, ri, indefi- 
 nite, in all cases and dialects, as, tov, tsv, tu. 
 
 Verbs, ei/ai and $»jp in the Present Indicative, except the 
 Second Person Singular. 
 
 Adverbs, wn 3 kov, iru, vac, •xohv, 1:0x1, except when used in- 
 terrogatively. 
 
 Conjunctions, <y£, te, x.s, jcev, 0»j», vu, vuy, tte^, pa, to<, and ^e 
 after Accusatives of motion, as olMe. 
 
ISO GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Enclitics throw their Accent on the last syllable of the 
 preceding word, if that word is accented on the antepenul- 
 tima, or circumflexed on the penultima, as, rjxovaa rivog, 
 n\Qs pa. 
 
 Enclitics lose their Accents after words circumflexed on 
 the last syllable, as ayaitnq ps ; and after Oxytons, which 
 then resume the Acute Accent, as avu'p t*$ . 
 
 They preserve their Accent in the beginning of a clause, 
 and when they are emphatical, or followed by another En- 
 clitic. 
 
 Enclitic Monosyllables lose their Accent after a word 
 acuted on the penultima, as \6yog pov ; but Dissyllables re- 
 tain it, as Xcyog larl ; else the Accent would be on the prae- 
 antepenuitima. 
 
 The Pronouns preserve their Accent after Prepositions, 
 and after mxa or vi, as ^oc <r\. 
 
 'Earn accents its first syllable, if it begins a sentence, is 
 emphatical, or follows kxk\ si, x.a\, ou»c, «V, or tout, as ovk 
 
( 181 ) 
 
 APPENDIX. No. V. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 Position. 
 
 In Epic Poetry, a syllable, in which a short or doubtful 
 Vowel precedes two consonants or a double letter, is long 
 in every situation, as Suvvi $1 xXayy*}. Horn. 
 
 In Pastoral, Elegiac, and Epigrammatic verse the sylla- 
 ble is more frequently short. 
 
 In Dramatic Poetry, a short vowel before a soft or aspi- 
 rate Mute followed by a Liquid, and before a middle Mute 
 followed by p, remains short. In Tragedy the syllable, if 
 not final, is often long. A short vowel before a middle 
 Mute followed by X, ^, or v, lengthens the syllable in all 
 Dramatic Poetry. The short syllable prevails, in propor- 
 tion as the style approaches to that of conversation. 
 
 A short Vowel is sometimes made long before a single 
 consonant, particularly before a liquid, as irǤa puy/xiM, 
 Horn. 
 
 A short Syllable is often made long when the next word 
 begins with a digam mated vowel, as 6c ol, for fol, Horn* 
 
 When three short Syllables come together, it is neces- 
 sary, for the sake of the measure in Heroic verse, that one 
 should be made long, as Tlfxpihc. 
 
 One Vowel before another. 
 
 A Vowel before another does not suffer elision, as in 
 Latin, at the end of a word, unless an Apostrophe is sub- 
 stituted. 
 
1S2 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 A long Vowel, or a Diphthong, is generally shortened at 
 the end, and sometimes at the beginning, of a word, be- 
 fore a vowel, as oUu h, Horn, toie?, Soph. 
 
 Contraction - . 
 
 A contracted Syllable is often long, as Upog, Igog. 
 
 Two successive Vowels, forming two syllables, even in 
 different words, frequently coalesce in poetry j thus Stog be- 
 comes a monosyllable, and in v AaOer , r) ovk Ivqwsv. Horn. 
 n ovk are pronounced as one syllable. 
 
 Composition and Derivation. 
 
 Words compounded and derived follow the quantity of 
 their primitives, as ar'^og from r^r}, QvyA from e<pvyov. 
 A, privative, is short, as cinpog ; but long in aSavaros. 
 'Af*, l%i, /%*, $vg, £a, are short, as £<xSeoc. 
 
 Penultima of Nouns and Adjectives increasing in the 
 Genitive. 
 A is short, as o-wpaToj. Except in 
 Nouns in av, avog, as TtTav, nrcwog. 
 
 The Doric Genitive, as 3 ATp?^ao, fxova-duiv for ixova-dfuv. 
 
 Kspocc, KZ$&Tog 5 xgas, Kpurog j ^a.o } -^d^og; S^af, SwgtiKog ; 
 S^a«*cs; *%*f, tffWKO? J x.opda£, jcopdoxo? $ v?a|, vedKog; p'«|, 
 p«yo$j crv%(pa,%, crv%(pdKog ; Quia,];, QaldKog ', (piva.%, Qsvaxoc, are 
 
 long. 
 
 I is short, as sp^, Epwo?. Except in 
 
 Words of two terminations, as $E\<ph, h\$U, h^QTvog. 
 
 Monosyllables, as $1$, 9"*vo$ 5 but Alg, A?og; 3p»|, t^o^ 
 cTTt|, ct^os j T '?> tVvo.;, are short. 
 
 Nouns make *9og, as c'gv.ts, o^Qog ; and those making i&>?, 
 if their penultima is long, as Kvnpj, KwipiSog. 
 
 Nouns in if, tyo? or fco ; ', as jut-ao-Tif, paariyog j <£>omf, $oi- 
 
 Monosyllables in *%!•, tTro?, as 9-pj^, ^ittoc. 
 
 T is short, as ttv^, sri/po?. Except in 
 Words of two terminations, as Qopuvv and QopKvg, with 
 
 rpuNk, ypwrrog J yi>4o yvirog ; /9e^pyf, /SfCpyxo?, are common. 
 
APPENDIX — PROSODY. 283 
 
 Penultima of the Tenses of Verbs. 
 
 The quantity of all Tenses generally remains the same 
 as in the Tense from which they are formed 3 as from x§w« 
 are formed ExpJvbv, xfivopcu, ixpwojttijv; from xpim are formed 
 
 KVApiKO,, XEXpYjUai, I)tp*0'<1V. 
 
 The Perfect follows the quantity of the First Future, as 
 
 xrl^ijj, kt1ct(o, eKTixoc, 3 (pvu, (pUo-w, 7Tc'yi7xa. 
 
 If the First Future is long by position only, the penul- 
 tima of the Perfect is short, as yp£.\w t yiypctOa. 
 
 In the Attic reduplication the Penultima is short, as 
 
 ccvrrv, upvycc, opupvyjx. 
 
 The Perfect Middle follows the quantity of the Second 
 Aorist, as &iwov, TETuWa ; except j3s(sgI0a, Eppiya, *EXg<£ya, 
 
 K$y,plyoi } fAEp.vx.cc, TTEVpccycc, Trs^Ixa, rsTfiyoc, &C 
 
 The doubtful vowels before en are long, as TervQam. 
 In the First Aorist Participle, acra is long. 
 In the Imperative of Verbs in p, v is short in polysylla- 
 bles, as xU\vQi, but long in dissyllables, as x?iu0*-. 
 
 In the First Future a, *, and v, followed by era, are short, 
 
 as 'ja.Vfj.u^ct/, d'a.Vfj.c&o'v 5 vo/xi^w, vofxicru 5 5cAu'£o>, xkvau. 
 
 But a<7« is long from Verbs in aw preceded by a Vowel, 
 or in %<x.'j) } as $Eaw, $etz<rw 5 opdu, Spcccrw. \au and y<rw are 
 long from Verbs in w pure, as tiu, rfru 5 iV^u'w, fayvc-u. 
 
 .Quantity of the last syllable. 
 
 A Vowel at the End of a Word. 
 A, I, Y final are short. Except 
 
 A long. 
 Nouns in £a, 0a, ja, £a, ia, and polysyllables in «i«, as 
 
 x-pc/Aci; with fuAaxa, AaSpa and Trspa. 
 
 Duals of the First Declension, as fxova-cc. 
 
 Adjectives in a pure and pa from masculines in c,-, as &- 
 
 Kata, 7>[JL£T£p<Z. 
 
 Nouns in «a from svu, as ^otAEtafrom SouWw. 
 Oxytons of the First Declension, as ^apa. 
 Accusatives in « from Nouns in sue, generally in the At- 
 tic Dialect. 
 
?4 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Vocatives from Proper Names in a?, as IT«'x?v«. 
 The Doric a, as d vay» for v sruy*?. 
 
 I long. 
 
 The names of letters, as f r j with xp7. 
 The Paragoge in Pronouns and Adverbs, as qvtoct), vvvi : 
 except the Dative Plural, as o-o7<n. 
 
 The Attic * for a, s 3 or o, as rctvrl for tccvtoc, lh for o&, 
 
 rouxi for rot/ro. 
 
 Y long. 
 
 The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs in up, as s$u. 
 The names of letters, as pv-, with ypu : J is common. 
 
 AN, IN, YN final are short. Except 
 
 Ay long : Words circumflexed, as 7rav. 
 Oxytons Masculine, as Tirdv. 
 These Adverbs, «yav, evoiv, \ia.v, kspolv. 
 The Accusative of the First Declension, whose 
 Nominative is long, a.s<pixla,v. 
 
 Iv long : Words of two terminations, as hx<pU and &x-#j. 
 c Hpv and vytiv, when circumflexed ; rh, Dor. for 
 
 a-o) -, k6v'.v. ITplv is sometimes long in Homer. 
 Nouns in «, tvoj, as p'»jypv. 
 
 Tv long : Words of two terminations, as <p6%xw and QopKug. 
 Accusatives from v$ long, as o<Ppu> ; with wi. 
 The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs in up, 
 
 aS ih'lKVVV, ttyvv. 
 
 AP, YP final are short. Except 
 A§ long : r»£ and e&vrup are sometimes long in Homer. 
 Yp long : Uvp. 
 
 AS, IS, YS final are short. Except 
 
 As long : Nominatives of Participles, as rv-^s. 
 
 All Cases of the First Declension, as fugja?* 
 
APPENDIX, — PROSODY. 1S5 
 
 Plural Accusatives in cc$ from the long « in ff\e 
 Accusative Singular of Nouns in &$. 
 
 NouqS in ag, uvrog, as A"ag j with raAas. 
 
 Is long : Words of two terminations, as h\q>\$ and hxqlv. 
 Nouns in *$ increasing long, as kU, juo$. 
 
 Tj long : Words in two terminations, as <p6%Kvv and <p6fKvg. 
 Monosyllables, as ^vg, with xwuvj. 
 Oxytons making the Genitive in 0? pure, as vr7<n9v$ : 
 
 iX®v\ is common. 
 In Verbs in upi, as $>Uw$» &c. 
 
 r3 
 
1S6 
 
 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 APPENDIX. No. VI. 
 
 POETRY. 
 
 I. Feet. 
 
 Each of the following Divisions consists of feet equal in 
 time, as one long is equivalent to two short syllables. The 
 first two contain the simple, the last three the compounded 
 feet. 
 
 I. II. 
 
 Iamb, 
 
 Trochee, 
 
 Tribrach, 
 
 II 
 
 Spondee, 
 
 Dactyl, 
 
 Anapest, 
 
 I. 
 
 
 Choriamb, 
 Antispastus, 
 Ionic a majore 
 Ionic a minore 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Paeon I, 
 Paeon II, 
 Paeon III, 
 Paeon IV, 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 Epitrite I, 
 Epitrite II, 
 Epitrite III, 
 Epitrite IV, 
 
 _ _ i> _ 
 
 
APPENDIX. POETRY. 
 
 187 
 
 2. Metres. 
 
 A Metre, or Syzygy, consists properly of two feet, be- 
 cause in beating time the foot was raised once in two feet. 
 But by Metre is generally understood a Verse, or, except 
 in Dactylic Metre, a system of Verses. 
 
 Of Metres there are nine species : 
 
 1. Dactylic, 
 
 6. Antispastic, 
 
 2. Iambic, 
 
 7. Ionic a majore, 
 
 3. Trochaic, 
 
 8. Ionic a minore. 
 
 4. Anapestic, 
 
 9. Pseonic. 
 
 5. Choriambic, 
 
 
 These Metres take their names from the feet, of which 
 they are principally composed. With the Dactylic mea- 
 sure, consisting of Dactyls and Spondees, the learner is 
 supposed to be acquainted. 
 
 Iambics. 
 
 Of Iambics there are three kinds : Dimeters, consisting 
 of two measures, or four feet ; Trimeters, of three mea- 
 sures, or six feet ; and Tetrameters, of four measures, or 
 eight feet. 
 
 The following is a synopsis of the feet strictly allowed in 
 every place of a Trimeter. 
 
 1st Metre 
 
 2d Metre 
 
 3d Metre 
 
 Every foot, except the last, admits an Anapest of Proper 
 Names. 
 
.168 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Trochaics. 
 
 OfTroehaics there are two kinds, Di meters and Tetra- 
 meters. 
 
 Synopsis of a Tetrameter Catalectic : 
 1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre 4th Metre 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 Every foot, except the fourth and seventh, admits a Dac- 
 tyl of Proper Names. 
 
 In Tragic Trochaic Tetrameters, an Anapest is admitted 
 only in Proper Names. 
 
 A Pause takes place at the end of the fourth foot, or 
 second metre, which properly ends with a word. 
 
 The Trochaic Tetrameter is easily reducible to the Iam- 
 bic measure, if a Cretic, or its equivalent, is removed from 
 the beginning of it. 
 
 Anapestics 
 
 admit Anapests, Dactyls, and Spondees, and are commonly 
 Dimeters of four, and sometimes Monometers of two feet. 
 Of the former the most strict is the Dimeter Catalectic, 
 called a Parcemiac, which closes the system. 
 
 Anapestics may contain an indefinite series of Metres. 
 Any number of these constitutes a system, which may be 
 considered as extended without any distinction of verses, 
 or, in other words, may be scanned as one verse. It has, 
 generally, for the sake of convenience, been divided into 
 regular Dimeters, which of course can admit no licence in 
 the final syllable, and which must always be followed by a 
 
APPENDIX. POETRY. 
 
 189 
 
 Paroemiac. But as in this mode of division it must often 
 happen that a single Metre remains before the final Parce- 
 rniac, that Metre is placed in a separate verse, and is termed 
 a base, or supplement. 
 
 The only restraint in Anapestics is. that an Anapest must 
 not follow a Dactyl, to prevent the concurrence of too many 
 short syllables ; that each Metre must end with a word ; 
 and that the third foot of the Paroemiac must be an Ana- 
 pest. 
 
 Anapestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 
 
 1st Metre 
 
 2d Metre 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 A Paroemiac, or Dimeter Catalectic. 
 1st Metre 2d Metre 
 
 Anapestic Base, or Monometer Acatalectic. 
 One Metre 
 
 1 
 
290 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 APPENDIX, No. VII. 
 
 DIALECTS. 
 
 The Pelasgi, a wandering people, are said to have been 
 the first inhabitants of Greece. Their language was im- 
 proved by Cadmus, who increased the number of letters 
 and introduced the Phoenician characters. When the de- 
 scendants of Hellen, spreading their incursions from Thes- 
 saly, had made themselves masters of the country, their 
 language, which differed from the Pelasgic chiefly in its 
 inflections, became the common language of Greece, under 
 the name of Hellenic. 
 
 It is probable that the only difference, which existed at 
 first, was between the inhabitants of the sea-coast and those 
 of the inland part of the country. 
 
 The former, inhabiting Attica and Hellas or Achaia, 
 then called Ionia, spoke what is called the Old Attic and 
 the Ionic, originally the same language. 
 
 The people of the interior parts of Greece used a rough 
 and broad language, known by the name of the Old Doric j 
 and the iEolians, a branch of the original people, who set- 
 tled in Boeotia and Peloponnesus, spoke a Dialect very simi- 
 lar to the Doric. 
 
 By the progress of civilization, these Dialects were sof- 
 tened and improved. The Doric was mellowed into the 
 beautiful language used by Theocritus. The Ionians made 
 incursions into Asia Minor • settled on a part of the coast 
 which received from them the name of Ionia; and by an in- 
 tercourse with their Asiatic neighbours, their language as- 
 
APPENDIX. DIALECTS. 191 
 
 sumed the sweetness and grandeur which we admire in He- 
 rodotus. 
 
 The Attic, having passed, like the other Dialects, through 
 many gradations, one of which was marked by the name of 
 the Middle, was refined into what was called the New Attic, 
 and became so polished and elegant, that it was adopted by 
 men of letters and eloquence in every part of Greece. 
 
 Thus the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and Molic, are the four 
 principal Dialects of ancient Greece j but the separate in- 
 terests and pursuits of different independent States pro- 
 duced a greater variety. 
 
 The difference was not confined to letters and syllables : 
 if extended to words. Thus, according to Aristotle, a vil- 
 lage in the Doric Dialect was *«/*»), in the Attic, Sn^o*;. To 
 do or act in the former was ^«», in the latter, ^drruy. 
 
 Writers in the Old Attic, Thucydides, the Tragic 
 Poets. Middle Attic, Aristophanes, Lysias, Plato. 
 New Attic, iEscHiNES, Demosthenes, Isocrates, Me- 
 
 NANDER, XENOPHON. 
 
 Old Doric, Epicharmus, Sophron, and the writers of 
 the original Songs to Bacchus, which were succeeded by 
 the more polished Choruses in Tragedy. New Doric, Bion, 
 Callimachus, Moschus, Pindar, Theocritus. 
 
 Ionic, Anacreon, Arrian, Herodotus, Hippocrates, 
 Pythagoras. 
 
 Molic, Alcjeus, Sappho. 
 
 These Dialects are distinguished from the Common lan- 
 guage, the koivy) $tclXsxTo<;, called also Hellenism, consisting 
 of those words and inflections, which were common to every 
 part of Greece. 
 
 Another important Dialect of the Greek was the Latin 
 language. Some Arcadians, driven from their country by 
 the incursions of the Hellenes, emigrated into Latium, 
 where they introduced the original Pelasgic language and 
 characters. Hence the similarity of the Latin and the 
 /Eolic dialects. New circumstances, and a mixture of the 
 ancient Etruscan, produced that variety, which formed 
 at length a distinct language, but never forsook the ana- 
 logy of its original Molic form. 
 
192 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 General Properties of the Dialects. 
 
 The Attic 
 
 abounds in contractions, as QtXu> for faXM, v^nv for sihw. 
 
 Its favourite letter is w, which it uses for o. 
 
 It changes long into short, and short into long syllables, 
 as Xsw\ for Xd6<;. 
 
 In Nouns, it changes o, 01, and ov of the Second Declen- 
 sion into a> ; as N. V. fed?, G. Xw, D. Xw, A. Aewv, &c. 
 
 It changes «? into m, as Ssrsriis for otawTs. 
 
 It makes the Vocative like the Nominative, as J $foos, 
 Soph. 
 
 In some Nouns it makes the Accusative in w, instead of 
 
 w, wot, Or diva, as Xccyw for Xayuiv. 
 
 It changes the Genitive so? into ewj, as (3a.<rtXsw<; for 0a<«- 
 
 AeOC. 
 
 In Verbs, it changes the Augment £ into >?, in v^ovXofxnv. 
 
 It changes ei into »i, as ^iv for c'^ar. 
 
 It adds a syllable to the Temporal Augment, as opdu, 
 
 lupccov for wpaov. 
 
 It adds 9a to the Second Person in a-, as ijo-Sa for yc. 
 
 It changes A? and pe of the Perfect into h, as Ei'x^a for 
 
 XsXv.tya, upwypou for f*E(ACCg(jux.t. 
 
 It drops the Reduplication in Verbs beginning with two 
 Consonants, as iQ/Aa-rr^a, for fieGxoia-TVKK. 
 
 It repeats the two first letters of the Present before the 
 Augment of Verbs beginning with a, e, q • as 6xsu, uXeku, 
 
 cXidXekoc. 
 
 It forms the 1st Future and Perfect of Verbs in «, as 
 from w -, thus Se'aw, ^sXrjVw, teSsA*)^, as if from $eAeV 
 It drops <r in the 1st Future, as vopw circumflexed for 
 
 vofxicriij. 
 
 It changes s in the penultima of the Perfect Active into 
 
 o, as 'io-r^otya, from <rv$s$w. 
 
 It forms the Pluperfect in n, npy « or eu. 
 
 It changes ETw<rav and arw<?av in the 3d Person Plural 
 Imperative into ovrm and olvtcdv, as tutttovtwv for rwTsru<r<xv 
 
APPENDIX. DIALECTS. 193 
 
 rv-^oivTuv for TV-^oirua-oiv 5 and g-(W«v into crOcoy, as tuttteVSwv 
 
 fop TU7TT£(T0W(7aV.. 
 
 It makes the Optative of Contracts in w, as (PiXoinv for 
 
 It changes p before jua; in the Perfect Passive of the 4th 
 Conjugation into <r, as we^ac/xa* for witya.ppa*.. 
 
 The Ionic 
 
 has a concourse of vowels, as <n\wa,l* for o-s^'y*?. 
 
 Its favourite letter is »i, which it uses for a and e. 
 
 It puts soft for aspirate, and aspirate for soft, Mutes, as 
 IvQauTa for IvtocvQcc, ju9wv for %trwv. 
 
 It prefixes and inserts e, as i«\ for wv. 
 
 It inserts t, as pst» for ps'a. 5 and adds instead of subscribing 
 it, as pVidios for p'adto?. 
 
 In A r ow«s of the First Declension, it changes the Geni- 
 tive ov into ew, as TroinTsw for ttowtov. 
 
 It changes the Dative Plural into ti? and yo-*, as ^eivJs xs^«- 
 Aycrt, Hes. for ^hvows xE<PaXa7f . 
 
 In the Second it adds * to the Dative Plural, as to~« I'p- 
 yoto-t, Her. for to*s tgyoT?, neglecting v before a vowel in 
 prose. 
 
 In the Third it changes e into *, as (3ouri\*os for (3ouri\(os, 
 
 It changes the Accusative of Contracts in a and w\ into 
 ouv, as a$ouv for a$c«. 
 
 In Fer6s, it removes the Augment, as 03 for *£*. 
 
 It prefixes an unusual Reduplication, as kUx^ov for *x«/*ev. 
 
 It terminates the Imperfect and Aorists in cncov, as tuVte- 
 <rxov, TU^ao-xoy, for etutttov, etu4/«. 
 
 It adds o-i to the Third Person Subjunctive, as tx/Wjkt* 
 for t«Vt»j. 
 
 It changes etv, eij, e* of the Pluperfect into ex, eccg, ee, &c. 
 
 aS ItSTvQeO,, <Xq, &C. 
 
 It forms the Third Person Plural of the Passive in am 
 
 and aro, as tve-teWcc* for Tt/ffToraM, ETiOlaTo for ETiQEyTo, IWo 
 for hvto. 
 
 It resumes in the Perfect the Consonant of the Active, as 
 
 TtrvtyoiTCU for TETUjUjUEVOi BlCrl, 
 
 It changes 0- into the Consonant of the Second Aorist, as 
 
 vrstyoiSoLTCii for TrsPgacr/AEyoi Etcn. 
 
 S 
 
194 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The Doric 
 
 has a broad pronunciation ; its favourite letter is a, which it 
 uses for s, », o, w, and ov. 
 
 It changes f into &§, as ocr^w for o&. 
 
 In Nouns, in ihe First Declension, it changes ov of the 
 Genitive into a, as <*$<* for a*^>y. 
 
 In the Second Declension it changes ov of the Genitive 
 into u, as SeS for §«?? ; and ow? of the Accusative Plural into 
 oj and uc, as Sec? for &tov y g. 
 
 In the Third Declension it changes cog of the Genitive 
 
 into svg, as ^siXsvg for x-'^ ?' 
 
 In Ferta, it forms the 2d and 3d Person Singular of the 
 Present in eg and e, as tuVts?, tuVte, for rvnrus, rvintt. 
 
 It changes o/u.ev of the 1st, and ouo-i of the 3d Person Plu- 
 ral into opts and ovri, as \iyopic, "kiyowi, for Xtyoptv, Xiyova-i. 
 
 It forms the Infinitive in /aev and fxsvca, as rvTrrs^iy and 
 
 It forms the Feminine of Participles in o«r«, euoto, and 
 
 uyoi, as TVTTToicra, TuVrEUcra and tvtctwo-x, for T^Vroi/o-a. 
 
 It forms the First Aorist Participle in «k, atcra, atv, as 
 rv^-ong, cacroc, cav for rv^-ag, cco-a, ecv. 
 
 In the Passive it forms the 1st Person Dual in so-Qov, and 
 Plural in er9a, as rvirTop-so-Qov, E<70a, for TUwrcju-sSov, eQcc. 
 It changes ov of the 2d Person into sv, as tvVteu for 
 
 TVTTTOV. 
 
 In the Middle, it circumflexes the 1st Future, as rv^ov- 
 
 fAKi for ru'-^o/xat. 
 
 It forms the 1st Person Singular of the Future in tv/iou, 
 and the 3d Plural in twroa, as tu^su/xch, Tv^uwa*. 
 
 The .ZEolic 
 changes the Aspirate into the Soft breathing, as ij/A^a for 
 
 It draws back the Accent, as eyv for lyu, Qvui for #«/-<.), 
 cuvoija for cn/voT^a, cLyaQoe for a,ya.Qoc; and circumflexes acuted 
 monosyllables, as Zeus for Zst/?. 
 
 It puts 9os for 9sv, as oirur9a for onurQa. 
 
 It resolves Diphthongs, as wai's for rcar?. 
 
APPENDIX. DIALECTS. 195 
 
 In Nouns of the 1st Declension it changes oy into «o, as 
 ai^oto for a.i$ov . 
 
 It changes m of the Genitive Plural into auv, and a? of 
 the Accusative into cm?, as juoucawv, (xova-ouc, for fj.ov<rwv } /Wo-a?. 
 
 In the <2d Declensiou it drops the i subscript in the Da- 
 tive, as x.6<rp(t) for koVjuw. 
 
 In the 3d Declension it changes the Accusative of Con- 
 tracts in u and w?into wv, as a$wv for a$oa ; and the Geni- 
 tive ou? into cu<;. 
 
 It forms the 3d Person Plural of the Imperfect and 
 Aorists of the Indicative and Optative in cav, as Itvttoo-uv 
 
 for STU7TT0V. 
 
 It changes the Infinitive in av and ov* into ai? and o*?, as 
 
 ysXccl'g for ysXav, xpverens for x? v<T0VV - 
 
 It changes »v of the Infinitive into *)v, as tuVt*tv for raws- 
 r«y. 
 
 In the Passive it changes /xE0a into p^t and pOsy, as rvv- 
 tojueQs and tu'ttto/ajQsv for tuttt o /xE0a. 
 
 The Poets 
 
 have several peculiarities of inflection. 
 
 They use all Dialects ; but not indiscriminately, as will 
 be seen in the perusal of the best models in each species of 
 Poetry. In general, they adopt the most ancient forms, as 
 remote from the common Dialect. 
 
 They lengthen short syllables, by doubling the Conso- 
 nants, as eWetcm for sa-srenyby changing a short vowel into a 
 diphthong, as w for lv ; or by * final, as la-rh QlXov. 
 
 They add syllables, as <p6ue for <pZ?, opaav for 1%m>. 
 
 They drop short vowels in pronunciation, to diminish 
 the number of syllables, as sytvro for lyinro. 
 
 They drop syllables, as aXQi for uXQiTov. 
 
 In Nouns, they form the Genitive and Dative in <p*, as 
 
 XE^aXrJ^t from x-tQaXn. 
 
 In the 2d Declension, they change the Genitive ov into 
 oio, as 7ro\i{Mio kockoTo, for •7roXefjLov xolxov, Horn, and oiv in the 
 Dual, into owv, as XSyotfr for Xoyoiv. 
 
 In the 3d Declension, they form the Dative Plural by 
 adding * or o-t to the Nominative Plural, as tccis, vetihf, 
 ToiiSto-i or irathaO'i. 
 
V 
 
 196 GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 In Neuters, they change a into eo-t or wo-*, as jS^aTa, /&- 
 
 They form several Verbs, of a peculiar termination, in 0», 
 
 cyw, o-Sa), <nc«, c-ttw, 0"^w, fw, «w, styw, *?w, oiaw, ouw, and ww, as 
 jSe^wGw, f|«i &c. So oiVw from oi'w, &c. 
 
 They have Particles peculiar to themselves, as oc^ou, $r$n, 
 ix*m, ri/^oj, [azo-Qx, vs$9e, o^a, >ce, pa, &C. 
 
 END OF THE ANCIENT GREEK.